You are on page 1of 568

B-GB-EXP 4 011377 049963

At a glance: All manuals, brochures in PDF format and the latest complete KNX data-
base combined on CD - Just install the Catalogue App from the enclosed CD on your
personal computer. In offline mode you can select a product and find all details as well
as possible software or manuals.

Sample case MK5


The presentation concept with removable displays.
The new sample case MK 5 is available on request.
The design ranges with original covers are presen-
ted on seven displays with eleven presentation areas.

ALBRECHT JUNG GMBH & CO. KG

Export 26
P.O. Box 1320

Export 26
D-58569 Schalksmhle
Germany

Tel.: +49 2355 806-553


Fax: +49 2355 806-254 Export 26
E-mail: mail.vka@jung.de
January 2015
Internet: www.jung.de/en Certified proof
of origine We assume/accept no liability for
For sales contacts in your country see: Made in Germany these catalogue being complete,
www.jung-salescontact.com by TV Nord. correct or up-to-date.

3870_Umschlag_Kat_Export26_RZ.indd 1 03.03.15 15:56


B-GB-EXP 4 011377 049963

At a glance: All manuals, brochures in PDF format and the latest complete KNX data-
base combined on CD - Just install the Catalogue App from the enclosed CD on your
personal computer. In offline mode you can select a product and find all details as well
as possible software or manuals.

Sample case MK5


The presentation concept with removable displays.
The new sample case MK 5 is available on request.
The design ranges with original covers are presen-
ted on seven displays with eleven presentation areas.

ALBRECHT JUNG GMBH & CO. KG

Export 26
P.O. Box 1320

Export 26
D-58569 Schalksmhle
Germany

Tel.: +49 2355 806-553


Fax: +49 2355 806-254 Export 26
E-mail: mail.vka@jung.de
January 2015
Internet: www.jung.de/en Certified proof
of origine We assume/accept no liability for
For sales contacts in your country see: Made in Germany these catalogue being complete,
www.jung-salescontact.com by TV Nord. correct or up-to-date.

3870_Umschlag_Kat_Export26_RZ.indd 1 03.03.15 15:56


U_innen_3870_GB_26:3264 U innen Tabellen 28.02.2015 11:04 Uhr Seite 1 U_innen_3870_GB_26:3264 U innen Tabellen 28.02.2015 11:04 Uhr Seite 2 U_innen_3870_GB_26:3264 U innen Tabellen 28.02.2015 11:04 Uhr Seite 1 U_innen_3870_GB_26:3264 U innen Tabellen 28.02.2015 11:04 Uhr Seite 2

Mechanical inserts Mechanical inserts Electronics Electronics Mechanical inserts Mechanical inserts Electronics Electronics
Ref.-no. page Ref.-no. page Ref.-no. page Ref.-no. page Ref.-no. page Ref.-no. page Ref.-no. page Ref.-no. page

1-gang switch insert 10 AX/250 V Rotary blind switch 10 A/250 V Rotary dimmer insert Universal relay switch insert 1201 URE 87 1-gang switch insert 10 AX/250 V Rotary blind switch 10 A/250 V Rotary dimmer insert Universal relay switch insert 1201 URE 87
1-pole, 1-way, 10 AX/250 V 501 U 12 1-pole 1234.10 15 with two way push switch 1-channel switch 1-pole, 1-way, 10 AX/250 V 501 U 12 1-pole 1234.10 15 with two way push switch 1-channel switch
2-pole, 1-way, 10 AX/250 V 502 U 12 2-pole 1234.20 15 for incandescent lamps, halogen lamps AC 230 V ~, 50/60 Hz, 2-pole, 1-way, 10 AX/250 V 502 U 12 2-pole 1234.20 15 for incandescent lamps, halogen lamps AC 230 V ~, 50/60 Hz,
1-pole, 2-way, 10 AX/250 V 506 U 12 060 0600 W, 230 V ~ 266 GDE 42 neutral conductor required 1-pole, 2-way, 10 AX/250 V 506 U 12 060 0600 W, 230 V ~ 266 GDE 42 neutral conductor required
Intermediate, 10 AX/250 V 507 U 12 060 0400 W, 230 V ~ 244 EX 42 2300 W Intermediate, 10 AX/250 V 507 U 12 060 0400 W, 230 V ~ 244 EX 42 2300 W
3-pole, 1-way, 16 AX/400 V 503 U 12 100 1000 W, 230 V ~ 211 GDE 43 3-pole, 1-way, 16 AX/400 V 503 U 12 100 1000 W, 230 V ~ 211 GDE 43
060 0400 W, 110 V ~ 244-110 43 060 0400 W, 110 V ~ 244-110 43
Rotary switch insert Rotary switch insert
1-gang switch insert with indicator light 3-level switch with OFF-position 1101-4 15 TRONIC-dimmer insert Universal relay switch insert 1201-1 URE 88 1-gang switch insert with indicator light 3-level switch with OFF-position 1101-4 15 TRONIC-dimmer insert Universal relay switch insert 1201-1 URE 88
2-pole, 1-way, 10 AX/250 V 502 KOU 12 2-pole, 20 AX 1101-20 15 with two way push switch 1-channel switch with floating contact 2-pole, 1-way, 10 AX/250 V 502 KOU 12 2-pole, 20 AX 1101-20 15 with two way push switch 1-channel switch with floating contact
1-pole, 2-way, 10 AX/250 V 506 KOU 12 2-pole, 20 AX, with indicator light 101-20 KO 15 for incandescent lamps, halogen lamps, 230 V ~, max. 800 W 1-pole, 2-way, 10 AX/250 V 506 KOU 12 2-pole, 20 AX, with indicator light 101-20 KO 15 for incandescent lamps, halogen lamps, 230 V ~, max. 800 W
3-pole, 1-way, 16 AX/400 V 503 KOU 12 TRONIC transformer 3-pole, 1-way, 16 AX/400 V 503 KOU 12 TRONIC transformer
Time delay switch insert 16 AX/250 V 20 525 W, 230 V ~ 225 TDE 44 Time delay switch insert 16 AX/250 V 20 525 W, 230 V ~ 225 TDE 44
2-pole, 1-way, 15 min. 11015 15 20 360 W, 230 V ~ 243 EX 43 Universal relay switch insert 1202 URE 89 2-pole, 1-way, 15 min. 11015 15 20 360 W, 230 V ~ 243 EX 43 Universal relay switch insert 1202 URE 89
1-gang push switch insert 2-pole, 1-way, 30 min. 11030 15 2-channel switch 1-gang push switch insert 2-pole, 1-way, 30 min. 11030 15 2-channel switch
2-pole, 1-way, 10 AX/250 V 502 TU 13 1-pole, 2-way, 30 min. 11030-20 15 Rotary dimmer insert with one floating contact and 2-pole, 1-way, 10 AX/250 V 502 TU 13 1-pole, 2-way, 30 min. 11030-20 15 Rotary dimmer insert with one floating contact and
1-pole, 2-way, 10 AX/250 V 506 TU 13 2-pole, 1-way, 60 min. 11060 15 with two way push switch one contact with 230 V ~ 1-pole, 2-way, 10 AX/250 V 506 TU 13 2-pole, 1-way, 60 min. 11060 15 with two way push switch one contact with 230 V ~
Intermediate, 10 AX/250 V 507 TU 13 2-pole, 1-way, 120 min. 11120 15 for incandescent lamps, halogen lamps, mains potential 230 V ~ , max. 1000 W Intermediate, 10 AX/250 V 507 TU 13 2-pole, 1-way, 120 min. 11120 15 for incandescent lamps, halogen lamps, mains potential 230 V ~ , max. 1000 W
1-gang push switch insert with indicator light 1-pole, 2-way, 120 min. 11120-20 15 conventional transformers 1-gang push switch insert with indicator light 1-pole, 2-way, 120 min. 11120-20 15 conventional transformers
2-pole, 1-way, 10 AX/250 V 502 KOTU 13 40 500 W, 230 V ~ 225 NVDE 45 2-pole, 1-way, 10 AX/250 V 502 KOTU 13 40 500 W, 230 V ~ 225 NVDE 45
1-pole, 2-way, 10 AX/250 V 506 KOTU 13 Key switch/push-button inserts 10 AX/250 V 20 500 W, 230 V ~ 244 HEX 44 1-pole, 2-way, 10 AX/250 V 506 KOTU 13 Key switch/push-button inserts 10 AX/250 V 20 500 W, 230 V ~ 244 HEX 44
Blind switch, 2-pole 104.28 16 TRONIC switch insert 1254 TSE 90 Blind switch, 2-pole 104.28 16 TRONIC switch insert 1254 TSE 90
1-gang switch insert 20 AX/250 V Blind push-button, 1-pole 134.18 16 Universal dimmer insert for silent switching 1-gang switch insert 20 AX/250 V Blind push-button, 1-pole 134.18 16 Universal dimmer insert for silent switching
1-pole, 1-way, 20 AX/250 V 501-20 U 12 Blind push-button, 2-pole 134.28 16 with incremental control 50 420 W, 230 V ~ 1-pole, 1-way, 20 AX/250 V 501-20 U 12 Blind push-button, 2-pole 134.28 16 with incremental control 50 420 W, 230 V ~
1-pole, 2-way, 20 AX/250 V 506-20 U 12 Push-button, 1-pole, 2-way 133.18 16 for incandescent lamps, halogen lamps, 1-pole, 2-way, 20 AX/250 V 506-20 U 12 Push-button, 1-pole, 2-way 133.18 16 for incandescent lamps, halogen lamps,
Intermediate, 20 AX/250 V 507-20 U 12 Push-button, 2-pole 138.18 16 conventional transformers, TRONIC transformer Intermediate, 20 AX/250 V 507-20 U 12 Push-button, 2-pole 138.18 16 conventional transformers, TRONIC transformer
1-gang push switch insert with indicator light Key switch inserts 16 AX/250 V, 50 420 W, 230 V ~ 254 UDIE1 46 1-gang push switch insert with indicator light Key switch inserts 16 AX/250 V, 50 420 W, 230 V ~ 254 UDIE1 46
1-pole, 1-way, 20 AX/250 V 501-20 KOU 12 2-pole, 2-way 106.28 16 LV-Triac switch insert 1244 NVSE 90 1-pole, 1-way, 20 AX/250 V 501-20 KOU 12 2-pole, 2-way 106.28 16 LV-Triac switch insert 1244 NVSE 90
2-pole, 1-way, 20 AX/250 V 502-20 KOU 12 for silent switching 2-pole, 1-way, 20 AX/250 V 502-20 KOU 12 for silent switching
1-pole, 2-way, 20 AX/250 V 506-20 KOU 12 Key switch/push-button inserts 10 AX/250 V Satellite dimmer insert 40 400 W, 230 V ~ 1-pole, 2-way, 20 AX/250 V 506-20 KOU 12 Key switch/push-button inserts 10 AX/250 V Satellite dimmer insert 40 400 W, 230 V ~
Blind switch, 1-pole 104.15 16 for universal dimmer Blind switch, 1-pole 104.15 16 for universal dimmer
1-gang push-button insert 10 AX/250 V Blind push-button, 1-pole 134.15 16 with incremental control 1-gang push-button insert 10 AX/250 V Blind push-button, 1-pole 134.15 16 with incremental control
1-pole, 1-way (make contact) 531 U 13 Push-button, 1-pole, 2-way 133.15 16 230 V ~ 254 NIE1 47 1-pole, 1-way (make contact) 531 U 13 Push-button, 1-pole, 2-way 133.15 16 230 V ~ 254 NIE1 47
2-pole, 1-way (make) 532 U 13 Key switch inserts 16 AX/250 V, Satellite inserts 2-pole, 1-way (make) 532 U 13 Key switch inserts 16 AX/250 V, Satellite inserts
1-pole, 2-way 1-pole, 2-way 106.15 16 for standard centre plate 1220 NE 91 1-pole, 2-way 1-pole, 2-way 106.15 16 for standard centre plate 1220 NE 91
(make+break contact) 533 U 13 DALI dimmer insert 240 DPE 48 for automatic switches 1223 NE 91 (make+break contact) 533 U 13 DALI dimmer insert 240 DPE 48 for automatic switches 1223 NE 91
1-pole, 1-way (make contact) 534 U 13 Key switch/push-button inserts 10 AX/250 V DALI power potentiometer 240 PDPE 48 1-pole, 1-way (make contact) 534 U 13 Key switch/push-button inserts 10 AX/250 V DALI power potentiometer 240 PDPE 48
2-pole, 2-way Waterproof version (IP 44) for dimming of fluorescent lamps 2-pole, 2-way Waterproof version (IP 44) for dimming of fluorescent lamps
(make+break contact) 533-2 U 13 Blind switch, 1-pole CD 104.18 WU 16 controlled by DALI ballasts (make+break contact) 533-2 U 13 Blind switch, 1-pole CD 104.18 WU 16 controlled by DALI ballasts
Multi switch 10 A 531-41 U 13 Blind push-button, 1-pole CD 134.18 WU 16 Pulse unit 1208 UI 92 Multi switch 10 A 531-41 U 13 Blind push-button, 1-pole CD 134.18 WU 16 Pulse unit 1208 UI 92
Push-button, 1-pole, 2-way CD 133.18 WU 16 Electronic potentiometer 1 10 V to realise a Staircase automatic Push-button, 1-pole, 2-way CD 133.18 WU 16 Electronic potentiometer 1 10 V to realise a Staircase automatic
2-gang switch insert 10 AX/250 V Key switch inserts with switch function 240-10 47 switch installation 2-gang switch insert 10 AX/250 V Key switch inserts with switch function 240-10 47 switch installation
1-pole, 1-way 505 U 14 16 AX/250 V, 1-pole, 2-way CD 106.18 WU 16 with push-button function 240-31 47 1-pole, 1-way 505 U 14 16 AX/250 V, 1-pole, 2-way CD 106.18 WU 16 with push-button function 240-31 47
1-pole, 1-way (separate L-terminal) 501-2 U SI 14 1-pole, 1-way (separate L-terminal) 501-2 U SI 14
1-pole, 2-way 509 U 14 Modular jack socket, cat. 3 Speed regulator insert 245.20 49 1-pole, 2-way 509 U 14 Modular jack socket, cat. 3 Speed regulator insert 245.20 49
1-gang, 8-pole, 1 Terminal UAE 8 UPO 17 for controlling the speed of single-phase motors Power unit 1208 REG 93 1-gang, 8-pole, 1 Terminal UAE 8 UPO 17 for controlling the speed of single-phase motors Power unit 1208 REG 93
2-gang switch insert 10 AX/250 V 2-gang, 8-pole, 1 Terminal UAE 2X8 UPO 17 for rail mounting to realise a 2-gang switch insert 10 AX/250 V 2-gang, 8-pole, 1 Terminal UAE 2X8 UPO 17 for rail mounting to realise a
1-pole, 1-way (with lamp) 505 U 5 14 2-gang, 8-pole, 2 Terminals UAE 8-8 UPO 17 Staircase automatic 1-pole, 1-way (with lamp) 505 U 5 14 2-gang, 8-pole, 2 Terminals UAE 8-8 UPO 17 Staircase automatic
2-gang switch insert 10 AX/250 V 2-gang, 8-pole, 2 Terminals, Universal dimmer insert 1254 UDE 82 switch installation 2-gang switch insert 10 AX/250 V 2-gang, 8-pole, 2 Terminals, Universal dimmer insert 1254 UDE 82 switch installation
UAE 2 x 8 UPO UAE 2 x 8 UPO
with indicator lights unshielded UAE8-8UPOK5US 17 50 420 W/VA, 230 V ~ with indicator lights unshielded UAE8-8UPOK5US 17 50 420 W/VA, 230 V ~
1-pole, 1-way 505 KOU 5 14 1-pole, 1-way 505 KOU 5 14
1-pole, 1-way 505 KOVU 5 14 TRONIC transformer 1-pole, 1-way 505 KOVU 5 14 TRONIC transformer
with mechanical interlocking Modular jack socket, cat. 6 / Class E 10 040 W SNT 40 55 with mechanical interlocking Modular jack socket, cat. 6 / Class E 10 040 W SNT 40 55
8-pole UAE 8 UPOK6E 17 Standard dimmer insert 1225 SDE 84 20 070 W SNT 70 Q 55 8-pole UAE 8 UPOK6E 17 Standard dimmer insert 1225 SDE 84 20 070 W SNT 70 Q 55
2 x 8-pole UAE 8-8 UPOK6E 17 20 500 VA, 230 V ~ 20 105 W SNT 105 F 56 2 x 8-pole UAE 8-8 UPOK6E 17 20 500 VA, 230 V ~ 20 105 W SNT 105 F 56
2-gang push switch insert 10 AX/250 V 35 105 W SNT 105-35 56 2-gang push switch insert 10 AX/250 V 35 105 W SNT 105-35 56
1-pole, 1-way 505 TU 14 UAE 8 UPOK6E 20 150 W SNT 150 57 1-pole, 1-way 505 TU 14 UAE 8 UPOK6E 20 150 W SNT 150 57
1-pole, 2-way 509 TU 14 50 200 W SNT 200 57 1-pole, 2-way 509 TU 14 50 200 W SNT 200 57
TV-FM socket outlet insert (5 ... 2400 MHz) Universal 2-gang dimmer insert 1252 UDE 83 TV-FM socket outlet insert (5 ... 2400 MHz) Universal 2-gang dimmer insert 1252 UDE 83
Terminated outlet EDU 04 F 21 50 260 W/VA, Terminated outlet EDU 04 F 21 50 260 W/VA,
2-gang push-button 10 AX/250 V Loop through outlet GEDU 10 21 AC 230 V ~, 50/60 Hz Built-in amplifier 2-gang push-button 10 AX/250 V Loop through outlet GEDU 10 21 AC 230 V ~, 50/60 Hz Built-in amplifier
1-pole, 1-way (make contact) 535 U 14 Loop through outlet GEDU 15 21 for TRONIC, 1-pole, 1-way (make contact) 535 U 14 Loop through outlet GEDU 15 21 for TRONIC,
1-pole, 2-way GEDU 10
60 700 W 247 EB 50 1-pole, 2-way GEDU 10
60 700 W 247 EB 50
(make+break contact) 539 U 14 for conventional, (make+break contact) 539 U 14 for conventional,
1-pole, 1-way (make contact) 535 U 5 14 LED touch dimmer insert 1271 LED DE 85 100 600 W 246 EB 51 1-pole, 1-way (make contact) 535 U 5 14 LED touch dimmer insert 1271 LED DE 85 100 600 W 246 EB 51
with lamps SAT-TV-FM socket outlet insert 20 120 W with lamps SAT-TV-FM socket outlet insert 20 120 W
Multi switch 10 A/250 V 532-4 U 14 Terminated outlet EDA 302 F 21 AC 230 V ~, 50/60 Hz Multi switch 10 A/250 V 532-4 U 14 Terminated outlet EDA 302 F 21 AC 230 V ~, 50/60 Hz
Loop through outlet GDA 313 F 21 Universal dimmer UD 1255 REG 53 Loop through outlet GDA 313 F 21 Universal dimmer UD 1255 REG 53
50 500 W 50 500 W
2-gang blind insert 10 A/250 V GDA 313 F Control unit 1 10 V 1240 STE 86 Universal amplifier ULZ 1215 REG 54 2-gang blind insert 10 A/250 V GDA 313 F Control unit 1 10 V 1240 STE 86 Universal amplifier ULZ 1215 REG 54
1-pole switch 509 VU 14 for switching and dimming 200 500 W 1-pole switch 509 VU 14 for switching and dimming 200 500 W
1-pole push-button 539 VU 14 of electronic ballasts (EVC) 1-pole push-button 539 VU 14 of electronic ballasts (EVC)
with 1 10 V with 1 10 V

3870_Umschlag_Kat_Export26_RZ.indd 2 03.03.15 15:56


U_innen_3870_GB_26:3264 U innen Tabellen 28.02.2015 11:04 Uhr Seite 1 U_innen_3870_GB_26:3264 U innen Tabellen 28.02.2015 11:04 Uhr Seite 2 U_innen_3870_GB_26:3264 U innen Tabellen 28.02.2015 11:04 Uhr Seite 1 U_innen_3870_GB_26:3264 U innen Tabellen 28.02.2015 11:04 Uhr Seite 2

Mechanical inserts Mechanical inserts Electronics Electronics Mechanical inserts Mechanical inserts Electronics Electronics
Ref.-no. page Ref.-no. page Ref.-no. page Ref.-no. page Ref.-no. page Ref.-no. page Ref.-no. page Ref.-no. page

1-gang switch insert 10 AX/250 V Rotary blind switch 10 A/250 V Rotary dimmer insert Universal relay switch insert 1201 URE 87 1-gang switch insert 10 AX/250 V Rotary blind switch 10 A/250 V Rotary dimmer insert Universal relay switch insert 1201 URE 87
1-pole, 1-way, 10 AX/250 V 501 U 12 1-pole 1234.10 15 with two way push switch 1-channel switch 1-pole, 1-way, 10 AX/250 V 501 U 12 1-pole 1234.10 15 with two way push switch 1-channel switch
2-pole, 1-way, 10 AX/250 V 502 U 12 2-pole 1234.20 15 for incandescent lamps, halogen lamps AC 230 V ~, 50/60 Hz, 2-pole, 1-way, 10 AX/250 V 502 U 12 2-pole 1234.20 15 for incandescent lamps, halogen lamps AC 230 V ~, 50/60 Hz,
1-pole, 2-way, 10 AX/250 V 506 U 12 060 0600 W, 230 V ~ 266 GDE 42 neutral conductor required 1-pole, 2-way, 10 AX/250 V 506 U 12 060 0600 W, 230 V ~ 266 GDE 42 neutral conductor required
Intermediate, 10 AX/250 V 507 U 12 060 0400 W, 230 V ~ 244 EX 42 2300 W Intermediate, 10 AX/250 V 507 U 12 060 0400 W, 230 V ~ 244 EX 42 2300 W
3-pole, 1-way, 16 AX/400 V 503 U 12 100 1000 W, 230 V ~ 211 GDE 43 3-pole, 1-way, 16 AX/400 V 503 U 12 100 1000 W, 230 V ~ 211 GDE 43
060 0400 W, 110 V ~ 244-110 43 060 0400 W, 110 V ~ 244-110 43
Rotary switch insert Rotary switch insert
1-gang switch insert with indicator light 3-level switch with OFF-position 1101-4 15 TRONIC-dimmer insert Universal relay switch insert 1201-1 URE 88 1-gang switch insert with indicator light 3-level switch with OFF-position 1101-4 15 TRONIC-dimmer insert Universal relay switch insert 1201-1 URE 88
2-pole, 1-way, 10 AX/250 V 502 KOU 12 2-pole, 20 AX 1101-20 15 with two way push switch 1-channel switch with floating contact 2-pole, 1-way, 10 AX/250 V 502 KOU 12 2-pole, 20 AX 1101-20 15 with two way push switch 1-channel switch with floating contact
1-pole, 2-way, 10 AX/250 V 506 KOU 12 2-pole, 20 AX, with indicator light 101-20 KO 15 for incandescent lamps, halogen lamps, 230 V ~, max. 800 W 1-pole, 2-way, 10 AX/250 V 506 KOU 12 2-pole, 20 AX, with indicator light 101-20 KO 15 for incandescent lamps, halogen lamps, 230 V ~, max. 800 W
3-pole, 1-way, 16 AX/400 V 503 KOU 12 TRONIC transformer 3-pole, 1-way, 16 AX/400 V 503 KOU 12 TRONIC transformer
Time delay switch insert 16 AX/250 V 20 525 W, 230 V ~ 225 TDE 44 Time delay switch insert 16 AX/250 V 20 525 W, 230 V ~ 225 TDE 44
2-pole, 1-way, 15 min. 11015 15 20 360 W, 230 V ~ 243 EX 43 Universal relay switch insert 1202 URE 89 2-pole, 1-way, 15 min. 11015 15 20 360 W, 230 V ~ 243 EX 43 Universal relay switch insert 1202 URE 89
1-gang push switch insert 2-pole, 1-way, 30 min. 11030 15 2-channel switch 1-gang push switch insert 2-pole, 1-way, 30 min. 11030 15 2-channel switch
2-pole, 1-way, 10 AX/250 V 502 TU 13 1-pole, 2-way, 30 min. 11030-20 15 Rotary dimmer insert with one floating contact and 2-pole, 1-way, 10 AX/250 V 502 TU 13 1-pole, 2-way, 30 min. 11030-20 15 Rotary dimmer insert with one floating contact and
1-pole, 2-way, 10 AX/250 V 506 TU 13 2-pole, 1-way, 60 min. 11060 15 with two way push switch one contact with 230 V ~ 1-pole, 2-way, 10 AX/250 V 506 TU 13 2-pole, 1-way, 60 min. 11060 15 with two way push switch one contact with 230 V ~
Intermediate, 10 AX/250 V 507 TU 13 2-pole, 1-way, 120 min. 11120 15 for incandescent lamps, halogen lamps, mains potential 230 V ~ , max. 1000 W Intermediate, 10 AX/250 V 507 TU 13 2-pole, 1-way, 120 min. 11120 15 for incandescent lamps, halogen lamps, mains potential 230 V ~ , max. 1000 W
1-gang push switch insert with indicator light 1-pole, 2-way, 120 min. 11120-20 15 conventional transformers 1-gang push switch insert with indicator light 1-pole, 2-way, 120 min. 11120-20 15 conventional transformers
2-pole, 1-way, 10 AX/250 V 502 KOTU 13 40 500 W, 230 V ~ 225 NVDE 45 2-pole, 1-way, 10 AX/250 V 502 KOTU 13 40 500 W, 230 V ~ 225 NVDE 45
1-pole, 2-way, 10 AX/250 V 506 KOTU 13 Key switch/push-button inserts 10 AX/250 V 20 500 W, 230 V ~ 244 HEX 44 1-pole, 2-way, 10 AX/250 V 506 KOTU 13 Key switch/push-button inserts 10 AX/250 V 20 500 W, 230 V ~ 244 HEX 44
Blind switch, 2-pole 104.28 16 TRONIC switch insert 1254 TSE 90 Blind switch, 2-pole 104.28 16 TRONIC switch insert 1254 TSE 90
1-gang switch insert 20 AX/250 V Blind push-button, 1-pole 134.18 16 Universal dimmer insert for silent switching 1-gang switch insert 20 AX/250 V Blind push-button, 1-pole 134.18 16 Universal dimmer insert for silent switching
1-pole, 1-way, 20 AX/250 V 501-20 U 12 Blind push-button, 2-pole 134.28 16 with incremental control 50 420 W, 230 V ~ 1-pole, 1-way, 20 AX/250 V 501-20 U 12 Blind push-button, 2-pole 134.28 16 with incremental control 50 420 W, 230 V ~
1-pole, 2-way, 20 AX/250 V 506-20 U 12 Push-button, 1-pole, 2-way 133.18 16 for incandescent lamps, halogen lamps, 1-pole, 2-way, 20 AX/250 V 506-20 U 12 Push-button, 1-pole, 2-way 133.18 16 for incandescent lamps, halogen lamps,
Intermediate, 20 AX/250 V 507-20 U 12 Push-button, 2-pole 138.18 16 conventional transformers, TRONIC transformer Intermediate, 20 AX/250 V 507-20 U 12 Push-button, 2-pole 138.18 16 conventional transformers, TRONIC transformer
1-gang push switch insert with indicator light Key switch inserts 16 AX/250 V, 50 420 W, 230 V ~ 254 UDIE1 46 1-gang push switch insert with indicator light Key switch inserts 16 AX/250 V, 50 420 W, 230 V ~ 254 UDIE1 46
1-pole, 1-way, 20 AX/250 V 501-20 KOU 12 2-pole, 2-way 106.28 16 LV-Triac switch insert 1244 NVSE 90 1-pole, 1-way, 20 AX/250 V 501-20 KOU 12 2-pole, 2-way 106.28 16 LV-Triac switch insert 1244 NVSE 90
2-pole, 1-way, 20 AX/250 V 502-20 KOU 12 for silent switching 2-pole, 1-way, 20 AX/250 V 502-20 KOU 12 for silent switching
1-pole, 2-way, 20 AX/250 V 506-20 KOU 12 Key switch/push-button inserts 10 AX/250 V Satellite dimmer insert 40 400 W, 230 V ~ 1-pole, 2-way, 20 AX/250 V 506-20 KOU 12 Key switch/push-button inserts 10 AX/250 V Satellite dimmer insert 40 400 W, 230 V ~
Blind switch, 1-pole 104.15 16 for universal dimmer Blind switch, 1-pole 104.15 16 for universal dimmer
1-gang push-button insert 10 AX/250 V Blind push-button, 1-pole 134.15 16 with incremental control 1-gang push-button insert 10 AX/250 V Blind push-button, 1-pole 134.15 16 with incremental control
1-pole, 1-way (make contact) 531 U 13 Push-button, 1-pole, 2-way 133.15 16 230 V ~ 254 NIE1 47 1-pole, 1-way (make contact) 531 U 13 Push-button, 1-pole, 2-way 133.15 16 230 V ~ 254 NIE1 47
2-pole, 1-way (make) 532 U 13 Key switch inserts 16 AX/250 V, Satellite inserts 2-pole, 1-way (make) 532 U 13 Key switch inserts 16 AX/250 V, Satellite inserts
1-pole, 2-way 1-pole, 2-way 106.15 16 for standard centre plate 1220 NE 91 1-pole, 2-way 1-pole, 2-way 106.15 16 for standard centre plate 1220 NE 91
(make+break contact) 533 U 13 DALI dimmer insert 240 DPE 48 for automatic switches 1223 NE 91 (make+break contact) 533 U 13 DALI dimmer insert 240 DPE 48 for automatic switches 1223 NE 91
1-pole, 1-way (make contact) 534 U 13 Key switch/push-button inserts 10 AX/250 V DALI power potentiometer 240 PDPE 48 1-pole, 1-way (make contact) 534 U 13 Key switch/push-button inserts 10 AX/250 V DALI power potentiometer 240 PDPE 48
2-pole, 2-way Waterproof version (IP 44) for dimming of fluorescent lamps 2-pole, 2-way Waterproof version (IP 44) for dimming of fluorescent lamps
(make+break contact) 533-2 U 13 Blind switch, 1-pole CD 104.18 WU 16 controlled by DALI ballasts (make+break contact) 533-2 U 13 Blind switch, 1-pole CD 104.18 WU 16 controlled by DALI ballasts
Multi switch 10 A 531-41 U 13 Blind push-button, 1-pole CD 134.18 WU 16 Pulse unit 1208 UI 92 Multi switch 10 A 531-41 U 13 Blind push-button, 1-pole CD 134.18 WU 16 Pulse unit 1208 UI 92
Push-button, 1-pole, 2-way CD 133.18 WU 16 Electronic potentiometer 1 10 V to realise a Staircase automatic Push-button, 1-pole, 2-way CD 133.18 WU 16 Electronic potentiometer 1 10 V to realise a Staircase automatic
2-gang switch insert 10 AX/250 V Key switch inserts with switch function 240-10 47 switch installation 2-gang switch insert 10 AX/250 V Key switch inserts with switch function 240-10 47 switch installation
1-pole, 1-way 505 U 14 16 AX/250 V, 1-pole, 2-way CD 106.18 WU 16 with push-button function 240-31 47 1-pole, 1-way 505 U 14 16 AX/250 V, 1-pole, 2-way CD 106.18 WU 16 with push-button function 240-31 47
1-pole, 1-way (separate L-terminal) 501-2 U SI 14 1-pole, 1-way (separate L-terminal) 501-2 U SI 14
1-pole, 2-way 509 U 14 Modular jack socket, cat. 3 Speed regulator insert 245.20 49 1-pole, 2-way 509 U 14 Modular jack socket, cat. 3 Speed regulator insert 245.20 49
1-gang, 8-pole, 1 Terminal UAE 8 UPO 17 for controlling the speed of single-phase motors Power unit 1208 REG 93 1-gang, 8-pole, 1 Terminal UAE 8 UPO 17 for controlling the speed of single-phase motors Power unit 1208 REG 93
2-gang switch insert 10 AX/250 V 2-gang, 8-pole, 1 Terminal UAE 2X8 UPO 17 for rail mounting to realise a 2-gang switch insert 10 AX/250 V 2-gang, 8-pole, 1 Terminal UAE 2X8 UPO 17 for rail mounting to realise a
1-pole, 1-way (with lamp) 505 U 5 14 2-gang, 8-pole, 2 Terminals UAE 8-8 UPO 17 Staircase automatic 1-pole, 1-way (with lamp) 505 U 5 14 2-gang, 8-pole, 2 Terminals UAE 8-8 UPO 17 Staircase automatic
2-gang switch insert 10 AX/250 V 2-gang, 8-pole, 2 Terminals, Universal dimmer insert 1254 UDE 82 switch installation 2-gang switch insert 10 AX/250 V 2-gang, 8-pole, 2 Terminals, Universal dimmer insert 1254 UDE 82 switch installation
UAE 2 x 8 UPO UAE 2 x 8 UPO
with indicator lights unshielded UAE8-8UPOK5US 17 50 420 W/VA, 230 V ~ with indicator lights unshielded UAE8-8UPOK5US 17 50 420 W/VA, 230 V ~
1-pole, 1-way 505 KOU 5 14 1-pole, 1-way 505 KOU 5 14
1-pole, 1-way 505 KOVU 5 14 TRONIC transformer 1-pole, 1-way 505 KOVU 5 14 TRONIC transformer
with mechanical interlocking Modular jack socket, cat. 6 / Class E 10 040 W SNT 40 55 with mechanical interlocking Modular jack socket, cat. 6 / Class E 10 040 W SNT 40 55
8-pole UAE 8 UPOK6E 17 Standard dimmer insert 1225 SDE 84 20 070 W SNT 70 Q 55 8-pole UAE 8 UPOK6E 17 Standard dimmer insert 1225 SDE 84 20 070 W SNT 70 Q 55
2 x 8-pole UAE 8-8 UPOK6E 17 20 500 VA, 230 V ~ 20 105 W SNT 105 F 56 2 x 8-pole UAE 8-8 UPOK6E 17 20 500 VA, 230 V ~ 20 105 W SNT 105 F 56
2-gang push switch insert 10 AX/250 V 35 105 W SNT 105-35 56 2-gang push switch insert 10 AX/250 V 35 105 W SNT 105-35 56
1-pole, 1-way 505 TU 14 UAE 8 UPOK6E 20 150 W SNT 150 57 1-pole, 1-way 505 TU 14 UAE 8 UPOK6E 20 150 W SNT 150 57
1-pole, 2-way 509 TU 14 50 200 W SNT 200 57 1-pole, 2-way 509 TU 14 50 200 W SNT 200 57
TV-FM socket outlet insert (5 ... 2400 MHz) Universal 2-gang dimmer insert 1252 UDE 83 TV-FM socket outlet insert (5 ... 2400 MHz) Universal 2-gang dimmer insert 1252 UDE 83
Terminated outlet EDU 04 F 21 50 260 W/VA, Terminated outlet EDU 04 F 21 50 260 W/VA,
2-gang push-button 10 AX/250 V Loop through outlet GEDU 10 21 AC 230 V ~, 50/60 Hz Built-in amplifier 2-gang push-button 10 AX/250 V Loop through outlet GEDU 10 21 AC 230 V ~, 50/60 Hz Built-in amplifier
1-pole, 1-way (make contact) 535 U 14 Loop through outlet GEDU 15 21 for TRONIC, 1-pole, 1-way (make contact) 535 U 14 Loop through outlet GEDU 15 21 for TRONIC,
1-pole, 2-way GEDU 10
60 700 W 247 EB 50 1-pole, 2-way GEDU 10
60 700 W 247 EB 50
(make+break contact) 539 U 14 for conventional, (make+break contact) 539 U 14 for conventional,
1-pole, 1-way (make contact) 535 U 5 14 LED touch dimmer insert 1271 LED DE 85 100 600 W 246 EB 51 1-pole, 1-way (make contact) 535 U 5 14 LED touch dimmer insert 1271 LED DE 85 100 600 W 246 EB 51
with lamps SAT-TV-FM socket outlet insert 20 120 W with lamps SAT-TV-FM socket outlet insert 20 120 W
Multi switch 10 A/250 V 532-4 U 14 Terminated outlet EDA 302 F 21 AC 230 V ~, 50/60 Hz Multi switch 10 A/250 V 532-4 U 14 Terminated outlet EDA 302 F 21 AC 230 V ~, 50/60 Hz
Loop through outlet GDA 313 F 21 Universal dimmer UD 1255 REG 53 Loop through outlet GDA 313 F 21 Universal dimmer UD 1255 REG 53
50 500 W 50 500 W
2-gang blind insert 10 A/250 V GDA 313 F Control unit 1 10 V 1240 STE 86 Universal amplifier ULZ 1215 REG 54 2-gang blind insert 10 A/250 V GDA 313 F Control unit 1 10 V 1240 STE 86 Universal amplifier ULZ 1215 REG 54
1-pole switch 509 VU 14 for switching and dimming 200 500 W 1-pole switch 509 VU 14 for switching and dimming 200 500 W
1-pole push-button 539 VU 14 of electronic ballasts (EVC) 1-pole push-button 539 VU 14 of electronic ballasts (EVC)
with 1 10 V with 1 10 V

3870_Umschlag_Kat_Export26_RZ.indd 2 03.03.15 15:56


British Standard
Switch / Push-button inserts 12

Accessories
Data / Antenna inserts 17 BS overview 228

Inserts
SAT/TV/FM sockets 21 13 A inserts for BS wall boxes 232

Content Accessories 22
Data connection 30
50 x 50 system
27
32
5A / 15 A inserts for BS
BS frames
236
237

Rotary dimmer / DALI potis 40 AS 500 overview 238


Electronics Speed regulator insert 49 Covers and sockets 242

AS range
Built-in dimmer / amplifier 50 Frames, surface caps 271
Rail mounted dimmer / amplifier 53 Acreation frames 317
TRONIC transformer 55 A plus frames 322

Relay station 60 A range overview 274


JUNG Bus

Dimming station 62 Covers and sockets 278

A range
Sensor module 64 A 500 frames, surface caps 312
Push-button module 65 Acreation 317
Conventional 24 V sensors 65 A plus 322

Touch dimmer inserts 82


Management

CD range overview 324


Relay inserts 87
Covers and sockets 328

CD range
Satellite inserts 91
Light

CD 500 / CD universal frames 363


Staircase application 92
CD cable duct frames and surface caps 366
Centre plates for LM 94
CD plus frames 368
Timer switch 101

SL 500 overview 370

SL 500
eNet overview 104
eNet

Covers and sockets 374



SL 500 frames 381
Management

Blinds Management overview 136


LS range overview 382
LS range

Motor control inserts 138


Blinds

Centre plates for motor control 139 Plastic covers and sockets 386
Decoupling relays 144 LS 990 frames, surface caps 412
Sensors for BM 145

Temperature Management Overview 147


LS metal finish
Management
Temperature

Temperature controller (room / floor) 148 LS metal finish overview 416


Humidistat 153 Metal covers and sockets 418
Room thermostat standard with display 154
Room thermostat universal with display 156 LS 990 metal frames, surface caps 446
Valve drive 158
Observer / Smoke

Design frames
alarm device

LS Design frames 450


LS range

Observer 159
Smoke alarm device 167 Flat Design frames 452
Radio Smoke alarm device 167 LS plus frames 456

Emergency system 168


Public buildings

Les Couleurs

Oversize rocker 174


Key card holder 176 Les Couleurs 458
Triple-tone door signal 177
Hotel installation 178
Surface ranges
LED technology

LED info signs 186


WG 800 472
Reading light 188
WG 600 485
Floor pilot light 190
AP 600 492
SCHUKO sockets with floor pilot light 191

KNX overview 499


terminals / USB

F 50 push-button sensors 502


Multimedia

Multimedia terminals 194 Room controller displays 505


KNX

USB 212 F 40 push-button sensors 506


Detectors /System devices 521
Display / Reporting /Software 525
Smart Radio

Dimensions

Smart Radio 214 Dimensions 530


EnOcean

Index

Bluetooth connect 221 Index 538


EnOcean 222

3870_Inhaltsverzeichnis_2015_GB_04.indd 3 03.03.15 11:14


The Headquarters in Schalksmhle

Progress as a tradition
Since 1912, JUNG has made its home in the idyllic
town Schalksmhle. The company headquarters with
administration, design, sales, training centre, central
data processing, punching shop and socket assembly
is situated here in the middle of the countryside. Our
production facility in Lnen was founded in 1941 for the
fabrication of switches and nowadays also for electronic
devices. The flexible production processes and an
efficient logistic centre enable a professional
Just-in-Time delivery. Of course the company JUNG
is certified according to DIN EN ISO 9001. All required
devices are labelled with the CE or VDE sign.
Of course the company JUNG is
certified according to DIN EN ISO
9001.

3870_Vorspann_2015_GB_RZ.indd 4 03.03.15 16:11


The plant in Lnen

Made in Germany
With its innovative devices and systems, JUNG meets the
highest standards in terms of product quality, design, ease
of use and safety. From the beginning, JUNG has focused
on its German location; this has remained the case with
the two production plants in Schalksmhle and Lnen.
This company philosophy of being tied to one location has
been rewarded: JUNG is the first manufacturer of electrical
installation devices and systems to have been given the seal
of approval Made in Germany by TV NORD. It has now
been confirmed by an independent source what JUNG
has always recognised: you can rely on German quality!

Seal of approval Made in Germany


by TV NORD.

3870_Vorspann_2015_GB_RZ.indd 5 03.03.15 16:11


Graphic Tool - For your
individual JUNG product
Individual product design symply online with the Graphic tool: With the intuitive user interface
switches and more can be freely configured. Symbols and texts for allocating functions, your own
company logo or pictures there are virtually no limits to your ideas. Two different processes are
available to customise your requirements: top-quality laser engraving and abrasion-resistant
colour printing. After designing your products, the software generates a PDF which you send us
for your final order. Additionally, existing labelling areas for foil or paper inlays can be designed
with the labelling tool and printed on your local printer.

Laser labelling
The high-quality laser engraving makes it possible to individually enhance JUNG products. The
precise cutting of the surface allows even the finest contours of ornaments, logos, and text to
be produced.

If a product can be
lasered it is marked
with an L

3870_Vorspann_2015_GB_RZ.indd 6 03.03.15 16:12


Print labelling
Individual motifs on switches, sockets or room controllers: This is achieved through abrasion-
resistant colour printing. Photos, patterns, symbols or texts there are virtually no limits to the
ideas you can have for printed products.

If a product can
be printed it is
marked with an P

P
Local labelling
Many Jung products have an integrated labelling field. With the help of our labelling service,
these can be designed with texts, symbols or motifs as required.

After designing a labelling field, you can print it on foil or paper on your local printer.

JUNG Manufacture
Not every JUNG product can be printed or lasered because of its surface characteristics.
You will not find these products in the Graphic Tool. But even for those products JUNG maybe
offers a solution with a hand-made printing method. Please contact manufaktur@jung.de and
we will let you know, if your design ideas can be realised.

3870_Vorspann_2015_GB_RZ.indd 7 03.03.15 16:12


A range CD range
From the standard range to the exclusive The three variants are persuasive due to
design line, the A range offers you form and their rounded shape, their high-quality
function in perfect harmony. When selecting material workmanship in duroplastic/
the materials, the focus is on high-quality thermoplastic and their diversity. You can
duroplastic or thermoplastic combined for set the tone with the coloured application
example with frames in coloured glass. elements in the CD range.

Please find the A range chapter starting on Please find the CD range chapter starting
page 238. on page 324.

AS 500 CD500

AS 500 antibacterial CDuniversal

A 500 CD plus

Acreation
SL range
Soft lines and an extraordinary
combination of lacquered or
anodised aluminium and acrylic
glass give the SL 500 range its
unique quality.
Please find the SL range chapter
Acreation breakproof
starting on page 370.

A plus SL 500

3870_Vorspann_2015_GB_RZ.indd 8 03.03.15 16:12


LS range
The LS ranges offer you the largest selec-
tion of materials and shapes. It has been
the most sustainable of the JUNG switch
ranges for over 40 years. The design has
been continually developed and adapted
to modern requirements. From the classic Gold
design in coloured duroplastic to the high-
quality metal versions to the extravagant
versions with glass frames the LS range
offers you maximum versatility with the
highest design standards all of course
with the usual breadth of functionality.
Please find the LS range chapter starting
on page 382. Classic brass

LS 990 Antique brass

Stainless steel

LS Design

Aluminium

Anthracite LSplus

Dark

Chrome Flat Design

3870_Vorspann_2015_GB_RZ.indd 9 03.03.15 16:12


63 55

Inserts and accessories Data connection 30


Page 12 Page 27

50 x 50 systems
Page 32

Rotary dimmer and electronic devices


Page 40

3870_Vorspann_2015_GB_RZ.indd 10 03.03.15 16:12


JUNG Bus with Sensor module and Push-button sensor
Page 58

Light Management
Page 82

eNet
Page 104

3870_Vorspann_2015_GB_RZ.indd 11 03.03.15 16:12


Blinds Management Temperature Management
Page 136 Page 147

Observer Smoke alarm device


Page 159 Page 166

Hospitals and Hotels (Public buildings) LED Technology


Page 168 Page 186

3870_Vorspann_2015_GB_RZ.indd 12 05.03.15 17:52


Multimedia Terminals Radio
Page 194 Page 212

USB Charger EN Ocean


Page 219 Page 222

British Standard Installations KNX


Page 228 Page 499

3870_Vorspann_2015_GB_RZ.indd 13 03.03.15 16:13


12-39_3870_GB_26_UP:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 11:10 Uhr Seite 12

Inserts 1-gang

The mechanical inserts are also available without claws.


To order devices without claws, please insert an "E" into the reference number, e.g. 506 E U.

Ref.-no.
1-gang switch insert 10 AX / 250 V ~
Screwless terminals for wires up to 2.5 mm2
1-pole, 1-way 501 U
2-pole, 1-way 502 U
1-pole, 2-way 506 U
intermediate 507 U
Illumination in OFF-position possible with lamp ref.-no. 90/95 (230 V), 96-.. (low voltage),
or LED lamp ref.-no. 90-LED.. (230 V) or 961248 LED.. (low voltage).

1-gang switch insert 20 AX / 250 V ~


Screw terminals for wires up to 4 mm2
1-pole, 1-way 501-20 U
1-pole, 2-way 506-20 U
Illumination in OFF-position possible with lamp ref.-no. 98-220 (230 V).
intermediate 507-20 U

1-gang switch insert 16 AX / 400 V ~


Screw terminals for wires up to 4 mm2
3-pole, 1-way 503 U
Illumination in OFF-position possible with lamp ref.-no. 98 or 98-220 (230 V).

1-gang switch insert 10 AX / 250 V ~


with indicator light
Screwless terminals for wires up to 2.5 mm2
Neutral conductor required
Lamp ref.-no.: 90
2-pole, 1-way 502 KOU
1-pole, 2-way 506 KOU

1-gang switch insert 20 AX / 250 V ~


with indicator light
Screw terminals for wires up to 4 mm2
Neutral conductor required
Lamp ref.-no.: 98-220
1-pole, 1-way 501-20 KOU
2-pole, 1-way 502-20 KOU
1-pole, 2-way 506-20 KOU

1-gang switch insert 16 AX / 400 V ~


with indicator light
Screw terminals for wires up to 4 mm2
Lamp ref.-no.: 98
3-pole, 1-way 503 KOU

12
12-39_3870_GB_26_UP:JungDeutsch.qxd 02.03.2015 11:11 Uhr Seite 13

Accessories
1-gang Inserts

Inserts
The mechanical inserts are also available without claws.
To order devices without claws, please insert an "E" into the reference number, e.g. 506 E U.

Ref.-no.
1-gang push switch insert 10 AX / 250 V ~
Screwless terminals for wires up to 2.5 mm2
Rocker of push switches jump back in original position.
Can be converted into pull cord switch by means of pull cord insert ref.-no. 34 or 34 KO5.
2-pole, 1-way 502 TU
1-pole, 2-way 506 TU
illumination not possible in 2-way and intermediate circuits
intermediate 507 TU
Illumination in OFF-position possible with lamp ref.-no. 90/95 (230 V), 96-.. (low voltage),
or LED lamp ref.-no. 90-LED.. (230 V) or 961248 LED.. (low voltage).

1-gang push switch insert 10 AX / 250 V ~


with indicator light
Screwless terminals for wires up to 2.5 mm2
Rocker of push switches jump back in original position.
Neutral conductor required
Lamp ref.-no.: 90
Can be converted into pull cord switch by means of pull cord insert ref.-no. 34 or 34 KO5.
2-pole, 1-way 502 KOTU
1-pole, 2-way 506 KOTU

1-gang push-button insert 10 AX / 250 V ~


Screwless terminals for wires up to 2.5 mm2
Can be converted into pull cord push-button by means of pull cord insert ref.-no. 34 or 34 KO5.
1-pole, 1-way (make) 531 U
1-pole, 2-way with terminal for N conductor 533 U
1-pole, 1-way (make) with separate contacts for indicator light 534 U
Illumination in OFF-position possible with lamp ref.-no. 90/95 (230 V), 96-.. (low voltage),
or LED lamp ref.-no. 90-LED.. (230 V) or 961248 LED.. (low voltage).

1-gang push-button insert 10 AX / 250 V ~


Screwless terminals for wires up to 2.5 mm2
Can be converted into pull cord push-button by means of pull cord insert ref.-no. 34 or 34 KO5.
2-pole, 1-way (make) 532 U

1-gang push-button insert 10 AX / 250 V ~


Screw terminals for wires up to 2.5 mm2
Can be converted into pull cord push-button by means of pull cord insert ref.-no. 34 or 34 KO5.
2-pole, 2-way 533-2 U

1-gang multi switch insert 10 A / 250 V ~


Screw terminals for wires up to 2.5 mm2
1-pole, 2-way make contacts, rocker in neutral position 531-41 U
Especially designed as controller for wirings with relays, e.g. in combination
with relay station ref.-no. RS 8 REGHE.
Only recommended for CD and LS ranges (except metal versions).

13
12-39_3870_GB_26_UP:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 11:10 Uhr Seite 14

Inserts 2-gang

The mechanical inserts are also available without claws.


To order devices without claws, please insert an "E" into the reference number, e.g. 506 E U.

Ref.-no.
2-gang switch insert 10 AX / 250 V ~
Screwless terminals for wires up to 2.5 mm2
1-pole, 1-way 505 U
1-pole, 1-way, separate L-terminal 501-2 U SI
1-pole, 1-way with 2 glow lamps ref.-no. 94 505 U 5
The switch is illuminated in OFF-position.
The lamps can be exchanged without disconnecting mains.

2-gang switch insert 10 AX / 250 V ~


Screw terminals for wires up to 2.5 mm2
1-pole, 2-way 509 U

2-gang switch insert 10 AX / 250 V ~


with indicator light
Screwless terminals for wires up to 2.5 mm2
Neutral conductor required
1-pole, 1-way with 2 glow lamps ref.-no. 94 505 KOU 5
idem, mechanical interlocking 505 KOVU 5
idem, mechanical interlocking, with 2 glow lamps red/green 505 KOVU 5 RG
The lamps can be exchanged without disconnecting mains.
Coloured lamps can also be used:
glow lamp green ref.-no.: 94 GN glow lamp red ref.-no.: 94 RT

2-gang push switch insert 10 AX / 250 V ~


Screwless terminals for wires up to 2.5 mm2
Rocker of push switches jump back in original position.
1-pole, 1-way 505 TU
1-pole, 2-way 509 TU

2-gang push-button insert 10 AX / 250 V ~


Screwless terminals for wires up to 2.5 mm2
1-pole, 1-way (make) 535 U
1-pole, 1-way (make) with 2 glow lamps ref.-no. 94 535 U 5
The switch is illuminated in OFF-position.
The lamps can be exchanged without disconnecting mains.

2-gang push-button insert 10 AX / 250 V ~


Screw terminals for wires up to 2.5 mm2
1-pole, 2-way 539 U

2-gang multi switch insert 10 A / 250 V ~


Screw terminals for wires up to 2.5 mm2
1-pole, 2-way, 2-gang push-button
with 4 make contacts, rocker in neutral position 532-4 U
Especially designed as controller for wirings with relays, e.g. in combination
with relay station ref.-no. RS 8 REGHE.
Only recommended for CD and LS ranges (except metal versions).

2-gang blind switch insert 10 AX / 250 V ~


Screwless terminals for wires up to 2.5 mm2
Mechanical interlocking to avoid switching of both rockers at the same time.
1-pole switch (1 motor) 509 VU
1-pole push-button (1 motor) 539 VU

14
12-39_3870_GB_26_UP:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 11:10 Uhr Seite 15

Rotary switch inserts Inserts

Ref.-no.
Rotary switch insert
Screw terminals for wires up to 4 mm2
screw fixing only, without claws
with scale disc
not suitable for installation in surface caps
3-level switch with OFF-position 16 AX 250 V ~ 1101-4
2-pole 20 AX 250 V ~ 1101-20
2-pole 20 AX 250 V ~ with indicator light 101-20 KO
When wallpapering, avoid wallpaper on the supporting frame of the insert.

Rotary switch insert


screw terminals for wires up to 6 mm2
screw fixing only, without claws
with scale disc
2-pole 32 AX 250 V ~ 1101-32
including wall box 60 mm, depth 63 mm

Scale disc
(Spare part)
for ref.-no. 1101-4 anthracite SKS 1101-4
for ref.-no. 1101-20 anthracite SKS 1101-20

Timer switch insert 16 AX / 250 V ~


Screw terminals for wires up to 4 mm2
screw fixing only, without claws
with scale disc
accuracy 10 %
2-pole, 1-way max. 015 min. 11015
2-pole, 1-way max. 030 min. 11030
1-pole, 2-way max. 030 min. 11030-20
2-pole, 1-way max. 060 min. 11060
2-pole, 1-way max. 120 min. 11120
1-pole, 2-way max. 120 min. 11120-20

Scale disc
(Spare part)
for ref.-no. 11015 anthracite SKS 11015
for ref.-no. 11120-20 anthracite SKS 11120-20

Rotary blind switch insert 10 AX / 250 V ~


Screw terminals for wires up to 2.5 mm2
with scale disc
Can be converted into rotary push-button by means of locking piece (included).
1-pole (1 motor) 1234.10
2-pole (2 motors) 1234.20
Can also be used as pole changer (see wiring diagram in data sheet).
A pre-travel prevents a quick change of direction.

Scale disc
(Spare part)
for ref.-no. 1234.10, 1234.20 anthracite SKS 1234.10

Locking piece
(Spare part)
for ref.-no. 1234.10, 1234.20 34.10

15
12-39_3870_GB_26_UP:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 11:10 Uhr Seite 16

Inserts Key switch inserts

IP Protection level IP 44 ensured

Ref.-no.
Key switch insert with protection against dismounting
Screw terminals for wires up to 2.5 mm2
screw fixing only, without claws
for locking cylinder with total length of approx. 40 mm, e.g. ref.-no.: 28, 28 G1
10 AX 250 V ~
Blind switch, 2-pole (2 motors)* 104.28
Blind push-button, 1-pole (1 motor)* 134.18
Blind push-button, 2-pole (2 motors)* 134.28
* A pre-travel prevents a quick change of direction.
Push-button, 1-pole, 2-way 133.18
Push-button 1-pole, 1 break 1 make contact 138.18
16 AX 250 V ~
Switch, 2-pole, 2-way 106.28

Key switch insert


Screw terminals for wires up to 2.5 mm2
screw fixing only, without claws
for locking cylinder with total length of approx. 40 mm, e.g. ref.-no.: 28, 28 G1
not suitable for installation in surface caps
Installation depth: min. 55 mm. No protection against dismounting.
10 AX 250 V ~
Blind switch, 1-pole (1 motor)* 104.15
Blind push-button, 1-pole (1 motor)* 134.15
* A pre-travel prevents a quick change of direction.
Push-button, 1-pole, 2-way 133.15
16 AX 250 V ~
Switch, 1-pole, 2-way 106.15

Key switch insert with protection against dismounting


Screw terminals for wires up to 2.5 mm2
screw fixing only, without claws
for locking cylinder with total length of approx. 40 mm, e.g. ref.-no.: 28, 28 G1
When using locking cylinder from other manufacturer, please consider, that the
cylinder has key access on only one side. (Otherwise water can get through the
cylinder into the switch housing. IP 44 is thus not guaranteed.)
10 AX 250 V ~
Blind switch, 1-pole (1 motor)* IP CD 104.18 WU
Blind push-button, 1-pole (1 motor)* IP CD 134.18 WU
* A pre-travel prevents a quick change of direction.
Push-button, 1-pole, 2-way IP CD 133.18 WU
16 AX 250 V ~
Switch, 1-pole, 2-way IP CD 106.18 WU
Protection against unauthorised dismounting.

Locking cylinder for key switches


suitable for IP 44
with 3 keys
different locks 28
equal locks 28 G1

Key
for locking cylinder 28 G1
(Spare part)
1 piece 28 G1 SL

16
12-39_3870_GB_26_UP:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 11:11 Uhr Seite 17

Modular jack sockets Inserts

Ref.-no.
Modular jack socket, cat. 3
with screw connection terminals, suitable for ISDN
for 6 (RJ 12) and 8 (RJ 45) pole plugs.
8 screw contacts
8-pole, for 1 terminal UAE 8 UPO
2 x 8-pole, for 2 terminals (parallel) UAE 2X8 UPO
2 x 8 screw contacts
UAE 8 UPO
2 x 8-pole, for 2 terminals (separate) UAE 8-8 UPO
Category 3
suitable up to 16 MHz

UAE 2x8 UPO

Modular jack socket, cat. 5


2 x 8-pole, for 2 terminals (separate), unshielded UAE 8-8 UPO K 5 US

UAE 8-8 UPO K 5 US


Modular jack socket, cat. 6 / Class E
screw fixing only, without claws
for network applications
LSA connection terminal
variable running of cable without sharp bending from all directions possible
suitable for standard wall boxes
8-pole, for 1 terminal UAE 8 UPOK6E
2 x 8-pole, for 2 terminals (separate) UAE 8-8 UPOK6E
RJ 45, category 6/class E (1 Gbit/s / 250 MHz)
Corresponds to Cat. 6/class E acc. to ISO/IEC 11801:2011-06 and DIN EN 50173-1:2011-09 UAE 8 UPOK6E
2500 insertion/removal cycles, suitable for RJ 11/12, suitable for PoE+ acc. to IEEE 802.3at

Modular jack socket, cat. 6 / cat. 6A iso


screw fixing only, without claws
for network applications
UAE 8 UPOK6
LSA connection terminal
variable running of cable without sharp bending from all directions possible
suitable for standard wall boxes
8-pole, for 1 terminal UAE 8 UPOK6
2 x 8-pole, for 2 terminals (separate) UAE 8-8 UPOK6
RJ 45, category 6A, class EA (10 Gbit/s / 500 MHz),
Corresponds to Cat. 6A acc. to ISO/IEC 11801 Amendment 2 and Cat. 6A acc. to TIA/EIA-568-B.2-10 2008
suitable for PoE+ acc. to IEEE 802.3at, 1000 insertion/removal cycles, suitable for RJ 11/12

UAE 8-8 UPOK6

17
12-39_3870_GB_26_UP:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 11:11 Uhr Seite 18

Inserts Modular jack sockets

Ref.-no.
Universal modular jack socket cat. 6A iso, type A
RJ 45, shielded
for covers ref.-no.: 169-1 NWE.., 169-2 NWE.., ..569-1 NWE.., ..569-2 NWE.., ..969-1 NWE.., ..969-2 NWE..
suitable for 10 Gbit Ethernet
UMA-CAT6A
RJ 45, category 6A, class EA (10 Gbit/s / 500 MHz),
Corresponds to Cat. 6A acc. to ISO/IEC 11801 Amendment 2 and Cat. 6A acc. to TIA/EIA-568-B.2-10 2008
suitable for PoE+ acc. to IEEE 802.3at, 1000 insertion/removal cycles, suitable for RJ 11/12
unmistakable terminals with colour code and numeration (A and B code of the same value)
UMA-CAT6A
for data cables with a diameter of 6 10 mm
for wires of AWG 22 to AWG 24 (rigid/flexible, 7-core cable)
Can be combined with 2-gang supporting frame ref.-no.: UMA-MA2 and TAE covers of all design ranges.

2-gang supporting frame


for 2 universal modular jack sockets, type A, ref.-no. UMA-CAT6A
screw fixing only, without claws
Can be combined with covers ref.-no. .. 569 T .., .. 969 T .. of all design ranges.
Installation only in cable duct boxes and floor boxes.
UMA-MA2
UMA-MA2 also suitable for modules Assmann: DN-93612 Cat. 6A, shielded, Keystone; DN-93614; DN-93615

Universal modular jack socket cat. 6A iso, type B


RJ 45, shielded
for 3-gang supporting frame ref.-no.: UMB-MA3
for cover ref-no.: ..969-3 NA UA ..
suitable for 10 Gbit Ethernet
UMB-CAT6A
RJ 45, category 6A, class EA (10 Gbit/s / 500 MHz),
UMB-CAT6A Corresponds to Cat. 6A acc. to ISO/IEC 11801 Amendment 2 and Cat. 6A acc. to TIA/EIA-568-B.2-10 2008
suitable for PoE+ acc. to IEEE 802.3at, 1000 insertion/removal cycles, suitable for RJ 11/12
unmistakable terminals with colour code and numeration (A and B code of the same value)
for data cables with a diameter of 6 10 mm
for wires of AWG 22 to AWG 24 (rigid/flexible, 7-core cable)

3-gang supporting frame


for 3 universal modular jack sockets, type B, ref.-no. UMB-CAT6A
screw fixing only, without claws
Can be combined with cover 3-gang ref.-no.: ..969-3 NAUA ..
Installation only in cable duct boxes and floor boxes.
UMB-MA3
also suitable for modules Dtwyler: MS-N 1/8 Cat.6a, ref.-no.: 440 000
UMB-MA3

18
12-39_3870_GB_26_UP:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 11:11 Uhr Seite 19

WLAN access point Inserts

Ref.-no.
WLAN access point
Power supply AC 230 V ~
WLAN-AC-UAE
Can be operated as a Wireless Access Point, Client, Repeater or Bridge
Backside screw terminals for LAN cable (4-pole)
Frontside LAN connection via RJ45 socket
Integrated WLAN antenna
WLAN switchable, timer and timer function
Wireless range adjustable
Settings via integrated web server
Installation in deep wall box
Covers:
AS / A ranges: ref.-no.: A 569-1 ..PLUA ..
CD range: ref.-no.: CD 569-1 UA .., CD 569-1 NAUA ..
SL 500: ref.-no.: SL 569-1 UA ..
LS range: ref.-no.: ..969-1 UA .., ..969-1 NAUA ..
50 x 50: ref.-no.: 169-1 UAE WW
Technical data
Rated voltage: AC 100 ... 240 V ~, 50/60 Hz
Connection: screw terminals
Power consumption: max. 3 W
Radio data rate: 150 Mbit/s
Radio standards: IEEE 802.11b/g/n
Frequency range: 2.4 GHz
Security: WEP, WPA, WPA2
Transmitting power: 100 mW (adjustable 2 ... 100 %)

WLAN access point PoE


Power over Ethernet
WLAN-AC-POE-UAE
Can be operated as a Wireless Access Point, Client, Repeater or Bridge
Backside screw terminals for LAN cable (9-pole)
Frontside LAN connection via RJ45 socket
PoE provided at frontside connection (Class 2)
Integrated WLAN antenna
WLAN switchable, timer and timer function
Wireless range adjustable
Settings via integrated web server
Installation in deep wall box
Covers:
AS / A ranges: ref.-no.: A 569-1 ..PLUA ..
CD range: ref.-no.: CD 569-1 UA .., CD 569-1 NAUA ..
SL 500: ref.-no.: SL 569-1 UA ..
LS range: ref.-no.: ..969-1 UA .., ..969-1 NAUA ..
50 x 50: ref.-no.: 169-1 UAE WW
Technical data
Rated voltage: PoE 48 V, Class 0, IEEE 802.3at
Connection: screw terminals
Power consumption: max. 3 W
Radio data rate: 150 Mbit/s
Radio standards: IEEE 802.11b/g/n
Frequency range: 2.4 GHz
Security: WEP, WPA, WPA2
Transmitting power: 100 mW (adjustable 2 ... 100 %)

19
12-39_3870_GB_26_UP:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 11:11 Uhr Seite 20

Inserts WLAN access point

Ref.-no.
Media converter 2-gang
2 x RJ45, 1 x POF (Polymer Optical Fiber)
MK-POF-2UAE
Covers:
AS / A ranges: ref.-no.: A 569-2 BFPLUA ..
CD range: ref.-no.: CD 569-2 ..UA ..
SL 500: ref.-no.: SL 569-2 UA ..
LS range: ref.-no.: ..969-2 UA .., ..969-2 NAUA ..
50 x 50: ref.-no.: 169-2 UAE WW
Technical data
Rated voltage: AC 100 ... 240 V ~ 10 %
Power consumption: typical 0.9 W
Interfaces: 2 x RJ45, 1 x POF (2.2 mm Duplex)
Transfer rate: applications up to 100 Mbit/s
Max. line length: 70 m with POF 2.2 mm
Wavelength: typical 660 nm
Transmission characteristics:
DIN EN 50173-1:2003-06 Category 5
ISO/IEC 11801:2002 Category 5
DIN EN 50173:2011-09
IEC 60603-7-2:2007 unshielded 100 MHz
TIA/IAE-568-B.2-2001 Category 5e

Media converter 1-gang


Rail mounting device, 1 rail unit
1 x RJ45, 1 x POF (Polymer Optical Fiber)
MK-POF-UAE-REG
Technical data
Rated voltage: AC/DC 8 ... 24 V
Power supply: via external power supply, ref.-no. NT 1220 REG VDC
input voltage 100 240 V ~
output voltage DC 12 V / 2 A
(not included)
Power consumption: typical 0.9 W
Interfaces: 1 x RJ45, 1 x POF (2.2 mm Duplex)
Transfer rate: applications up to 100 Mbit/s
Max. line length: 70 m with POF 2.2 mm
Wavelength: typical 660 nm
Mounting width: 18 mm (1 rail unit)
Transmission characteristics:
DIN EN 50173-1:2003-06 Category 5
ISO/IEC 11801:2002 Category 5
DIN EN 50173:2011-09
IEC 60603-7-2:2007 unshielded 100 MHz
TIA/IAE-568-B.2-2001 Category 5e

20
12-39_3870_GB_26_UP:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 11:11 Uhr Seite 21

SAT-TV-FM-sockets Inserts

Ref.-no.
TV-FM socket outlet insert
Screwless terminals
for cable TV and SAT distribution
Frequency range 5 ... 2400 MHz without gaps on both outputs.
Terminated outlet EDU 04 F
Loop through outlet GEDU 10
Loop through outlet GEDU 15
Terminated outlets are used for individual + community installation (BK, CATV, MATV) connected to
decoupling stub lines Loop through outlets can also be used in tree networks. The last loop through
socket installed in a trunk or stub line must be terminated by terminating resistor R 75.
Technical Data EDU 04 F GEDU 10 GEDU 15
IN OUT (throughpass)
Frequency range: 5 ... 2150 (2400) MHz 5 ... 2150 (2400) MHz
Attenuation: 2.5 dB 1.0 dB
IN TV (IEC male)
Frequency range: 5 ... 2150 (2400) MHz 5 ... 2150 (2400) MHz 5 ... 2150 (2400) MHz
Attenuation: 4.0 dB 10 dB 15 dB
IN RF (IEC female)
Frequency range: 5 ... 2150 (2400) MHz 5 ... 2150 (2400) MHz 5 ... 2150 (2400) MHz
Attenuation: 4.0 dB 10 dB 15 dB
Isolation
OUT TV / RF: VHF, UHF / SAT: 35/20 dB VHF, UHF / SAT: 38/30 dB
TV RF: VHF, UHF / SAT: 20/20 dB VHF, UHF / SAT: 38/30 dB VHF, UHF / SAT: 24/24 dB
DC through
TV IN (IEC male): 13/18 V, 22 kHz no no
max. +24 V/0.5 A

SAT-TV-FM socket outlet insert


Screwless terminals
3-gang all-round antenna socket with interconnected frequency bands, thus flexible and future proof.
Suitable for SAT IF and CATV domestic distribution installations.
Seamless CATV and SAT ranges and low distribution attenuation thanks to combined filter-tap structure.
Terminated outlet EDA 302 F
Loop through outlet GDA 313 F
Terminated outlets are used for individual + community installation (BK, CATV, MATV) connected to
decoupling stub lines Loop through outlets can also be used in tree networks. The last loop through
socket installed in a trunk or stub line must be terminated by terminating resistor R 75.
Technical Data EDU 302 F GDA 313 F
IN OUT (throughpass)
Frequency range: 5 ... 2150 (2400) MHz
Attenuation: 1.0 ... 2.0 (2.8) dB
IN TV (IEC male)
Frequency range: 5 ... 862 MHz 5 ... 862 MHz
Attenuation: 2.5 dB 13 dB
IN RF (IEC female)
Frequency range: 5 ... 118 MHz 5 ... 118 MHz
Attenuation: 6.5 dB 17 dB
IN SAT (F female)
Frequency range: 950 ... 2150 (2400) MHz 950 ... 2150 (2400) MHz
Attenuation: 2.2 dB 12 (13.5) dB
Isolation
OUT TV / RF: VHF, UHF: 28 dB
OUT SAT: SAT: 18 dB
TV SAT: VHF, UHF / SAT: 20/20 dB VHF, UHF / SAT: 20/20 dB
RF SAT: VHF / SAT: 35/30 dB VHF / SAT: 35/30 dB
TV RF: VHF, UHF: 20 dB VHF, UHF: 20 dB
DC through
SAT-IN (F female): 13/18 V, 22 kHz 13/18 V, 22 kHz
max. +24 V/0.5 A max. +24 V/0.5 A
21
12-39_3870_GB_26_UP:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 11:11 Uhr Seite 22

Accessories

Ref.-no.
Terminating resistor 75
to terminate the last loop through socket installed in a line
for TV-FM socket outlet inserts ref.-no.: GEDU 10, GEDU 15, GDA 313 F
R 75

Button lever
for the simple and gentle deinstallation of rockers and covers
W-KEIL

Pull cord insert


for rockers with great lens (.. KO)
red 34
with 50 mm pull cord
The pull cord insert has to be plugged into a 1-gang cover with lens to
extend switches or push-buttons with a cord.
Suitable inserts: 506 TU, 507 TU, 502 TU, 506 KOTU, 502 KOTU,
531 U 534 U, 631 A 634 A, 331 A

Pull cord insert


for rockers with lens (.. KO5)
red 34 KO5
The pull cord insert has to be plugged into a 1-gang cover with lens to
extend switches or push-buttons with a cord.
Suitable inserts: 506 TU, 507 TU, 502 TU, 506 KOTU, 502 KOTU,
531 U 534 U, 631 A 634 A, 331 A

Pull cord
for pull cord inserts ref.-no: 34 and 34 KO5
lenghts: approx. 2000 mm
red ZS-34 KO5S

SCHUKO plug, 16 A / 250 V ~


2-pole with earth contact
ivory 16 S
Top cable entry

Plug for British Standard sockets


2-pole with earth contact
Screw terminals for wires up to 2.5 mm2 acc. to BS 1363-1
ivory SA 13

Pilot light insert


Screwless terminals for wires up to 2.5 mm2
thread E 10 (max. load 5 W) 938-10 U
thread E 14 (max. load 5 W) 938-14 U

22
12-39_3870_GB_26_UP:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 11:12 Uhr Seite 23

Lamps Accessories

Ref.-no.
Incandescent lamp
for pilot lights ref.-no.: 938-14 U, 837-14 W, 637-14 W, 637-14 A, 637-14 A WW
approx. 31 mm long
E 14, 230 V / 3 W E 14-3 W
average life approx. 1,000 h E 14-3 W

LED cluster lamp


LED lamp with a high light effect for AC/DC, independent of polarity.
Shockproof, insensitive to fast switching loops and higher voltage pulses.
average life: approx. 50,000 h
length: 35 mm
E 14, 230 V ~ / 1.2 W yellow E 14-230 LED GE
E 14, 230 V ~ / 1.2 W green E 14-230 LED GN
E 14, 230 V ~ / 1.2 W red E 14-230 LED RT
E 14, 230 V ~ / 1.2 W white E 14-230 LED W E 14-230 LED ..

Plug-in glow lamp


for switch insert ref.-no.: 506 U, 507 U, 502 U, 806 W, 807 W, 802 W, 806 NAW,
606 W, 607 W, 602 W, 606 NAW
for switch insert with indicator light ref.-no.: 506 KOU, 502 KOU, 806 KOW, 802 KOW, 606 KOW, 602 KOW
for push switch insert ref.-no.: 506 TU, 507 TU, 502 TU
for push switch insert with indicator light ref.-no.: 506 KOTU, 502 KOTU
for push-button insert ref.-no.: 531 U, 533 U, 534 U, 831 W, 833 W, 834 W, 631 W, 633 W, 634 W
for heater switch ref.-no.: 806 HW, 802 HW, 606 HW, 602 HW 90 /
230 V ~, 1.1 mA 90 95
230 V ~, 0.5 mA 95
average life approx. 40,000 h

Plug-in glow lamp


for 1-gang switch insert ref.-no.: 503 U, 603 W, 803 W
for 1-gang switch insert with indicator light ref.-no.: 501-20 KOU,
502-20 KOU, 506-20 KOU, 503 KOU, 803 KOW 98 /
400 V ~, 0.5 mA 98 98-220
230 V ~, 1.1 mA 98-220
average life approx. 40,000 h

Plug-in glow lamps and LED lamps


for 2-gang switch insert ref.-no.: 505 U 5
for 2-gang switch insert with indicator light ref.-no.: 505 KOU 5
for 2-gang push-button insert ref.-no.: 535 U 5
Glow lamp (average life approx. 40,000 h)
230 V ~, 0.8 mA white 94
230 V ~, 0.8 mA green 94 GN
230 V ~, 0.8 mA red 94 RT
LED lamp (average life approx. 100,000 h)
110 250 V ~, 0.3 mA blue 94-LED BL 94 ..
110 250 V ~, 0.3 mA green 94-LED GN
110 250 V ~, 0.3 mA red 94-LED RT
110 250 V ~, 0.3 mA white 94-LED W
12 24 V ~, 0.3 mA white 941224 LED W

Plug-in glow lamp


for 2-gang switch ref-no.: 605 W, 805 W
230 V ~, 0.8 mA 99 99
average life approx. 40,000 h

23
12-39_3870_GB_26_UP:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 11:12 Uhr Seite 24

Accessories Lamps

Ref.-no.
Plug-in incandescent lamp
for switch insert ref.-no.: 506 U, 507 U, 502 U, 806 W, 807 W, 802 W,
806 NAW, 606 W, 607 W, 602 W, 606 NAW
for switch insert with indicator light ref.-no.: 506 KOU, 502 KOU, 806 KOW, 802 KOW, 606 KOW, 602 KOW
for push switch insert ref.-no.: 506 TU, 507 TU, 502 TU
for push switch insert with indicator light ref.-no.: 506 KOTU, 502 KOTU
96-12/ for push-button insert ref.-no.: 531 U, 533 U, 534 U, 831 W, 833 W, 834 W, 631 W, 633 W, 634 W
96-24 for heater switch ref.-no.: 806 HW, 802 HW, 606 HW, 602 HW
average life approx. 50,000 h
12 V , 40 mA 96-12
24 V , 25 mA 96-24
96-36/ average life approx. 20,000 h
96-48 36 V , 20 mA 96-36
48 V , 25 mA 96-48

LED lamp
for switch insert ref.-no.: 506 U, 507 U, 502 U, 806 W, 807 W, 802 W,
806 NAW, 606 W, 607 W, 602 W, 606 NAW
for switch insert with indicator light ref.-no.: 506 KOU, 502 KOU, 806 KOW, 802 KOW, 606 KOW, 602 KOW
for push switch insert ref.-no.: 506 TU, 507 TU, 502 TU
for push switch insert with indicator light ref.-no.: 506 KOTU, 502 KOTU
for push-button insert ref.-no.: 531 U, 533 U, 534 U, 831 W, 833 W, 834 W, 631 W, 633 W, 634 W
for heater switch ref.-no.: 806 HW, 802 HW, 606 HW, 602 HW
for AC and DC, independent of polarity
12 48 V ~, approx. 4 mA
blue 961248 LED BL
green 961248 LED GN
red 961248 LED RT
white
961248..
230 V ~, approx. 1.1 mA 961248 LED W
blue 90-LED BL
green 90-LED GN
red 90-LED RT
white 90-LED W
average life approx. 100,000 h

Capacitor, 1 F
1 MF 250
In installations with many illuminated push-buttons (without N-conductor) for the
1 MF 250 control of relays malfunction can occur at the relay because of the "lamp current".
Solution: Select push-button with separate N-conductor (533 U) or connect the
capacitor (1 MF 250) parallel to the relay inductor.

Plug-in glow lamp


for SCHUKO socket with pilot light ref.-no. ..520 KO..
93 for cover with pilot light ref.-no. ..594-0 KO..
230 V ~, 1.1 mA 93
average life approx. 40,000 h

LED lamp
for SCHUKO socket with pilot light ref.-no. ..520 KO..
for cover with pilot light ref.-no. ..594-0 KO..
230 V ~, approx. 0.5 mA
93 LED.. red 93-LED RT
green 93-LED GN
average life approx. 100,000 h

24
12-39_3870_GB_26_UP:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 11:12 Uhr Seite 25

Wall / Floor boxes Accessories

Ref.-no.
Wall box
depth: 46 mm 1056-04
depth: 63 mm 1556-04
fire resistant up to 650 C
protection level IP 2X
device screw distance 60 mm
halogen-free
for screw and claw fixing
break-out openings for for wires and tubes 20 mm / 25 mm
with 2 installation screws 15 mm

Wall box for hollow walls, 1-gang


depth: 47 mm 9063-01
depth: 61 mm 9064-01
halogen-free, colour: white
depth: 47 mm 9063-77
depth: 61 mm 9064-77
cutting hole 68 mm
fire resistant up to 850 C
standardised combination distance 71 mm
for panel thickness 7 40 mm
device screw distance 60 mm
knockout plugs for for wires and tubes 20 mm
with 2 installation screws

British Standard wall box


depth: 48 mm BS 6042 M
according to B.S. 4662
1-gang, square shaped
device screw distance 60.3 mm
with earth terminal and slide coupling for combinations

Plaster compensation frame


black PCF 6042
fire resistant up to 650 C
The PCF 6042 is a stackable compensation frame made of elastic plastic that allows,
wall boxes that are installed too deeply or out of square to be adjusted retrospectively,
creating the ideal installation conditions for any flush-mounted inserts.
Flexibly stackable in 1 mm stages
Installation video available: www.jung.de/pcf

Empty housing for floor installation


suitable for all socket inserts
bottom part: thermoplastic material with 4 inlets PG 16
upper part: cover with hinged lid made of dyecast aluminium
protection level: IP 41
hinged lid can be painted over
1632

25
12-39_3870_GB_26_UP:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 11:12 Uhr Seite 26

Accessories Audio / Data devices

Ref.-no.
Chassis connector
XLR compatible, with universal housing for male and female version
Chassis (male) CXLR-S
Chassis (female) CXLR-D
CXLR-S CXLR-D Covers:
AS / A ranges: ref.-no.: A 568-1 BF .. CD ranges: ref.-no.: 568-1 50 x 50: ref.-no.: 168-1 WW

Gold-plated loudspeaker terminal


for professional connection of high quality loudspeaker systems.
Cable sockets (6 mm and 8 mm fork) or crimped cables (6 mm2) are connected with a patented
clamping nut system. The pole terminal body is manufactured in one piece to obtain the least resistance.
red identification LPK 63 RT
LPK 63 RT
black identification LPK 63 SW
Technical data
Internal connection: soldering or crimped connection (crimped ferrule, screw contact)
Transition resistance: 0.1 m clamp connection
0.15 m banana plug 4 mm
LPK 63 SW Material: 24 carat gold-plated copper

High quality RCA (phono) socket pair


red/white identification CIB 63
made of 24 carat gold plated copper, double prismatic contact.
With special pressure spring mechanic. Dielectric made of Teflon.
Inside connection: soldering

Mounting plate
for installation of loudspeaker terminals (ref.-no. LPK 63 RT, LPK 63 SW)
or RCA (phono) sockets (ref.-no. CIB 63) in cover for 2 loudspeaker sockets (ref.-no. .. 562 .., .. 962 ..)
63 WBT

Stereo loudspeaker socket


25 V ~, 60 V DC
for wires up to 10 mm2
with 4 front side plug terminals, also suitable for SELV
white SLA 2 WW
anthracite SLA 2 AN
Covers:
AS / A ranges: ref.-no. A 569 PLT .. CD ranges: ref.-no. CD 569 T .. SL range: ref.-no. SL 569 T ..
LS ranges: ref.-no. .. 969 T .., .. 2969 T ..

D-subminiature socket
9-pole D SUB 9
including fixing accessories, thread UNC 4/40
Covers:
AS / A ranges ref.-no.: A 594-1915.. CD ranges ref.-no.: CD 594-1.., CD 594-2..
LS ranges ref.-no.: LS 994-1.. and in data connection cap ref.-no.: ..554..

Mounting plate for D-subminiature sockets


53 x 17 mm, 47 mm distance between fixing centres
(only necessary for covers .. 594-1 .., .. 594-2 .., A 594-1915 .., LS 994-1 ..)
for socket D SUB 9 D9
for D-subminiature sockets 15-pole D 15
Delivery including two M 3 screws.

Modular jack sockets


(Tyco Electronics AMP)
insulation displacement connection (IDC)
6-pole RJ 12, unshielded, cat. 3, AMP no. 216000-1 6 WE

26
12-39_3870_GB_26_UP:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 11:12 Uhr Seite 27

Mounting adapter Accessories

Ref.-no.
Centre plate with inscription field 9 x 51 mm
for mounting adapter 30 ref.-no.: 3069..
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
white A 569-30 BF PL WW
black A 569-30 BF PL SW
Thermoplastic (breakproof) lacquered
aluminium A 569-30 BF PL AL
champagne A 569-30 BF PL CH
mocha A 569-30 BF PL MO
matt anthracite A 569-30 BF PL ANM

Centre plate with inscription field 9 x 51 mm


for mounting adapter 30 ref.-no.: 3069..
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory LS 569-30 BF PL
white LS 569-30 BF PL WW
light grey LS 569-30 BF PL LG
black LS 569-30 BF PL SW
(lacquered)
aluminium AL 569-30 BF PL-L
stainless steel ES 569-30 BF PL-L
anthracite AL 569-30 BF PL AN L
dark AL 569-30 BF PL D-L
classic brass ME 569-30 BF PL C-L
antique brass ME 569-30 BF PL AT L

Mounting adapter 30
for modular jack sockets:
3M: VOL-0001, VOL-0002, VOLOCK6ASND8
Assmann: DN 93612, DN 93615
MetzConnect (BTR): 130A10-I, 130B23-E, 130B21-E
CobiNet: 6920 0052
Dtwyler: 418 061
eku: t66851000, t66850990
LEONI: 9ZQ01000, 9ZK00026
Nexans:
N420.666 + Adapter red N429.625 or
Adapter blue N429.626 N420.550 + Adapter red N429.625
N420.735 + Metalladapter N429.620 N420.67A + Adapter red N429.625
N420.555 + Adapter red N429.625 N420.661 + Adapter red N429.625
N420.66A + Adapter red N429.625 N420.660 + Adapter red N429.625
RADIALL: R280MOD807, R2080MOD810A, R280MOD830, R280MOD803A, R280MOD800
Reichle & De-Massari: R509509(inkl. Adapter Keystone)
SETEC: 501415, 501414
SIEMON: MX6-K.., MX5-K.., Z6A-SK(XX), Z5A-SK(XX), Z6A-K01, Z6A-01, MX5-F01,
MX6-01, MX6-F01, Z5-S01, MX5-01, Z6-K01, Z6-01, Z6A-S01
Telegrtner: J00029K0036, J00029A2000
3069-2 SIE
27
12-39_3870_GB_26_UP:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 11:12 Uhr Seite 28

Accessories Mounting adapter

Ref.-no.
Mounting adapter 30
for modular jack sockets:
TE Connectivity: 1375187-1, 0-1375189-1, 1375190-1, 0-1375188-1
1375055-1, 1339015-1, 1711592-1
3069-25 WE

Mounting adapter 30
for modular jack sockets:
Commscope (Systimax) MEGALINE: MGS200, MGS500BH-262, MPS100E-003
Reichle & De-Massari:
R808370 (inkl. Adapter Nr. 1)
R304373 + Adapter R310694
R302372 + Adapter R310694
R305111 + Adapter R310694
R305112 + Adapter R310694
R305113 + Adapter R310694
R305114 + Adapter R310694
3069-2 AT

Mounting adapter 30
for modular jack sockets:
Panduit: CJS688TGY, CJ688TGAW, CMDJAQLCBL, CMDSLCZAW, CJ6X88TGAW,
CJ5E88TGAW, CJS5E88TGY
3069-2 PAND

Mounting adapter 30
for modular jack sockets:
LexCom: 306520007 + Mounting frame creme 306580030
3069-2 LEX

Mounting adapter 30
for modular jack sockets:
Panduit: NK688MBL
TE Connectivity: 1711342-1, 1116604-x, 1116603-x
3069-2 BR

28
12-39_3870_GB_26_UP:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 11:12 Uhr Seite 29

Data connection housing Accessories

Ref.-no.
Data connection cap with inscription field 23 x 59 mm
with supporting frame, screw fixing only
for vertical and 15 or 30 outlet.
The 30 angle allows the vertical combination of several data connection caps,
except ref.-no. 54-25 WE.
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory 554
white CD 554 WW

Data connection cap with inscription field 23 x 59 mm


with supporting frame, screw fixing only
for vertical and 15 or 30 outlet.
The 30 angle allows the vertical combination of several data connection caps,
except ref.-no. 54-25 WE.
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory TS 554
white TS 554 WW
light grey TS 554 LG

Data connection cap with inscription field 23 x 59 mm


with supporting frame, screw fixing only
for vertical and 15 or 30 outlet.
The 30 angle allows the vertical combination of several data connection caps,
except ref.-no. 54-25 WE.
aluminium (lacquered) AL 2554
stainless steel (lacquered) ES 2554
anthracite (lacquered) AL 2554 AN

29
12-39_3870_GB_26_UP:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 11:12 Uhr Seite 30

Accessories Data connection housing

Ref.-no.
Mounting plates for data connection cap

for 1 modular jack socket


Universalmodul, RJ 45 System, shielded, Cat. 6a, JUNG ref- no. UMA-CAT6A
Modular, RJ 45 System, unshielded, 8 PWE, Cat. 3
Modular, RJ 45 System, unshielded, 8 WECEKAN, Cat. 3
Qmax-Serie, Modular, RJ 45 System, shielded, 3M, Cat. 6
Highband-Serie, Modular, RJ 45 System, shielded, Krone, Cat. 6
Compact-HK-Serie, Modular, RJ 45 System, shielded, Krone, Cat. 5e
Snap-in Connector LANmark-6, Modular, RJ 45 System, shielded, Nexans no. 420.630, Cat. 6
Modular, Keystone RJ 45 System, unshielded, Panduit no. KJ88.., Cat. 3
Modular, Keystone RJ 45 System, unshielded, Panduit no. KJ588.., Cat. 5
Modular, RJ 12 System, unshielded, RADIALL no. R280MOD804, Cat. 4
Modular, RJ 45 System, unshielded, RADIALL no. R280MOD805, Cat. 4
Modular, RJ 45 System, unshielded, RADIALL no. R280MOD807, Cat. 5
Modular, RJ 45 System, shielded, RADIALL no. R280MOD809, Cat. 5
Modular, Keystone RJ 45 System, shielded, SIEMON no. MX6-KS.., Cat. 6
Modular, RJ 12 System, unshielded, Tyco Electronics AMP no. 216000-1, Cat. 3
Modular, RJ 45 System, unshielded, Tyco Electronics AMP no. 216005-1, Cat. 3
Assmann module DN-93612 Cat. 6A, shielded, Keystone
Assmann module DN-93614
54-1 WE

110 Connect, RJ 45 System, shielded, Tyco Electronics AMP Nr. 0-1116515-1, Cat. 5e
110 Connect, RJ 45 System, shielded, Tyco Electronics AMP Nr. 0-1375117-1
SL 110 Connect, RJ 45 System, shielded, Tyco Electronics AMP Nr. 0-1375189-1, Cat. 5e
SL 110 Connect, RJ 45 System, unshielded, Tyco Electronics AMP Nr. 0-1375190-X, Cat. 5e
SL 110 Connect, RJ 45 System, shielded, Tyco Electronics AMP Nr. 0-1375188-1, Cat. 6
SL 110 Connect, RJ 45 System, unshielded, Tyco Electronics AMP Nr. 0-1375055-3, Cat. 6
Toolless Jack, RJ 45 System, unshielded, Tyco Electronics AMP Nr. 0-1116603-X, Cat. 3
Toolless Jack, RJ 45 System, unshielded, Tyco Electronics AMP Nr. 0-1116604-X, Cat. 5e
Toolless Jack, RJ 45 System, shielded, Tyco Electronics AMP Nr. 1339015-1, Cat. 5e
Toolless Jack, RJ 45 System, unshielded, Tyco Electronics AMP Nr. 0-1116605-X, Cat. 6
Toolless Jack, RJ 45 System, shielded, Tyco Electronics AMP Nr. 1339016-1, Cat. 6
LWL, MTRJ System, Tyco Electronics AMP Nr. 1278414-1
54-15 WE

for 2 modular jack sockets Reichle & De-Massari


freenet, classic system, shielded, no. R35252, Cat. 5e
freenet, classic system, unshielded, no. R35251, Cat. 5e
freenet, star system, shielded, no. R302377, Cat. 6
freenet, star system, unshielded, no. R302378, Cat. 6
for 1 SC-Compact 2-channel module
LWL, freenet, vision system, no. R30575
54-2 ACS

30
12-39_3870_GB_26_UP:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 11:12 Uhr Seite 31

Data connection housing Accessories

Ref.-no.
Mounting plates for data connection cap

for 2 subminiature D-sockets, 9-pole, D SUB 9


54-2 D 9

for 2 modular jack sockets type LAN Connect 808MK2, cat. 5, shielded,
or LAN Connect 808MK3, cat. 6, shielded
54-2 ITT

for 2 modular jack sockets


Universalmodul, RJ 45 System, shielded, Cat. 6a, JUNG ref- no. UMA-CAT6A
Qmax-Serie, Modular, RJ 45 System, shielded, 3M, Cat. 6
Highband-Serie, Modular, RJ 45 System, shielded, Krone, Cat. 6
Compact-HK-Serie, Modular, RJ 45 System, shielded, Krone, Cat. 5e
Snap-in Connector LANmark-6, Modular, RJ 45 System, shielded, Nexans no. 420.630, Cat. 6
Modular, Keystone RJ 45 System, unshielded, Panduit no. KJ88.., Cat. 3
Modular, Keystone RJ 45 System, unshielded, Panduit no. KJ588.., Cat. 5
Modular, RJ 12 System, unshielded, RADIALL no. 280MOD804, Cat. 4
Modular, RJ 45 System, unshielded, RADIALL no. 280MOD805, Cat. 4
Modular, RJ 45 System, unshielded, RADIALL no. 280MOD807, Cat. 5
Modular, RJ 12 System, unshielded, Tyco Electronics AMP no. 216000-1, Cat. 3
Modular, RJ 45 System, unshielded, Tyco Electronics AMP no. 216005-1, Cat. 3
Modular, Keystone RJ 45 System, shielded, SIEMON no. MX6-KS.., Cat. 6
for 2 module Unipatch TERA System, shielded, Dtwyler, Cat. 7
for Volition, VF-45 System, 3M
Assmann module DN-93612 Cat. 6A, shielded, Keystone
Assmann module DN-93614
54-2 WE
54-25 WE

blank plate (for individual drillings)


54

31
50 x 50 system
50 x 50 mm inserts are used to complete the various JUNG design ranges with all available
sockets in combination with an individual hinged lid or an intermediate frame. In addition, it is
possible to integrate standard centre plates of other manufacturers into JUNG design ranges.

Zwiti_50x50system_GB.indd 1 27.02.15 13:56


12-39_3870_GB_26_UP:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:11 Uhr Seite 33

50 x 50 mm system

Ref.-no.
50 x 50 system (screw fixing)
For ranges:
AS 500 / A 500 / A creation / A plus: with intermediate frame no.: A 590 Z..
CD 500 / CD plus: with intermediate frame no.: ..590 Z.. or hinged lid no.: CD 590 KL..
CD breakproof: with hinged lid .: CD 590 BFKL..
SL 500: with hinged lid no.: SL 590 KL..
LS 990 / LS plus: with intermediate frame no.: LS 961 Z.. or hinged lid no.: LS 990 KL..
Aluminium: with hinged lid no.: AL 2990 KL
Stainless Steel: with hinged lid no.: ES 2990 KL
Anthracite: with hinged lid no.: AL 2990 KL AN
Chrome: with hinged lid no.: GCR 2990 KL
Gold: with hinged lid no.: GO 2990 KL
Gold 24 carat: with hinged lid no.: LS 990 KL GGO

Centre plate with inscription field 6 x 37 mm


with supporting frame, screw fixing only
for modular jack sockets ref.-no.: 6 WE, UMA-CAT6A
for 1 socket
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
white 169-1 NWE WW
for 2 sockets
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
white 169-2 NWE WW
for modular jack sockets
RADIALL:
modular jack unshielded 6P6C, RJ 12, Cat. 4 (ref.-no. R280MOD804)
modular jack unshielded 8P8C, RJ 45, Cat. 4 (ref.-no. R280MOD805)
modular jack unshielded 8P8C, RJ 45, Cat. 5e (ref.-no. R280MOD807)
Panduit:
keystone jack KJ 88..
keystone jack KJ 588..
Assmann:
module DN-93612 Cat. 6A, shielded, Keystone
module DN-93614

Centre plate with inscription field 6 x 37 mm


with supporting frame, screw fixing only
for 1 socket
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory 169-15 NWE
white 169-15 NWE WW
for modular jack sockets
TE connectivity (Tyco electronics / AMP NETCONNECT)
for cable max. 10 mm:
EMT-jack, Cat. 5e, 180 ref.-no. 0-0188650-5
EMT-jack, Cat. 5e, 90 ref.-no. 0-0188650-6
for cable max. 6.5 mm:
EMT-jack, Cat. 5e, 180 ref.-no. 0-0338038-1
EMT-jack, Cat. 5e, 90 ref.-no. 0-0338038-2
Toolless Jack, Cat. 3 unshielded: ref.-no. 0-1116603-x
Toolless Jack, Cat. 5e unshielded: ref.-no. 0-1116604-x,
Toolless Jack, Cat. 5e shielded: ref.-no. 0-1339015-1
Toolless Jack, Cat. 6 unshielded: ref.-no. 0-1116605-x,
Toolless Jack, Cat. 6 shielded: ref.-no. 0-1339016-1
MTRJ-LWL jack: ref.-no. 1278414-1

33
12-39_3870_GB_26_UP:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:11 Uhr Seite 34

50 x 50 mm system

Ref.-no.
Centre plate with inscription field 6 x 37 mm
with supporting frame, screw fixing only
for modular jack: ref.-no.: 8 FWE
for modular jack AMP: 2168-11-1, semi-shielded, cat. 3
for 1 socket
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory 169-1 NFWE
white 169-1 NFWE WW

Centre plate with inscription field 6 x 37 mm


with supporting frame, screw fixing only
for modular jack: ref.-no.: 8 FWE
for modular jack AMP: 2168-11-1, semi-shielded, cat. 3
for 2 sockets
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory 169-2 NFWE
white 169-2 NFWE WW

Centre plate with inscription field 6 x 37 mm


with supporting frame, screw fixing only
for modular jack Radiall: R 280MOD813
for modular jack INFRA +: 7700 U, 7700 D, 7700 E
for 2 sockets
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory 169-2 NINF
white 169-2 NINF WW

Centre plate
for 1-gang modular jack sockets
IAE/UAE sockets ref.-no.: UAE 8 UPO
for sockets Cat. 5e ref.-no..: UAE 8 UPOK5
for sockets Cat. 6 ref.-no.: UAE 8 UPOK6E, UAE 8 UPOK6
(1 x 8-pol.)
for WLAN access point ref.-no.: WLAN-AC-UAE, WLAN-AC-POE-UAE
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
white 169-1 UAE WW
Suitable inserts:
Rutenbeck: UAE 8(4) UPO, UAE 8(8) UPO, UAE-Cat.5e-8 UPO OK, UAE-real.Cat.6-8 UPO OK
Telegrtner: AMJ 45, UMJ 45 and ISDN 1 x RJ 45 (TYP 8)

Centre plate
for 2-gang modular jack sockets
IAE/UAE sockets ref.-no..: UAE 2 x 8 UPO, UAE 8-8 UPO
for sockets Cat. 5e Art.-Nr.: UAE 8-8 UPOK5
for sockets Cat. 6 Art.-Nr.: UAE 8-8 UPOK6E, UAE 8-8 UPOK6
(2 x 8-pol.)
for media converter 2-gang ref.-no.: MK-POF-2UAE
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
white 169-2 UAE WW
Suitable inserts:
BTR: 1307441001-i or 1307441200-i; E-Dat design 8/8(8), Class E
Rutenbeck: UAE 8/8 (8/8) UPO, UAE 2x8 (8) UPO, UAE-Cat.5e-8/8 UPO OK, UAE-real.Cat.6-8/8 UPO OK
Telegrtner: AMJ 45, UMJ 45 and ISDN 2 x RJ 45 (TYP 8/8)

34
12-39_3870_GB_26_UP:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:11 Uhr Seite 35

50 x 50 mm system

IP Protection level IP 44 ensured


P Colour printing possible
L Laser labelling possible

Ref.-no.
Centre plate
with supporting frame, screw fixing only
for loudspeaker connection ref.-no.: PB 4
for chassis connector ref.-no.: CXLR-S, CXLR-D
for XLR chassis Neutrik D / DL / DLX Series
internal dimensions (W x H): 27.5 x 32.5 mm
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
white 168-1 WW

Centre plate
for TV-FM sockets ref.-no.: EDU 04 F, GEDU 10, GEDU 15
Duroplastic (scratch-proof) glossy
ivory P 161 TV

Socket Franco-American system


2-pole without earth, 10 A / 250 V 15 A / 125 V
for flat + round pins
screw fixing only, without claws
Screw terminals for wires up to 2.5 mm2
Duroplastic (scratch-proof) glossy
ivory P CD 110

Socket, 2-pole without earth 16 A 250 V ~


screw fixing only, without claws
Duroplastic (scratch-proof) glossy
ivory P CD 111
white P CD 111 WW
with child protection (shutter)
Duroplastic (scratch-proof) glossy
ivory P CD 111 KI

SCHUKO socket 16 A / 250 V ~


Screw terminals for wires up to 2.5 mm2
Duroplastic (scratch-proof) glossy
ivory CD 121
white CD 121 WW
brown CD 121 BR
grey CD 121 GR
green CD 121 GN
light grey CD 121 LG
orange CD 121 O
black CD 121 SW
for metal versions
Duroplastic lacquered
bronze-beige CD 121 BB
platinum-grey CD 121 PG

35
12-39_3870_GB_26_UP:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 18:02 Uhr Seite 36

50 x 50 mm system

IP Protection level IP 44 ensured


P Colour printing possible
L Laser labelling possible

Ref.-no.
SCHUKO socket 16 A / 250 V ~
Screwless terminals for wires up to 2.5 mm2
Duroplastic (scratch-proof) glossy
ivory CD 120
white CD 120 WW
brown CD 120 BR
grey CD 120 GR
light grey CD 120 LG
black CD 120 SW
Duroplastic lacquered
bronze-beige CD 120 BB
platinum-grey CD 120 PG
with child protection (shutter)
Duroplastic (scratch-proof) glossy
ivory CD 120 KI
white CD 120 KI WW

Socket French/Belgian system


2-pole + male earth pin 16 A / 250 V ~
with child protection (shutter)
Screw terminals for wires up to 2.5 mm2 acc. to NFC 61-314
ivory P 121 FKI
brown 121 FKI B
white P 121 FKI WW

Socket US NEMA system


2-pole + earth 15 A, 125 V ~, 5-15R
with supporting frame, screw fixing only
Screw terminals for wires up to 4 mm2 acc. to US-NEMA
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory 121-15

Socket US NEMA system


2-pole + earth 20 A, 125 V ~, 5-20R
with supporting frame, screw fixing only
Screw terminals for wires up to 4 mm2 acc. to US-NEMA
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory 121-20

Potential equalisation socket


with supporting frame, screw fixing only
with 2 one-pole built-in male sockets according to DIN 42 801
for wires up to 6 mm2
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory 165-2

Right angle plug


for potential equalisation socket
screw terminal for wires with 4 or 6 mm2
65 WIS

36
12-39_3870_GB_26_UP:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:11 Uhr Seite 37

50 x 50 mm system

Ref.-no.
Intermediate frame for AS and A ranges
to install devices with 50 x 50 mm cover (DIN 49 075)
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory A 590 Z
white A 590 Z WW
black A 590 Z SW
Thermoplastic (breakproof) lacquered
aluminium A 590 Z AL

Intermediate frame CD range


to install devices with 50 x 50 mm cover (DIN 49 075)
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory 590 Z
white CD 590 Z WW

Hinged lid CD range


for sockets and devices with 50 x 50 mm cover
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory L CD 590 KL
white L CD 590 KL WW
brown CD 590 KL BR
grey L CD 590 KL GR
green CD 590 KL GN
light grey L CD 590 KL LG
orange CD 590 KL O
black L CD 590 KL SW
metal versions (anodized aluminium)
gold-bronze L CD 590 KL GB
platinum L CD 590 KL PT

Convex hinged lid CD range


with inscription field 23 x 59 mm
with safety lock
for sockets and devices with 50 x 50 mm cover
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
white CD 554 SLKL WW

Key
1 piece 802 SL
when ordering please indicate lock number

Transparent cover with paper inlay


for inscription field 23 x 59 mm
(Spare part)
paper inlay white CD 54 NA

37
12-39_3870_GB_26_UP:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:11 Uhr Seite 38

50 x 50 mm system

IP Protection level IP 44 ensured


P Colour printing possible
L Laser labelling possible

Ref.-no.
Hinged lid CD range, with spring
for sockets and devices with 50 x 50 mm cover
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory IP L CD 590 BFKL
white IP L CD 590 BFKL WW
brown IP CD 590 BFKL BR
grey IP L CD 590 BFKL GR
green IP CD 590 BFKL GN
light grey IP L CD 590 BFKL LG
orange IP CD 590 BFKL O
red IP CD 590 BFKL RT

with inscription field 7 x 57 mm


Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory IP L CD 590 BFNAKL
white IP L CD 590 BFNAKL WW
brown IP CD 590 BFNAKL BR
grey IP L CD 590 BFNAKL GR
light grey IP L CD 590 BFNAKL LG
red IP CD 590 BFNAKL RT

Transparent cover with paper inlay


for inscription field 7 x 57 mm (Spare part)
paper inlay white LS 20 NA

Hinged lid CD range, with spring


with safety lock (24 different locks)
for sockets and devices with 50 x 50 mm cover
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory IP L CD 590 BFSLKL
white IP L CD 590 BFSLKL WW
brown IP CD 590 BFSLKL BR
grey IP L CD 590 BFSLKL GR
light grey IP L CD 590 BFSLKL LG
red IP CD 590 BFSLKL RT

with inscription field 6 x 37 mm


Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory IP L CD 590 BFSLNAKL
white IP L CD 590 BFSLNAKL WW
brown IP CD 590 BFSLNAKL BR
grey IP L CD 590 BFSLNAKL GR
light grey IP L CD 590 BFSLNAKL LG
red IP CD 590 BFSLNAKL RT

Key (Spare part)


for all hinged lids with safety lock
1 piece 802 SL
when ordering please indicate lock number

Transparent cover with paper inlay


for inscription field 6 x 37 mm (Spare part)
paper inlay white CD 20 NA

38
12-39_3870_GB_26_UP:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:12 Uhr Seite 39

50 x 50 mm system

Ref.-no.
Hinged lid SL range
for sockets and devices with 50 x 50 mm cover
white SL 590 KL WW
gold-bronze SL 590 KL GB
black SL 590 KL SW

Intermediate frame LS range


to install devices with 50 x 50 mm cover (DIN 49 075)
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory LS 961 Z
white LS 961 Z WW
light grey LS 961 Z LG
black LS 961 Z SW

Hinged lid LS range, with spring


for sockets and devices with 50 x 50 mm cover
Duroplastic (scratch-proof) glossy
ivory IP P LS 990 KL
white IP P LS 990 KL WW
light grey IP P LS 990 KL LG
black IP LS 990 KL SW
metal versions
aluminium IP P L AL 2990 KL
stainless steel IP L ES 2990 KL
anthracite (aluminium lacquered) IP L AL 2990 KL AN
dark (aluminium lacquered) IP L AL 2990 KL D
chrome GCR 2990 KL
gold-coloured GO 2990 KL
gold-plated LS 990 KL GGO
classic brass P ME 2990 KL C
antique brass ME 2990 KL AT

Hinged lid LS range, with spring


with inscription field 12 x 55 mm
for sockets and devices with 50 x 50 mm cover
aluminium IP P L AL 2990 NAKL
stainless steel IP L ES 2990 NAKL
anthracite (aluminium lacquered) IP L AL 2990 NAKL AN
chrome GCR 2990 NAKL
classic brass P ME 2990 NAKL C
antique brass ME 2990 NAKL AT

Transparent cover
for inscription field 12 x 55 mm
(Spare part)
M 20 NA

39
Rotary dimmer
Rotary dimmer from JUNG are available for
all kind of illumination as incandescent lamps,
low or high voltage halogen lamps. The light
will be switched on by pressing the knob.
The dimming from a satellite station is also JUNG dimmers are also available in different housings for
possible. ceiling installation or for distribution boards.

Tronic Trafonsformer
For the connection of low voltage
halogen lamps
Different versions from 40 to 200 W
available
With integrated overload- and short
circuit protection
Suitable with all JUNG Universal or TRONIC transformer for the professional low voltage lighting
TRONIC dimmer installation with short circuit, overload and thermal protection.

Amplifier
The amplifier units from JUNG are used
for extending the power rating of various
types of dimmers to control loads as:
230 V incandescent lamps
230 V halogen lamps
LV halogen lamps in combination with Tronic
transformers
LV halogen lamps in combination with
conventional transformers

Depending on the required power rating, several JUNG power amplifier in different housings enable the
amplifier can be connected to one dimmer. dimming of large loads.

Zwiti_Electronic_GB.indd 2 27.02.15 13:59


Electronics

Electronic
In the following chapter you find various devices to control the lighting. Dimmers in different hou-
sings, e.g. for ceiling installation or for the distribution board are available. Required transformers
for low voltage illumination are listed. Select the suitable power amplifier for the dimming of the
illumination with high capacities.

NEW: The innovative lighting and control technology LEDOTRON is the new universal standard for
standard-compliant dimming of LED and energy-saving lamps. for more info please visit our web-
site www.jung.de/en.

Zwiti_Electronic_GB.indd 3 27.02.15 13:59


40-103_3870_GB_26_Electronic:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:15 Uhr Seite 42

Electronics Rotary dimmer


Depending on the type of installation, the maximum connected load has to be reduced by:
10 % for every 5 C exceededing 25 C ambient temperature
15 % for installation in wood, plaster or hollow walls
20 % for installation in multiple combinations.

Ref.-no.
Rotary dimmer insert 60 400 W
with 2-way push switch
244 EX
Product characteristics
Dimming method: leading edge phase control
Short-circuit protection through fine-wire fuse
Satellite switching possible in combination with 2-way switch
Operation on 60 Hz mains possible
Suitable amplifiers: 246 EB (max. 10)
When using 246 EB, charge dimmer with minimum capacity!
Technical data
Rated voltage: AC 230/240 V ~, 50/60 Hz
Connected load: 60 ... 400 W (flush-mounted)
60 ... 360 W (surface-mounted)
Dimming method: leading edge phase control
Type of loads: 230 V incandescent lamps
230 V halogen lamps
Connection: screw terminals
Approvals: VDE

Rotary dimmer insert 60 600 W


with 2-way push switch
266 GDE
Product characteristics
Dimming method: leading edge phase control
Short-circuit protection through fine-wire fuse
Electronic overtemperature protection
Satellite switching possible in combination with 2-way switch
Suitable amplifiers: 246 EB (max. 10)
When using 246 EB, charge dimmer with minimum capacity.
Technical data
Rated voltage: AC 230 V ~, 50 Hz
Connected load: 60 ... 600 W (flush-mounted)
60 ... 550 W (surface-mounted)
Dimming method: leading edge phase control
Type of loads: 230 V incandescent lamps
230 V halogen lamps
Mixed loads of the specified types
Fuse, type: T 2.5 A H 250 V
Connection: screwless connection
Terminals for: 2.5 mm2
Approvals: VDE

42
40-103_3870_GB_26_Electronic:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:15 Uhr Seite 43

Rotary dimmer Electronics

Ref.-no.
Rotary dimmer insert 100 1000 W
with 2-way push switch
50 Hz version 211 GDE
60 Hz version 211-60 GDE
Technical data
Rated voltage: AC 230/240 V ~
Connected load: 100 ... 1000 W
Dimming method: trailing edge phase control
Type of loads: 230/240 V incandescent lamps
230/240 V halogen lamps
Mixed loads of the specified types
Connection: screw terminals
Terminals for: 2 x 2.5 mm2 or 1 x 4 mm2
Approvals: VDE

Rotary dimmer insert 110 V / 60 400 W


with 2-way push switch
244-110
Technical data
Rated voltage: AC 110/127 V ~, 50/60 Hz
Connected load: 60 ... 400 W
Dimming method: leading edge phase control
Type of loads: 110/127 V incandescent lamps
Connection: screw terminals

Short-circuit proof (fuse)

TRONIC rotary dimmer insert 20 360 W


with 2-way push switch
243 EX
Product characteristics
Dimming method: trailing edge phase control
Electronic short-circuit protection with permanent switch-off after 7 seconds at the latest
Electronic overtemperature protection
Satellite switching possible in combination with 2-way switch
Suitable amplifiers: ULZ 1215 REG and 247 EB (max. 10)
When using 247 EB, charge dimmer with minimum capacity.
Technical data
Rated voltage: AC 230/240 V ~, 50 Hz
Connected load: 20 ... 360 W (flush-mounted)
20 ... 320 W (surface-mounted)
Dimming method: trailing edge phase control
Type of loads: 230 V incandescent lamps
230 V halogen lamps
TRONIC transformers
Mixed loads of the specified types
Connection: screw terminals
Approvals: VDE

43
40-103_3870_GB_26_Electronic:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:15 Uhr Seite 44

Electronics Rotary dimmer


Depending on the type of installation, the maximum connected load has to be reduced by:
10 % for every 5 C exceededing 25 C ambient temperature
15 % for installation in wood, plaster or hollow walls
20 % for installation in multiple combinations.

Ref.-no.
TRONIC rotary dimmer 20 525 W
with 2-way push switch
225 TDE
Product characteristics
Dimming method: trailing edge phase control
Electronic short-circuit protection with permanent switch-off after 7 seconds at the latest
Electronic overtemperature protection
Satellite switching possible in combination with 2-way switch
Control output A to output the switching status of the device to control automatic power
disconnection or relay
Suitable amplifiers: ULZ 1215 REG and 247 EB (max 10)
When using 247 EB, charge dimmer with minimum capacity.
Technical data
Rated voltage: AC 230 V ~, 50 Hz
Connected load: 20 ... 525 W (flush-mounted)
20 ... 500 W (surface-mounted)
Dimming method: trailing edge phase control
Type of loads: 230 V incandescent lamps
230 V halogen lamps
TRONIC transformers
Mixed loads of the specified types
Connection: screwless connection
Terminals for: 2.5 mm2
Approvals: VDE

Rotary dimmer insert 20 500 W/VA


with 2-way push switch
244 HEX
with potentiometer to adjust the minimum brightness
Product characteristics
Dimming method: leading edge phase control
Short-circuit protection through fine-wire fuse
Electronic overtemperature protection
Satellite switching possible in combination with 2-way switch
Operation on 60 Hz mains possible
Suitable amplifiers: ULZ 1215 REG and 246 EB (max. 10)
When using 246 EB, charge dimmer with minimum capacity!
Technical data
Rated voltage: AC 230/240 V ~, 50/60 Hz
Connected load: max. 500 W/VA (flush-mounted)
max. 450 W/VA (surface-mounted)
Dimming method: leading edge phase control
Lamp loads
Incandescent lamps: 20 ... 500 W
HV halogen lamps: 20 ... 500 W
inductive transformers: 20 ... 500 VA
Dimmable HV LED lamps: typical 3 ... 100 W
Dimmable compact fluorescent lamps: typical 3 ... 100 W
Fuse, type: T 3.15 A H 250 V
Connection: screw terminals
Approvals: VDE

44
40-103_3870_GB_26_Electronic:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:15 Uhr Seite 45

Rotary dimmer Electronics

Ref.-no.
Rotary dimmer insert 20 500 W/VA
with 2-way push switch
225 NVDE
with potentiometer to adjust the minimum brightness
Product characteristics
Dimming method: leading edge phase control
Short-circuit protection through fine-wire fuse
Electronic overtemperature protection
Satellite switching possible in combination with 2-way switch
Terminal A to output the switching status of the device to control automatic power
disconnection or relay
Suitable amplifiers: 246 EB (max. 10)
When using 246 EB, charge dimmer with minimum capacity!
Amplifiers cannot be used in combination with HV LED lamps and compact fluorescent lamps
Technical data
Rated voltage: AC 230 V ~, 50 Hz
Connected load: max. 500 W/VA (flush-mounted)
max. 450 W/VA (surface-mounted)
Dimming method: leading edge phase control
Lamp loads
Incandescent lamps: 20 ... 500 W
HV halogen lamps: 20 ... 500 W
inductive transformers: 20 ... 500 VA
Dimmable HV LED lamps: typical 3 ... 100 W
Dimmable compact fluorescent lamps: typical 3 ... 100 W
Fuse, type: T 3.15 A H 250 V
Connection: screwless connection
Terminals for: 2.5 mm2
Approvals: VDE

Transformers must be charged with at least 85 % of rated power with lamps.


The total load of consumers, including power loss of transformer, must not exceed
the maximum load.

45
40-103_3870_GB_26_Electronic:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:15 Uhr Seite 46

Electronics Rotary dimmer

Ref.-no.
Universal rotary dimmer insert 50 420 W/VA
incremental control without end position
254 UDIE1
Product characteristics
Connection of multiple dimmer satellites is possible
Electronic short-circuit protection with permanent switch-off after 7 seconds at the latest
Electronic overtemperature protection
Lamp-saving soft start
Power extension through amplifiers
Automatic setting of the dimming principle suitable for the load
With push switch
Technical data
Rated voltage: AC 230 V ~, 50/60 Hz
Ambient temperature: +5 ... +25 C
Connected load at 25 C
Power specifications including transformer power dissipation.
Operate inductive transformers with at least 85 % nominal load.
For ohmic-inductive mixed load, maximum 50 % proportion of ohmic load.
Otherwise incorrect calibration of the dimmer may result.
Incandescent lamps: 50 ... 420 W
HV halogen lamps: 50 ... 420 W
TRONIC transformers: 50 ... 420 W
inductive transformers: 50 ... 420 VA
ohmic-inductive: 50 ... 420 VA
ohmic-capacitive: 50 ... 420 W
capacitive-inductive: not permitted
Reduction of load
for every 5 C exceededing 25 C: 10 %
for installation into wooden
or hollow walls: 15 %
for installation into multiple combinations: 20 %
Amplifiers: see power booster instructions
Connection
single wire: 1 ... 2.5 mm2
Number of satellite units: 5
Total length of extension unit cable: max. 100 m
Total length power cable: max. 100 m

46
40-103_3870_GB_26_Electronic:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:15 Uhr Seite 47

Rotary dimmer / Potentiometer Electronics

Ref.-no.
Satellite rotary dimmer insert
incremental control without end position
for dimmer ref.-no.: 254 UDIE1
254 NIE1
Product characteristics
Connection of multiple dimmer satellites is possible
Electronic short-circuit protection with permanent switch-off after 7 seconds at the latest
Electronic overtemperature protection
Lamp-saving soft start
Power extension through amplifiers
Automatic setting of the dimming principle suitable for the load
With push switch
Technical data
Rated voltage: AC 230 V ~, 50/60 Hz
Ambient temperature: +5 ... +25 C
Connection
single wire: 1 ... 2.5 mm2
Total length of extension unit cable: max. 100 m

Electronic potentiometer, 1 10 V
for dimming of fluorescent lamps controlled by electronic ballasts or
TRONIC transformers with control voltage 1 10 V
with switch function 240-10
switching capacity of mains switch:
AC 230 V ~ 50/60 Hz, max. 6 A for resistive loads
Approvals: VDE
Technical data
Control voltage: 0.7 ... 12 V
Control current: max. 50 mA
Fuse, type: F 0.5 A H 250 V
Connection: screw terminals
Terminals for: 2 x 2.5 mm2 or 1 x 4 mm2
Control cable: Type, cross-section and laying for 250 V lines
(control voltage with basic insulation).
Control and load wires may share a common cable,
e.g. NYM J 5 x 1.5 mm2 .
Approvals: VDE

Electronic potentiometer, 1 10 V
for dimming of fluorescent lamps controlled by electronic ballasts or
TRONIC transformers with control voltage 1 10 V
with push-button function 240-31
switching capacity of mains push-button:
AC 230 V ~ 50/60 Hz, max. 2 A for resistive loads
Technical data
Control voltage: 0.7 ... 12 V
Control current: max. 50 mA
Fuse, type: F 0.5 A H 250 V
Connection: screw terminals
Terminals for: 2 x 2.5 mm2 or 1 x 4 mm2
Control cable: Type, cross-section and laying for 250 V lines
(control voltage with basic insulation).
Control and load wires may share a common cable,
e.g. NYM J 5 x 1.5 mm2 .
Approvals: VDE

47
40-103_3870_GB_26_Electronic:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:15 Uhr Seite 48

Electronics DALI

Ref.-no.
DALI potentiometer insert
240 DPE
Product characteristics
Up to 64 DALI subscribers can be controlled
Parallel control of multiple control sections
Protection against connection to mains voltage by means of integrated fine-wire fuse
Basic brightness adjustable
To generate the DALI voltage, a power supply is required that complies
with the DALI specifications according to IEC 60929, e.g. from Helvar or Philips.
Technical data
Current consumption: max. 2 mA
Fuse, type: F 0.5 A H 250 V
Connection: screw terminals
Terminals for: 2 x 2.5 mm2 or 1 x 4 mm2
Approvals: VDE

Power DALI potentiometer insert


240 PDPE
Intended use
The potentiometer permits manual controlling of luminaries with DALI interface.
Product characteristics
If connected to the mains supply ("active operation") the potentiometer supplies
the required control current for 26 DALI devices.
Without connection to the mains supply ("passive operation") the potentiometer
draws its supply from the DALI voltage and serves as an additional control unit.
All control units have the same functionality.
Parallel connection of 4 "active" DALI potentiometers offers the possibility of controlling
up to 104 DALI devices.
Possibility of storing a basic brightness and a fixed power-on brightness.
Technical data
Rated voltage: AC 230 V ~, 50/60 Hz
DALI system voltage: DC 16 V
Max. output current: 52 mA
Power consumption: max. 2 W
Max. number of DALI devices
with 1 DALI potentiometer: 26
with 4 DALI potentiometers in parallel: 104
Max. number of DALI potentiometers
in parallel: 4
Connection: screw terminals
Terminals for: 2 x 2.5 mm2 or 1 x 4 mm2
Approvals: VDE

48
40-103_3870_GB_26_Electronic:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:15 Uhr Seite 49

DALI / Speed regulator Electronics

Ref.-no.
DALI transformer for LV halogen lamps
D SNT 105
Intended use
Power supply for LV halogen lamps
Switching and brightness adjustment is performed with DALI control units or push-buttons
Installation in false ceilings or surface mounting
Product characteristics
No-load proof
Electronic short-circuit protection
Electronic overload protection
Electronic overtemperature protection
Suitable for emergency current installation
Technical data
Rated capacity: 35 ... 105 W
Rated voltage: AC 230/240 V ~, 50/60 Hz
Output voltage: 11.5 V eff. ~ 40 kHz
Short-circuit protection: electronic protection without fuse
Output cable length: max. 2 m
Dimensions: 170 x 44 x 34 mm
Ambient temperature: max. 50 C
Terminals: screw terminals
primary 0.5 ... 1.5 mm2
secondary 0.75 ... 2.5 mm2
Approvals: VDE

Speed regulator insert (rotary on/off)


with slat adjusting
245.20
Product characteristics
Short-circuit protection through fine-wire fuse
Electronic overtemperature protection
Switching output e.g. for ohmic loads or for activating ventilation openings. The maximum
load capacity of the switching output depends on the motor current. By reducing the motor
current it is possible to switch slats or ohmic loads with higher current consumption.
Measuring points make it possible to check the connected voltages without dismantling
the speed controller.
Technical data
Rated voltage: AC 230/240 V ~, 50/60 Hz
Connected load: 0.1 ... 2.7 A (flush-mounted)
0.1 ... 2.5 A (surface-mounted)
Fuse, type: T 3.15 A H 250 V
Connection: screwless connection
Terminals for: 2 x 1 ... 2.5 mm2

49
40-103_3870_GB_26_Electronic:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:15 Uhr Seite 50

Electronics Transformer

Ref.-no.
TRONIC dimmer, built-in
e.g. for false ceilings
247.07 EB
Technical data
Rated voltage: AC 230 V ~, 50 Hz
Connected load: 50 ... 700 W
Dimming method: trailing edge phase control
Type of loads: 230 V incandescent lamps
230 V halogen lamps
TRONIC transformers
Mixed loads of the specified types
Ambient temperature: max. 45 C
Housing temperature: max. 70 C
Dimensions: 212 x 48.5 x 46 mm
Connection: screw terminals
single wire: max. 4 mm2
stranded with ferrule: max. 1.5 mm2
stranded without ferrule: max. 2.5 mm2

TRONIC amplifier, built-in


for the extension of Tronic dimmers and Universal dimmers with ohmic or capacitive load
e.g. for false ceilings
247 EB
mains + neutral conductor required
Technical data
Rated voltage: AC 230 V ~, 50 Hz
Connected load: 60 ... 700 W
Dimming method: trailing edge phase control
Type of loads: 230 V incandescent lamps
230 V halogen lamps
TRONIC transformers
Mixed loads of the specified types
Ambient temperature: max. 45 C
Housing temperature: max. 70 C
Dimensions: 212 x 48.5 x 46 mm
Connection: screw terminals
single wire: max. 4 mm2
stranded with ferrule: max. 1.5 mm2
stranded without ferrule: max. 2.5 mm2

50
40-103_3870_GB_26_Electronic:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:15 Uhr Seite 51

Push-button controller / Amplifier Electronics

Ref.-no.
Amplifier for conventional dimmers, built-in
for the extension of LV dimmers and Universal dimmers with inductive load
e.g. for false ceilings
246 EB
mains + neutral conductor required
Technical data
Rated voltage: AC 230 V ~, 50 Hz
Connected load: 100 ... 600 W/VA
Dimming method: leading edge phase control
Type of loads: 230 V incandescent lamps
230 V halogen lamps
inductive transformers
Mixed loads of the specified types
Ambient temperature: max. 45 C
Housing temperature: max. 70 C
Dimensions: 212 x 48.5 x 46 mm
Connection: screw terminals
single wire: max. 4 mm2
stranded with ferrule: max. 1.5 mm2
stranded without ferrule: max. 2.5 mm2
Operate inductive transformers with at least 85 % nominal load.

Push-button controller, built-in


for dimming of fluorescent lamps controlled by electronic ballasts or
TRONIC transformers with control voltage 1 10 V
240-10 EB
operation by push-buttons (make contact), e.g. ref.-no. 531 U
Technical data
Rated voltage: AC 230 V ~, 50 Hz
Switch contact: relay, mains potential
Switching capacity:
ohmic load 2300 W
Electronic ballast, transformer depending on type
Control current of electronic ballast: max. 200 mA
Short-circuit protection: line circuit breaker, max. 10 A
Electrical isolation: 2 kV basic insulation
Ambient temperature: max. 50 C
No-load protection: yes
Connection: screw terminals
single wire: max. 4 mm2
stranded without ferrule: max. 2.5 mm2
stranded with ferrule: max. 1.5 mm2
Dimensions: 175 x 42 x 18 mm
Approvals: VDE

51
40-103_3870_GB_26_Electronic:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:15 Uhr Seite 52

Electronics Dimmer

Ref.-no.
In-line dimmer (without cable)
with slide potentiometer
white 245 Z WW
black 245 Z
gold-coloured 245 Z GO
Technical data
Rated voltage: AC 230 V ~, 50 Hz
Connected load: 20 ... 500 W/VA
Dimming method: leading edge phase control
Type of loads: 230 V incandescent lamps
230 V halogen lamps
inductive transformers
Mixed loads of the specified types
Dimensions: 126 x 60 x 35 mm
Operate inductive transformers with at least 85 % nominal load.
Approvals: VDE

Dimmable TRONIC transformer


Output voltage 11.7 V eff., 20 ... 105 W
dimensions: 150 x 70 x 36 mm
with slide potentiometer
black ST 105-20 SW
Short circuit protected, no fuse required
Approvals: VDE

52
40-103_3870_GB_26_Electronic:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:15 Uhr Seite 53

Dimmer Electronics

Ref.-no.
Universal dimmer
Rail mounting device, 2 rail units
50 ... 500 W/VA
1-channel UD 1255 REG
Product characteristics
Electronic short-circuit protection with permanent switch-off after 7 seconds at the latest
Electronic overtemperature protection
Connection of more than one satellite is possible
Connection for central satellites
Switch-on via lamp-saving soft start
Suitable amplifiers: ULZ 1215 REG, 247 EB or 246 EB (max. 10)
When using 247 EB or 246 EB, charge dimmer with minimum capacity.
Automatic setting of the dimming principle suitable for the load
Technical data
Rated voltage: AC 230 V ~, 50/60 Hz
Connected load: 50 ... 500 W/VA
Type of loads: 230 V incandescent lamps (resistive load,
trailing edge phase control)
230 V halogen lamps (resistive load, trailing edge phase control)
TRONIC transformers (capacitive load, trailing edge phase control)
inductive transformers (inductive load, leading edge phase control)
Mix of the specified load types (do not mix capacitive loads with inductive loads).
When using mixed loads with inductive transformers, the ohmic load must not exceed 50 %.
Rated power loss: 5W
Ambient temperature: +45 C
Connection: screw terminals
single wire: 1.5 ... 4 mm2
stranded with ferrule: 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2
stranded without ferrule: 0.75 ... 4 mm2
Approvals: VDE

Operation with standard centre plate ..1561.07.. and satellite insert 1220 NE
number of satellite units: unlimited
total length of satellite cables: max. 100 m

Mechanical push-button (make contact, not illuminated) as local satellite unit:


brief press: On / Off
long press: brightness variation
number of satellite units: unlimited
total cable length: max. 100 m

Note:
Illuminated mechanical push-buttons must be equipped with a separate N-terminal.
Storing the switch-on brightness is NOT possible with mechanical push-buttons.

53
40-103_3870_GB_26_Electronic:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:15 Uhr Seite 54

Electronics Amplifier

Ref.-no.
Universal amplifier
(cascadable)
Rail mounting device, 2 rail units
200 ... 500 W/VA
ULZ 1215 REG
Technical data
Rated voltage: AC 230 V ~, 50/60 Hz
Connected load: 200 ... 500 W/VA
Type of loads: 230 V incandescent lamps (resistive load,
trailing edge phase control)
230 V halogen lamps (resistive load, trailing edge phase control)
TRONIC transformers (capacitive load, trailing edge phase control)
inductive transformers (inductive load, leading edge phase control)
Mix of the specified load types (do not mix capacitive loads with inductive loads).
When using mixed loads with inductive transformers, the ohmic load must not exceed 50 %.
Connection: screw terminals
single wire: max. 4 mm2
stranded with ferrule: 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2
stranded without ferrule: 0.75 ... 4 mm2
Rated power loss: 5W
Ambient temperature (Ta): +45 C
Approvals: VDE

Lighting systems with a power consumption of more than 3500 W/VA must be supplied
by two separate circuits, however from the same phase conductor.
The circuit breakers of these circuits must be ganged in order to ensure safe disconnection
of the lighting system from the mains.

Suitable dimmer R,C R,L


resistive/capacitive loads inductive loads
max. amount of ampl. ampl. capacity max. amount of ampl. ampl. capacity
Ref.-no. UD 1255 REG 10 500 W 5 420 VA
Ref.-no. FUD 1253 EB 10 500 W 5 300 VA
Ref.-no. FM UD 20250 UP 5 350 W
4 400 W
Ref.-no. FM UD 5500 REG 5 450 W
Ref.-no. FM UD 420250 REG 10 500 W 5 250 VA
Ref.-no. 3901 REGHE 10 500 W 5 420 VA
Ref.-no. 3902 REGHE 10 500 W 5 250 VA
Ref.-no. 3904 REGHE 10 500 W 5 250 VA
Ref.-no. 1252 UDE a1 10 500 W
a2 10 500 W
Ref.-no. 1254 UDE 10 500 W 5 420 VA
Ref.-no. 254 UDIE1 10 500 W 5 420 VA
Ref.-no. 225 TDE 10 500 W
Ref.-no. 247.07 EB 10 400 W
Ref.-no. UDS 4 REGHE 3 400 W
54
40-103_3870_GB_26_Electronic:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:15 Uhr Seite 55

Transformer Electronics

Ref.-no.
TRONIC transformer
SNT 40
Technical data
Rated capacity: 10 ... 40 W
Rated voltage: AC 230 V ~, 50/60 Hz
Output voltage: 11.7 V eff. ~ 50 kHz
Short-circuit protection: electronic protection without fuse
Output cable length: max. 2 m
Dimensions: 73 x 35.5 x 18 mm
Ambient temperature: max. 50 C
Housing temperature: max. 85 C
Length of connected cables: approx. 210 mm
Approvals: VDE

TRONIC transformer
SNT 70 Q
Technical data
Rated capacity: 20 ... 60 W T = 50 C / 20 ... 70 W T = 40 C
Rated voltage: AC 230 V ~, 50/60 Hz
Output voltage: 11.7 V eff. ~ 40 kHz
Short-circuit protection: electronic protection without fuse
Output cable length: max. 2 m
Dimensions: 49 x 48 x 28 mm
Ambient temperature: max. 50 C (60 W)
Housing temperature: max. 75 C
Length of connected cables: approx. 210 mm
Approvals: VDE

55
40-103_3870_GB_26_Electronic:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:15 Uhr Seite 56

Electronics Transformer

Ref.-no.
TRONIC transformer
SNT 105 F
Technical data
Rated capacity: 20 ... 105 W
Rated voltage: AC 230 V ~, 50/60 Hz
Output voltage: 11.8 V eff. ~ 40 kHz
Short-circuit protection: electronic protection without fuse
Output cable length: max. 2 m
Dimensions: 175 x 42 x 18 mm
Ambient temperature: max. 50 C
Housing temperature: max. 80 C
Terminals:
primary screw terminals (2 pairs)
secondary screw terminals (3 pairs)
Approvals: VDE

TRONIC transformer
SNT 105-35
Technical data
Rated capacity: 35 ... 105 W
Rated voltage: AC 230 V ~, 50 Hz
Output voltage: 11.7 V eff. ~ 40 kHz
Short-circuit protection: electronic protection without fuse
Output cable length: max. 2 m
Dimensions: 172.5 x 42 x 18 mm
Ambient temperature: max. 50 C
Housing temperature: max. 75 C
Terminals:
primary screw terminals (2 pairs)
secondary cable length approx. 210 mm
Approvals: VDE

56
40-103_3870_GB_26_Electronic:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:15 Uhr Seite 57

Transformer Electronics

Ref.-no.
TRONIC transformer
SNT 150
Technical data
Rated capacity: 20 ... 150 W
Rated voltage: AC 230 V ~, 50/60 Hz
Output voltage: 11.7 V eff. ~ 40 kHz
Short-circuit protection: electronic protection without fuse
Output cable length: max. 1 m
Dimensions: 176 x 42 x 38 mm
Ambient temperature: max. 50 C
Housing temperature: max. 75 C
Terminals:
primary screw terminals (2 pairs)
secondary screw terminals (3 pairs)
Approvals: VDE

TRONIC transformer
SNT 200
Technical data
Rated capacity: 50 ... 210 W
Rated voltage: AC 230 V ~, 50 Hz
Output voltage: 11.5 V eff. ~ 40 kHz
Short-circuit protection: electronic protection without fuse
Output cable length: max. 2 m
Dimensions: 212 x 48.5 x 46 mm
Ambient temperature: max. 45 C
Housing temperature: max. 65 C
Terminals:
primary screw terminals (2 pairs)
secondary screw terminals (2 pairs)
Approvals: VDE

Distribution terminal
for all transformers 25
5-gang
Capacity:
primary 17 A = 200 W at 12 V
secondary each terminal 100 W at 12 V

57
JUNG Bus - Simple installation,
convenient operation

Parallel connection of Relay & Dimming Station

Hotel card switch


M M

AC 230 V~ AC 230 V~

Sensor Module for the


sensitive control of room
functions

Sensor Module for the


sensitive control of room
functions

2-wire Push-button
Module for switching
and dimming the lighting

Push-button Module
with extension unit

Zwiti_JUNG_BUS_2015_GB.indd 4 27.02.15 14:00


JUNG Bus
Connection of 4 control units Wiring example of two Universal Dimming Stations with two
sensor modules, a push-button module and a push-button

to the Universal Relay Station module with extension unit. Simply connected via two wires.

M M

AC 230 V~

Sensor Module for


the sensitive control
of room functions

Sensor Module for


the sensitive control
of room functions

2-wire Push-button
Module for switching

Push-button Module
with extension unit

Zwiti_JUNG_BUS_2015_GB.indd 5 27.02.15 14:00


40-103_3870_GB_26_Electronic:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:15 Uhr Seite 60

JUNG Bus Relay Station

Ref.-no.
Relay station universal, 8-gang
Rail mounting device, 8 rail units
with manual electronic operation and LED status indication
8 make contacts
RS 8 REGHE
Intended use
Switching of lighting
Switching of single-phase fan motors
Switching of electrically-driven blinds, shutters, awnings and similar hangings
Mounting on DIN rail in distribution boxes
Operation by means of push-button sensors, sensor modules or unlit installation buttons
Product characteristics
Local control. The relay station can be controlled using the keypad when the control units
are not connected.
Activation of status LEDs on the control units. The relay station has the activation
outputs A1...A8 for this purpose.
Switch operation
Push-button operation
Blind operation with slat adjustment
Mixed operation of switching, push-button and blind control is possible.
Central switching function All On, All Off
Parallel switching of two relay stations possible
Technical data
Rated voltage: AC 230/240 V ~, 50/60 Hz
Power loss: 12.5 W
Stand-by power: 0.5 W
Length of control cable: max. 100 m
Number of control units
Sensor module (ref.-no. SM 1608): max. 4 (also when relay/dimming stations
are connected in parallel)
Push-button sensors
24 V AC/DC (make): depending on push-button sensor,
consider current consumption
Push-button module
(ref.-no. 4008 TSM): max. 4 (also when relay/dimming stations
are connected in parallel)
Control units
Voltage: DC 24 V SELV
Current carrying capacity: 80 mA
Switching inputs E1 ... E8
Resistance Ri: 200 k
Control voltage: DC 24 V SELV
Activation outputs A1' ... A8'
Resistance Ra: 330
Control voltage: DC 24 V SELV
Current carrying capacity: 10 mA
Connection, mains and load outputs screw terminals
single wire: 1.5 ... 4 mm2
stranded without ferrule: 0.75 ... 4 mm2
stranded with ferrule: 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2
Connection of switching inputs,
activation outputs and control units: screw terminals
single wire: 1.5 mm2
stranded without ferrule: 1 mm2
stranded with ferrule: 0.75 mm2

60
40-103_3870_GB_26_Electronic:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:15 Uhr Seite 61

Relay Station JUNG Bus

Load outputs A1 ... A8


Contact type: floating make contact ( contact)
Breaking capacity per load output: AC 250 V ~ / 16 AX
Switching current, load outputs: 80 A
Switching current L1
neighbouring load outputs: 20 A L2
L3
Loads per output N
ohmic load: 3000 W
capacitive load: 16 A / max. 140 F M M
blind / fan motors: 1380 VA
Switch-on current: max. 800 A (200 s)
max. 165 A (20 ms)
Lamp loads
Incandescent lamps: 3000 W A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8
HV halogen lamps: 2500 W MODE A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8

LV halogen lamps with: ON/ OFF/

TRONIC transformer: 1500 W


inductive transformer: 1200 W 24 V SELV
Fluorescent lamps:
non-compensated: 1000 W
parallel compensated: 1160 W / 140 F
lead-lag circuit: 2300 W / 140 F
Electronic ballast: depending on type
Minimum load: AC 12 V, 100 mA
Ambient temperature: 5 ... +45 C
Storing temperature: 25 ... +70 C
Mounting width: 144 mm (8 rail units)
Change-over time for direction change: 1 sec
Switch-on time, blinds operation: 2 min

1) 2)

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8
MODE

ON/n OFF/o

24 V SELV

LN

24 V SELV
A4'
A5'
A6'
A1'
A2'
A3'

A7'
A8'
E4
E5
E6
E1
E2
E3

E7
E8

- + - +

Wiring:
1) 2-wire JUNG bus: Connection to the +/ terminals
with Sensor Module or 2-wire Push-button Modules
2) Single channel control with the terminals E1 E8
Outputs A1 A8 enable LED status indication
Control with conventional push-buttons or 24V push-button sensors

61
40-103_3870_GB_26_Electronic:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:15 Uhr Seite 62

JUNG BUS Dimming Station

Ref.-no.
Dimming station universal, 4-gang
Rail mounting device, 8 rail units
UDS 4 REGHE
Intended use
Switching and dimming of incandescent lamps, 230 V halogen lamps,
TRONIC and conventional transformers
Mixed loads of the specified types (do not mix C and L loads)
Operation by means of push-button sensors, sensor modules,
push-button modules or unlit installation buttons
Mounting on DIN rail in distribution boxes
It is not possible to operate the device with universal amplifiers in conjunction with electronic transformers!
Please use Tronic amplifiers for power extension when operating electronic transformers.
Product characteristics
Local control. The dimming station can be controlled using the keypad when the
control units are not connected.
Activation of status LEDs on the control units. The relay station has the activation
outputs A1...A4 for this purpose.
Electronic short circuit protection with permanent cut-off after 7 seconds
Electronic overtemperature protection
Integrated memory function for each channel (storing of brightness value)
Lamp-saving soft start
Switching off with dim-down function
Increasing the capacity by means of parallel wiring of outputs possible
Connection of amplifier possible
Special connection for hotel card switch
Central switching function All On, All Off
Parallel connection of two dimming stations (or dimming + relay station) possible
Function hotel card switch
In combination with a hotel card switch (ref.-no.: ..590 CARD..): When plugging in the hotel card
the light will be switched on with the stored brightness level. After removing the hotel card the light
remains on and can be controlled for 1 more minute. After the elapsed time the light dims down
(within an adjustable time of 30 seconds to 3 minutes) to minimum brightness and then switches off.
The dimming station can be controlled again after plugging in the hotel card.
Technical data
Rated voltage: AC 230/240 V ~, 50/60 Hz
Power loss: max. 20 W
Stand-by power: max. 2 W
Terminals , +
Control voltage: DC 24 V SELV
Current carrying capacity: 80 mA
Length of control cable: max. 100 m
Number of control units
Sensor module
(ref.-no. SM 1608): max. 4 (also when relay/dimming stations
are connected in parallel)
Push-button module
(ref.-no. 4008 TSM): max. 4 (also when relay/dimming stations
are connected in parallel)
Push-button sensors 24 V AC/DC
(make): depending on push-button sensor,
consider current consumption
Switching inputs E1ON/OFF ... E4ON/OFF
Control voltage: DC 24 V SELV
Resistance Ri: 200 k
Activation outputs A1' ... A4'
Control voltage: DC 24 V SELV
Current carrying capacity: 10 mA
Resistance Ra: 330

62
40-103_3870_GB_26_Electronic:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:15 Uhr Seite 63

Dimming Station JUNG Bus

Connection
Mains / load outputs / key card switch screw terminals
single wire: 1.5 ... 4 mm2
stranded without ferrule: 0.75 ... 4 mm2
stranded with ferrule: 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2
Switching inputs / activation outputs / control units: screw terminals
single wire: 1.5 mm2
stranded without ferrule: 1 mm2
stranded with ferrule: 0.75 mm2
Load outputs A1 ... A4
Contact type:
Length of output cable, per channel: max. 100 m
Connected load per channel
Incandescent lamps: 20 ... 150 W
HV halogen lamps: 20 ... 150 W
TRONIC transformers: 20 ... 150 W
inductive transformers: 20 ... 150 VA
Dimmable HV LED lamps: typical 3 ... 30 W
Dimmable compact fluorescent lamps: typical 3 ... 30 W
ohmic-capacitive: 20 ... 150 W
ohmic-inductive: 20 ... 150 VA
capacitive-inductive: not permitted
Reduction of load for every 5 C exceededing 45 C: 15 %
Max. load for outputs connected in parallel is limited to 80 %.
Mounting width: 144 mm (8 rail units)

1) 2)

Wiring:
1) 2-wire JUNG bus: Connection to the +/ terminals
with Sensor Module or 2-wire Push-button Modules
2) Single channel control with the terminals E1 E4
Outputs A1 A4 enable LED status indication
Control with conventional push-buttons or 24V push-button
sensors

63
40-103_3870_GB_26_Electronic:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:15 Uhr Seite 64

JUNG BUS Sensor module

Ref.-no.
Sensor module (JUNG bus)
for the connection of relay station (ref.-no. RS 8 REGHE) and dimming station (ref.-no. UDS 4 REGHE)
Only in combination with frames of the LS range and Flat Design.
SM 1608
Features
8 channels of the relay station can be controlled: switching, push-button control, blind control
16 channels can be controlled when connected to 2 parallel-wired relay stations
4 channels of the dimming station can be controlled
8 channels can be controlled when connected to 2 parallel-wired dimming stations
Additional central function: all assigned channels are controlled centrally
16 sensor pads with blue LEDs which can be grouped as required
Programming without additional tools
Free assignment of the groups to the channels
LEDs can be used for status feedback and as an orientation light
Status feedback of the switching states on all connected sensor modules
Brightness of the status LEDs can be set in three levels (OFF, 50%, 100%)
Up to 4 sensor modules can be connected to single or parallel connected relay/dimming stations
Parallel connected relay/dimming stations will be detected automatically
Sensor modules can control different outputs
Cloning of sensor modules: transfer of the push-button assignment of a sensor module
to further sensor modules (used e.g. in two-way circuits or intermediate switch circuits)
Settings on the device are retained even after mains voltage failure
Simple installation via 2-wire cable
Labelling possible (text, graphics, photo)
Technical data
Power supply: DC 24 V SELV (via relay or dimming station)
Current consumption: max. 20 mA (all LEDs on)
Connection: bus connection block
Inscription field (W x H): 68.5 x 68.5 mm
Ambient temperature: +5 ... +45 C
Storing temperature: 25 ... +75 C

24 V SELV
A4'
A5'
A6'
A1'
A2'
A3'

A7'
A8'
E4
E5
E6
E1
E2
E3

E7
E8

- + - +

-
+
Sensor Module

-
+

Push-button Module

64
40-103_3870_GB_26_Electronic:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:15 Uhr Seite 65

Push-button module JUNG BUS

Ref.-no.
Push-button module (JUNG bus)
for the connection of relay station (ref.-no. RS 8 REGHE) and dimming station (ref.-no. UDS 4 REGHE)
Adapter frames are included in delivery: ref.-no. LS 4 AR for LS range (pre-mounted)
and ref.-no. CD 4 AR for CD range. AS / A ranges without adapter frame.
4008 TSM
Features
8 channels of the relay station can be controlled: switching, push-button control, blind control
16 channels of 2 parallel-wired relay stations can be controlled in combination with push-button
extension module ref.-no.: 4094 TSEM
4 channels of the dimming station can be controlled
8 channels of 2 parallel-wired dimming stations can be controlled in combination with push-button
extension module ref.-no.: 4094 TSEM
Additional central function: all assigned channels are controlled centrally
Push-buttons can be assigned according to cover kit
Programming without additional tools
Free assignment of the groups to the channels
8 red status LED
1 blue operation LED
Status feedback of the switching states to connected push-button modules and sensor modules
Up to 4 push-button modules with max. 4 extension modules can be connected to single
or parallel connected relay/dimming stations
Cloning of modules: transfer the assignment of one module to further modules
(Cloning of push-button modules with extension module is possible)
Simple installation via 2-wire cable
Technical data
Power supply: DC 24 V SELV (via relay or dimming station)
Current consumption: max. 20 mA (all LEDs on)
Connection: bus connection block
Ambient temperature: +5 ... +25 C
Storing temperature: 25 ... +75 C

Push-button extension module


for the extension of up to 8 additional push-buttons for the push-button module ref.-no. 4008 TSM
preferred installation: vertical
Adapter frames are included in delivery: ref.-no. LS 4 AR for LS range (pre-mounted)
and ref.-no. CD 4 AR for CD range. AS / A ranges without adapter frame.
8 red LED: status indication
4-gang 4094 TSEM

push-button metal supporting frame


module

extension module

65
40-103_3870_GB_26_Electronic:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:15 Uhr Seite 66

Cover for modules


AS 500 / A range
IP Protection level IP 44 ensured
P Colour printing possible
L Laser labelling possible

Ref.-no.
Cover kit 1-gang
to clip on modules ref-no.: 4008 TSM, 4094 TSEM and 4212 TSM
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory L A 401 TSA
white L A 401 TSA WW
black L A 401 TSA SW
Thermoplastic (breakproof) lacquered
aluminium P L A 401 TSA AL
champagne P A 401 TSA CH
mocha A 401 TSA MO
matt anthracite L A 401 TSA ANM

Cover kit 2-gang


to clip on modules ref-no.: 4008 TSM, 4094 TSEM and 4224 TSM
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory L A 402 TSA
white L A 402 TSA WW
black L A 402 TSA SW
Thermoplastic (breakproof) lacquered
aluminium P L A 402 TSA AL
champagne P A 402 TSA CH
mocha A 402 TSA MO
matt anthracite L A 402 TSA ANM

Cover kit 3-gang


to clip on modules ref-no.: 4008 TSM, 4094 TSEM and 4236 TSM
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory L A 403 TSA
white L A 403 TSA WW
black L A 403 TSA SW
Thermoplastic (breakproof) lacquered
aluminium P L A 403 TSA AL
champagne P A 403 TSA CH
mocha A 403 TSA MO
matt anthracite L A 403 TSA ANM

Cover kit 4-gang


to clip on modules ref-no.: 4008 TSM, 4094 TSEM and 4248 TSM
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory L A 404 TSA
white L A 404 TSA WW
black L A 404 TSA SW
Thermoplastic (breakproof) lacquered
aluminium P L A 404 TSA AL
champagne P A 404 TSA CH
mocha A 404 TSA MO
matt anthracite L A 404 TSA ANM

Cover 2-gang, with symbols


to exchange the covers of the cover kit 2-gang ref.-no.: A 402 TSA..
and the right cover of the cover kit 3-gang ref.-no.: A 403 TSA..
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory A 402 TSAP
white A 402 TSAP WW
black A 402 TSAP SW
Thermoplastic (breakproof) lacquered
aluminium A 402 TSAP AL
champagne A 402 TSAP CH
mocha A 402 TSAP MO
matt anthracite A 402 TSAP ANM

66
40-103_3870_GB_26_Electronic:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:15 Uhr Seite 67

Cover for modules


AS 500 / A range

Ref.-no.
Cover 4-gang, neutral
to exchange the top left cover of the cover kit 3-gang ref.-no.: A 403 TSA..
and top left and bottom right cover of the cover kit 4-gang ref.-no.: A 404 TSA..
to exchange the bottom right cover of the cover kit ref.-no.: A 4093 TSA..
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory L A 404 TSAN 14
white L A 404 TSAN WW 14
black L A 404 TSAN SW 14
Thermoplastic (breakproof) lacquered
aluminium P L A 404 TSAN AL 14

Cover 4-gang, with symbols


to exchange the top left cover of the cover kit 3-gang ref.-no.: A 403 TSA..
and top left and bottom right cover of the cover kit 4-gang ref.-no.: A 404 TSA..
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory A 404 TSAP 14
white A 404 TSAP WW 14
black A 404 TSAP SW 14
Thermoplastic (breakproof) lacquered
aluminium A 404 TSAP AL 14
champagne A 404 TSAP CH 14
mocha A 404 TSAP MO 14
matt anthracite A 404 TSAP ANM 14

Cover 4-gang, neutral


to exchange the bottom left cover of the cover kit 3-gang ref.-no.: A 403 TSA..
and top right and bottom left cover of the cover kit 4-gang ref.-no.: A 404 TSA..
to exchange the bottom left cover of the cover kit ref.-no.: A 4093 TSA..
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory L A 404 TSAN 23
white L A 404 TSAN WW 23
black L A 404 TSAN SW 23
Thermoplastic (breakproof) lacquered
aluminium P L A 404 TSAN AL 23

Cover 4-gang, with symbols


to exchange the bottom left cover of the cover kit 3-gang ref.-no.: A 403 TSA..
and top right and bottom left cover of the cover kit 4-gang ref.-no.: A 404 TSA..
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory A 404 TSAP 23
white A 404 TSAP WW 23
black A 404 TSAP SW 23
Thermoplastic (breakproof) lacquered
aluminium A 404 TSAP AL 23
champagne A 404 TSAP CH 23
mocha A 404 TSAP MO 23
matt anthracite A 404 TSAP ANM 23

Information!
The push-button modules for the A/CD/LS ranges will be equipped with complete cover kits.
If the entire push-button module should be equipped with arrow symbols, every cover with symbol
has to be ordered separately.
Important: There are different covers with symbol for each position on the push-button module.
E.g. for the 4-gang module 2 different types of covers have to be selected. One for the upper left
and lower right position, one for the upper right and the lower left position.

67
40-103_3870_GB_26_Electronic:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:15 Uhr Seite 68

Cover for modules


CD range
IP Protection level IP 44 ensured
P Colour printing possible
L Laser labelling possible

Ref.-no.
Cover kit 1-gang
to clip on modules ref-no.: 4008 TSM, 4094 TSEM and 4212 TSM
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory L CD 401 TSA
white L CD 401 TSA WW
grey L CD 401 TSA GR
light grey L CD 401 TSA LG
black L CD 401 TSA SW

Cover kit 2-gang


to clip on modules ref-no.: 4008 TSM, 4094 TSEM and 4224 TSM
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory L CD 402 TSA
white L CD 402 TSA WW
grey L CD 402 TSA GR
light grey L CD 402 TSA LG
black L CD 402 TSA SW

Cover kit 3-gang


to clip on modules ref-no.: 4008 TSM, 4094 TSEM and 4236 TSM
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory L CD 403 TSA
white L CD 403 TSA WW
grey L CD 403 TSA GR
light grey L CD 403 TSA LG
black L CD 403 TSA SW

Cover kit 4-gang


to clip on modules ref-no.: 4008 TSM, 4094 TSEM and 4248 TSM
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory L CD 404 TSA
white L CD 404 TSA WW
grey L CD 404 TSA GR
light grey L CD 404 TSA LG
black L CD 404 TSA SW

Adapter frame
(Spare part)
to combine push-button modules with CD range
Also included in delivery of modules.
CD 4 AR

Cover 2-gang, with symbols


to exchange the covers of the cover kit 2-gang ref.-no.: CD 402 TSA..
and the right cover of the cover kit 3-gang ref.-no.: CD 403 TSA..
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory CD 402 TSAP
white CD 402 TSAP WW
grey CD 402 TSAP GR
light grey CD 402 TSAP LG
black CD 402 TSAP SW

68
40-103_3870_GB_26_Electronic:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:15 Uhr Seite 69

Cover for modules


CD range

Ref.-no.
Cover 4-gang, neutral
to exchange the top left cover of the cover kit 3-gang ref.-no.: CD 403 TSA..
and top left and bottom right cover of the cover kit 4-gang ref.-no.: CD 404 TSA..
to exchange the bottom right cover of the cover kit ref.-no.: CD 4093 TSA..
to exchange the bottom right cover of the cover kit ref.-no.: RCD CD 4092 TSA ..
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory L CD 404 TSAN 14
white L CD 404 TSAN WW 14
grey L CD 404 TSAN GR 14
light grey L CD 404 TSAN LG 14
black L CD 404 TSAN SW 14

Cover 4-gang, with symbols


to exchange the top left cover of the cover kit 3-gang ref.-no.: CD 403 TSA..
and top left and bottom right cover of the cover kit 4-gang ref.-no.: CD 404 TSA..
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory CD 404 TSAP 14
white CD 404 TSAP WW 14
grey CD 404 TSAP GR 14
light grey CD 404 TSAP LG 14
black CD 404 TSAP SW 14

Cover 4-gang, neutral


to exchange the bottom left cover of the cover kit 3-gang ref.-no.: CD 403 TSA..
and top right and bottom left cover of the cover kit 4-gang ref.-no.: CD 404 TSA..
to exchange the bottom left cover of the cover kit ref.-no.: CD 4093 TSA..
to exchange the bottom left cover of the cover kit ref.-no.: RCD CD 4092 TSA ..
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory L CD 404 TSAN 23
white L CD 404 TSAN WW 23
grey L CD 404 TSAN GR 23
light grey L CD 404 TSAN LG 23
black L CD 404 TSAN SW 23

Cover 4-gang, with symbols


to exchange the bottom left cover of the cover kit 3-gang ref.-no.: CD 403 TSA..
and top right and bottom left cover of the cover kit 4-gang ref.-no.: CD 404 TSA..
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory CD 404 TSAP 23
white CD 404 TSAP WW 23
grey CD 404 TSAP GR 23
light grey CD 404 TSAP LG 23
black CD 404 TSAP SW 23

Information!
The push-button modules for the A/CD/LS ranges will be equipped with complete cover kits.
If the entire push-button module should be equipped with arrow symbols, every cover with symbol
has to be ordered separately.
Important: There are different covers with symbol for each position on the push-button module.
E.g. for the 4-gang module 2 different types of covers have to be selected. One for the upper left
and lower right position, one for the upper right and the lower left position.

69
40-103_3870_GB_26_Electronic:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:15 Uhr Seite 70

Cover for modules


LS range / Flat Design
IP Protection level IP 44 ensured
P Colour printing possible
L Laser labelling possible

Ref.-no.
Cover kit 1-gang
to clip on modules ref-no.: 4008 TSM, 4094 TSEM and 4212 TSM
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory L LS 401 TSA
white L LS 401 TSA WW
light grey L LS 401 TSA LG
black L LS 401 TSA SW
metal versions
aluminium P L AL 2401 TSA
stainless steel L ES 2401 TSA
anthracite (aluminium lacquered) L AL 2401 TSA AN
dark (aluminium lacquered) L AL 2401 TSA D
classic brass P ME 2401 TSA C
antique brass ME 2401 TSA AT

Cover kit 2-gang


to clip on modules ref-no.: 4008 TSM, 4094 TSEM and 4224 TSM
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory L LS 402 TSA
white L LS 402 TSA WW
light grey L LS 402 TSA LG
black L LS 402 TSA SW
metal versions
aluminium P L AL 2402 TSA
stainless steel L ES 2402 TSA
anthracite (aluminium lacquered) L AL 2402 TSA AN
dark (aluminium lacquered) L AL 2402 TSA D
classic brass P ME 2402 TSA C
antique brass ME 2402 TSA AT

Cover kit 3-gang


to clip on modules ref-no.: 4008 TSM, 4094 TSEM and 4236 TSM
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory L LS 403 TSA
white L LS 403 TSA WW
light grey L LS 403 TSA LG
black L LS 403 TSA SW
metal versions
aluminium P L AL 2403 TSA
stainless steel L ES 2403 TSA
anthracite (aluminium lacquered) L AL 2403 TSA AN
dark (aluminium lacquered) L AL 2403 TSA D
classic brass P ME 2403 TSA C
antique brass ME 2403 TSA AT

Cover kit 4-gang


to clip on modules ref-no.: 4008 TSM, 4094 TSEM and 4248 TSM
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory L LS 404 TSA
white L LS 404 TSA WW
light grey L LS 404 TSA LG
black L LS 404 TSA SW
metal versions
aluminium P L AL 2404 TSA
stainless steel L ES 2404 TSA
anthracite (aluminium lacquered) L AL 2404 TSA AN
dark (aluminium lacquered) L AL 2404 TSA D
classic brass P ME 2404 TSA C
antique brass ME 2404 TSA AT

70
40-103_3870_GB_26_Electronic:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:15 Uhr Seite 71

Cover for modules


LS range / Flat Design

Ref.-no.
Adapter frame
(Spare part)
to combine push-button modules with LS range and Flat Design
Also included in delivery of modules.
LS 4 AR

Cover 2-gang, with symbols


to exchange the covers of the cover kit 2-gang ref.-no.: ..402 TSA..
and the right cover of the cover kit 3-gang ref.-no.: ..403 TSA.. in the LS range
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory LS 402 TSAP
white LS 402 TSAP WW
light grey LS 402 TSAP LG
black LS 402 TSAP SW
metal versions
aluminium AL 2402 TSAP
stainless steel ES 2402 TSAP
anthracite (aluminium lacquered) AL 2402 TSAP AN
dark (aluminium lacquered) AL 2402 TSAP D
classic brass ME 2402 TSAP C
antique brass ME 2402 TSAP AT

Cover 4-gang, neutral


to exchange the top left cover of the cover kit 3-gang ref.-no.: ..403 TSA..
and top left and bottom right cover of the cover kit 4-gang ref.-no.: ..404 TSA.. in the LS range
to exchange the bottom right cover of the cover kit ref.-no.: .. 4093 TSA .. in the LS range
to exchange the bottom right cover of the cover kit ref.-no.: RCD .. 4092 TSA .. in the LS range
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory L LS 404 TSAN 14
white L LS 404 TSAN WW 14
light grey L LS 404 TSAN LG 14
black L LS 404 TSAN SW 14
metal versions
aluminium P L AL 2404 TSAN 14
stainless steel L ES 2404 TSAN 14
anthracite (aluminium lacquered) L AL 2404 TSAN AN 14
classic brass P ME 2404 TSAN C 14
antique brass ME 2404 TSAN AT 14

Cover 4-gang, with symbols


to exchange the top left cover of the cover kit 3-gang ref.-no.: ..403 TSA..
and top left and bottom right cover of the cover kit 4-gang ref.-no.: ..404 TSA.. in the LS range
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory LS 404 TSAP 14
white LS 404 TSAP WW 14
light grey LS 404 TSAP LG 14
black LS 404 TSAP SW 14
metal versions
aluminium AL 2404 TSAP 14
stainless steel ES 2404 TSAP 14
anthracite (aluminium lacquered) AL 2404 TSAP AN 14
dark (aluminium lacquered) AL 2404 TSAP D 14
classic brass ME 2404 TSAP C 14
antique brass ME 2404 TSAP AT 14

71
40-103_3870_GB_26_Electronic:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:15 Uhr Seite 72

Cover for modules


LS range / Flat Design
IP Protection level IP 44 ensured
P Colour printing possible
L Laser labelling possible

Ref.-no.
Cover 4-gang, neutral
to exchange the bottom left cover of the cover kit 3-gang ref.-no.: ..403 TSA..
and top right and bottom left cover of the cover kit 4-gang ref.-no.: ..404 TSA.. in the LS range
to exchange the bottom left cover of the cover kit ref.-no.: .. 4093 TSA .. in the LS range
to exchange the bottom left cover of the cover kit ref.-no.: RCD .. 4092 TSA .. in the LS range
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory L LS 404 TSAN 23
white L LS 404 TSAN WW 23
light grey L LS 404 TSAN LG 23
black L LS 404 TSAN SW 23
metal versions
aluminium P L AL 2404 TSAN 23
stainless steel L ES 2404 TSAN 23
anthracite (aluminium lacquered) L AL 2404 TSAN AN 23
classic brass P ME 2404 TSAN C 23
antique brass ME 2404 TSAN AT 23

Cover 4-gang, with symbols


to exchange the bottom left cover of the cover kit 3-gang ref.-no.: ..403 TSA..
and top right and bottom left cover of the cover kit 4-gang ref.-no.: ..404 TSA.. in the LS range
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory LS 404 TSAP 23
white LS 404 TSAP WW 23
light grey LS 404 TSAP LG 23
black LS 404 TSAP SW 23
metal versions
aluminium AL 2404 TSAP 23
stainless steel ES 2404 TSAP 23
anthracite (aluminium lacquered) AL 2404 TSAP AN 23
dark (aluminium lacquered) AL 2404 TSAP D 23
classic brass ME 2404 TSAP C 23
antique brass ME 2404 TSAP AT 23

Information!
The push-button modules for the A/CD/LS ranges will be equipped with complete cover kits.
If the entire push-button module should be equipped with arrow symbols, every cover with symbol
has to be ordered separately.
Important: There are different covers with symbol for each position on the push-button module.
E.g. for the 4-gang module 2 different types of covers have to be selected. One for the upper left
and lower right position, one for the upper right and the lower left position.

Professional laser inscription and colour printing!


For further information see www.jung.de/gt

72
Conventional 24 V
Push-button Sensors
The conventional Push-button Sensors offer the possibility to combine JUNG design ranges with
other control systems. Up to 8 make contacts are integrated in a Push-button Sensor which can
be used for the control of PLC systems or other 24 V systems. Additionally up to 8 LEDs indicate
the respective switching status. In any case these Push-button Sensors can be used to control
the the JUNG Relay and Dimming Station. Select your favourite cover of the A-, CD and LS ranges
which are available in various colours and metal finish variants. The large control buttons are
available in same design ranges.

Zwiti_F40_F50_PushButton_24V_2015_GB.indd 6 27.02.15 14:03


40-103_3870_GB_26_Electronic:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:15 Uhr Seite 74

Push-button module 24 V
AS 500 / A range
IP Protection level IP 44 ensured
P Colour printing possible
L Laser labelling possible

Ref.-no.
Push-button modules for connection to relay station ref.-no. RS 8 REGHE, dimming station
ref.-no. UDS 4 REGHE or other control systems with control voltage of max. 24 V AC/DC (SELV), 20 mA.
The module is connected by means of a connection block at the back.
To be completed with cover kit
One red status LED per button
One operation LED (RGB)

In combination with the PHC system of the company PEHA the proper functioning of the
status LED cannot be guaranteed. Please contact our technical service line.

Push-button module 24 V AC/DC, 20 mA

including transparent cover ref.-no.: A 50 NA


1-gang 1-channel 2 contacts A 5212 TSM
2-gang 2-channel 4 contacts A 5224 TSM
3-gang 3-channel 6 contacts A 5236 TSM
4-gang 4-channel 8 contacts A 5248 TSM

Cover kit 1-gang


to clip on push-button module 1-gang
ref.-no.: A 5071 TSM, A 5091 TSM, A 5212 TSM and
push-button extension module, ref.-no.: A 5091 TSEM
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory L A 501 TSA
white L A 501 TSA WW
black L A 501 TSA SW
Thermoplastic (breakproof) lacquered
aluminium P L A 501 TSA AL
champagne P A 501 TSA CH
mocha A 501 TSA MO
matt anthracite L A 501 TSA ANM

Cover kit 2-gang


to clip on push-button module 2-gang
ref.-no.: A 5072 TSM, A 5092 TSM, A 5224 TSM,
room temperature controller module, ref.-no.: A 5178 TSM
and push-button extension module, ref.-no.: A 5092 TSEM
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory L A 502 TSA
white L A 502 TSA WW
black L A 502 TSA SW
Thermoplastic (breakproof) lacquered
aluminium P L A 502 TSA AL
champagne P A 502 TSA CH
mocha A 502 TSA MO
matt anthracite L A 502 TSA ANM

74
40-103_3870_GB_26_Electronic:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:15 Uhr Seite 75

Push-button module 24 V
AS 500 / A range

Ref.-no.
Cover kit 3-gang
to clip on push-button module 3-gang
ref.-no.: A 5073 TSM, A 5093 TSM, A 5236 TSM and
push-button extension module, ref.-no.: A 5093 TSEM
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory L A 503 TSA
white L A 503 TSA WW
black L A 503 TSA SW
Thermoplastic (breakproof) lacquered
aluminium P L A 503 TSA AL
champagne P A 503 TSA CH
mocha A 503 TSA MO
matt anthracite L A 503 TSA ANM

Cover kit 4-gang


to clip on push-button module 4-gang
ref.-no.: A 5074 TSM, A 5094 TSM, A 5248 TSM and
push-button extension module, ref.-no.: A 5094 TSEM
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory L A 504 TSA
white L A 504 TSA WW
black L A 504 TSA SW
Thermoplastic (breakproof) lacquered
aluminium P L A 504 TSA AL
champagne P A 504 TSA CH
mocha A 504 TSA MO
matt anthracite L A 504 TSA ANM

Transparent cover with paper inlay


(Spare part)
to clip on push-button module
ref.-no.: A 507.. TSM, A 509.. TSM, A 52.. TSM and
push-button extension module, ref.-no.: A 509.. TSEM
Also included in delivery of modules.
inscription field 25 x 52.5 mm
paper inlay pearly A 50 NA

Neutral cover
to clip on push-button module
ref.-no.: A 507.. TSM, A 509.. TSM, A 52.. TSM and
push-button extension module, ref.-no.: A 509.. TSEM
dimensions: 25 x 55 mm
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory L A 50 NA W
white L A 50 NA WW
black L A 50 NA SW
Thermoplastic (breakproof) lacquered
aluminium P L A 50 NA AL
champagne P A 50 NA CH
mocha A 50 NA MO
matt anthracite L A 50 NA ANM

Professional inscription see www.jung.de/gt

75
40-103_3870_GB_26_Electronic:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:15 Uhr Seite 76

Push-button module 24 V
CD range
IP Protection level IP 44 ensured
P Colour printing possible
L Laser labelling possible

Ref.-no.
Push-button modules for connection to relay station ref.-no. RS 8 REGHE, dimming station
ref.-no. UDS 4 REGHE or other control systems with control voltage of max. 24 V AC/DC (SELV), 20 mA.
The module is connected by means of a connection block at the back.
To be completed with cover kit
One red status LED per button
One operation LED (RGB)

In combination with the PHC system of the company PEHA the proper functioning of the
status LED cannot be guaranteed. Please contact our technical service line.

Push-button module 24 V AC/DC, 20 mA

including transparent cover ref.-no.: CD 50 NA


1-gang 1-channel 2 contacts CD 5212 TSM
2-gang 2-channel 4 contacts CD 5224 TSM
3-gang 3-channel 6 contacts CD 5236 TSM
4-gang 4-channel 8 contacts CD 5248 TSM

Cover kit 1-gang


to clip on push-button module 1-gang
ref.-no.: CD 5071 TSM, CD 5091 TSM, CD 5212 TSM and
push-button extension module, ref.-no.: CD 5091 TSEM
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory L CD 501 TSA
white L CD 501 TSA WW
grey L CD 501 TSA GR
light grey L CD 501 TSA LG
black L CD 501 TSA SW

Cover kit 2-gang


to clip on push-button module 2-gang
ref.-no.: CD 5072 TSM, CD 5092 TSM, CD 5224 TSM,
room temperature controller module, ref.-no.: CD 5178 TSM
and push-button extension module, ref.-no.: CD 5092 TSEM
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory L CD 502 TSA
white L CD 502 TSA WW
grey L CD 502 TSA GR
light grey L CD 502 TSA LG
black L CD 502 TSA SW

Cover kit 3-gang


to clip on push-button module 3-gang
ref.-no.: CD 5073 TSM, CD 5093 TSM, CD 5236 TSM and
push-button extension module, ref.-no.: CD 5093 TSEM
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory L CD 503 TSA
white L CD 503 TSA WW
grey L CD 503 TSA GR
light grey L CD 503 TSA LG
black L CD 503 TSA SW

76
40-103_3870_GB_26_Electronic:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:15 Uhr Seite 77

Push-button module 24 V
AS 500 / A range

Ref.-no.
Cover kit 4-gang
to clip on push-button module 4-gang
ref.-no.: CD 5074 TSM, CD 5094 TSM, CD 5248 TSM and
push-button extension module, ref.-no.: CD 5094 TSEM
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory L CD 504 TSA
white L CD 504 TSA WW
grey L CD 504 TSA GR
light grey L CD 504 TSA LG
black L CD 504 TSA SW

Transparent cover with paper inlay


(Spare part)
to clip on push-button module
ref.-no.: CD 507.. TSM, CD 509.. TSM, CD 52.. TSM and
push-button extension module, ref.-no.: CD 509.. TSEM
Also included in delivery of modules.
inscription field 33 x 64 mm
paper inlay pearly CD 50 NA

Neutral cover
to clip on push-button module
ref.-no.: CD 507.. TSM, CD 509.. TSM, CD 52.. TSM and
push-button extension module, ref.-no.: CD 509.. TSEM
dimensions: 33 x 68 mm
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory L CD 50 NA W
white L CD 50 NA WW
grey L CD 50 NA GR
light grey L CD 50 NA LG
black L CD 50 NA SW

Professional inscription see www.jung.de/gt

77
40-103_3870_GB_26_Electronic:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:15 Uhr Seite 78

Push-button module 24 V
LS range / Flat Design
IP Protection level IP 44 ensured
P Colour printing possible
L Laser labelling possible

Ref.-no.
Push-button modules for connection to relay station ref.-no. RS 8 REGHE, dimming station
ref.-no. UDS 4 REGHE or other control systems with control voltage of max. 24 V AC/DC (SELV), 20 mA.
The module is connected by means of a connection block at the back.
To be completed with cover kit
One red status LED per button
One operation LED (RGB)

In combination with the PHC system of the company PEHA the proper functioning of the
status LED cannot be guaranteed. Please contact our technical service line.

Push-button module 24 V AC/DC, 20 mA

including transparent cover ref.-no.: LS 50 NA


1-gang 1-channel 2 contacts LS 5212 TSM
2-gang 2-channel 4 contacts LS 5224 TSM
3-gang 3-channel 6 contacts LS 5236 TSM
4-gang 4-channel 8 contacts LS 5248 TSM

Cover kit 1-gang


to clip on push-button module 1-gang
ref.-no.: LS 5071 TSM, LS 5091 TSM, LS 5212 TSM and
push-button extension module, ref.-no.: LS 5091 TSEM
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory L LS 501 TSA
white L LS 501 TSA WW
light grey L LS 501 TSA LG
black L LS 501 TSA SW
metal versions
aluminium P L AL 2501 TSA
stainless steel L ES 2501 TSA
anthracite (aluminium lacquered) L AL 2501 TSA AN
dark (aluminium lacquered) L AL 2501 TSA D
chrome GCR 2501 TSA
gold-coloured GO 2501 TSA
gold-plated LS 501 TSA GGO
classic brass P ME 2501 TSA C
antique brass ME 2501 TSA AT

Cover kit 2-gang


to clip on push-button module 2-gang
ref.-no.: LS 5072 TSM, LS 5092 TSM, LS 5224 TSM,
room temperature controller module, ref.-no.: LS 5178 TSM
and push-button extension module, ref.-no.: LS 5092 TSEM
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory L LS 502 TSA
white L LS 502 TSA WW
light grey L LS 502 TSA LG
black L LS 502 TSA SW
metal versions
aluminium P L AL 2502 TSA
stainless steel L ES 2502 TSA
anthracite (aluminium lacquered) L AL 2502 TSA AN
dark (aluminium lacquered) L AL 2502 TSA D
chrome GCR 2502 TSA
gold-coloured GO 2502 TSA
gold-plated LS 502 TSA GGO
classic brass P ME 2502 TSA C
antique brass ME 2502 TSA AT
78
40-103_3870_GB_26_Electronic:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:15 Uhr Seite 79

Push-button module 24 V
LS range / Flat Design

Ref.-no.
Cover kit 3-gang
to clip on push-button module 3-gang
ref.-no.: LS 5073 TSM, LS 5093 TSM, LS 5236 TSM and
push-button extension module, ref.-no.: LS 5093 TSEM
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory L LS 503 TSA
white L LS 503 TSA WW
light grey L LS 503 TSA LG
black L LS 503 TSA SW
metal versions
aluminium P L AL 2503 TSA
stainless steel L ES 2503 TSA
anthracite (aluminium lacquered) L AL 2503 TSA AN
dark (aluminium lacquered) L AL 2503 TSA D
chrome GCR 2503 TSA
gold-coloured GO 2503 TSA
gold-plated LS 503 TSA GGO
classic brass P ME 2503 TSA C
antique brass ME 2503 TSA AT

Cover kit 4-gang


to clip on push-button module 4-gang
ref.-no.: LS 5074 TSM, LS 5094 TSM, LS 5248 TSM and
push-button extension module, ref.-no.: LS 5094 TSEM
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory L LS 504 TSA
white L LS 504 TSA WW
light grey L LS 504 TSA LG
black L LS 504 TSA SW
metal versions
aluminium P L AL 2504 TSA
stainless steel L ES 2504 TSA
anthracite (aluminium lacquered) L AL 2504 TSA AN
dark (aluminium lacquered) L AL 2504 TSA D
chrome GCR 2504 TSA
gold-coloured GO 2504 TSA
gold-plated LS 504 TSA GGO
classic brass P ME 2504 TSA C
antique brass ME 2504 TSA AT

Transparent cover with paper inlay


(Spare part)
to clip on push-button module
ref.-no.: LS 507.. TSM, LS 509.. TSM, LS 52.. TSM and
push-button extension module, ref.-no.: LS 509.. TSEM
Also included in delivery of modules.
inscription field 33 x 67.5 mm
paper inlay pearly LS 50 NA

79
40-103_3870_GB_26_Electronic:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:15 Uhr Seite 80

Push-button module 24 V
A / CD / LS ranges
IP Protection level IP 44 ensured
P Colour printing possible
L Laser labelling possible

Ref.-no.
Neutral cover
to clip on push-button module
ref.-no.: LS 507.. TSM, LS 509.. TSM, LS 52.. TSM and
push-button extension module, ref.-no.: LS 509.. TSEM
dimensions: 33 x 70.5 mm
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory L LS 50 NA W
white L LS 50 NA WW
light grey L LS 50 NA LG
black L LS 50 NA SW
metal versions
aluminium (lacquered) P AL 50 NA-L
stainless steel (lacquered) ES 50 NA-L
anthracite (lacquered) AL 50 NA AN-L
dark (lacquered) AL 50 NA D-L
classic brass (lacquered) ME 50 NA C-L
antique brass (lacquered) ME 50 NA AT-L

Professional inscription see www.jung.de/gt

Push-button modules for connection to relay station ref.-no. RS 8 REGHE, dimming station
ref.-no. UDS 4 REGHE or other control systems with control voltage of max. 24 V AC/DC (SELV), 20 mA.
The module is connected by means of a connection block at the back.
To each push-button two red LEDs are assigned for status indication.

In combination with the PHC system of the company PEHA the proper functioning of the status LED
cannot be guaranteed. Please contact our technical service line.

Push-button module 24 V AC/DC, 20 mA


Adapter frames are included in delivery: ref.-no. LS 4 AR for LS range (pre-mounted)
and ref.-no. CD 4 AR for CD range. AS / A ranges without adapter frame.
1-gang 1-channel 2 contacts 4212 TSM

2-gang 2-channel 4 contacts 4224 TSM

3-gang 3-channel 6 contacts 4236 TSM

4-gang 4-channel 8 contacts 4248 TSM

Please find the covers for push-button module 24 V on the pages 66 72.

80
Light Management
The inserts and intelligent centre plates stand out due to the variety of application possibilities. The difference lies in whether
the connected load should be switched or dimmed. All main units can be connected to all inserts.

Centre plates/Covers

Management
Light
Ceiling automatic Automatic switch Automatic switch Radio centre plate Radio centre plate
switch standard 2.20m eNet

Main unit
Presence detector Automatic switch Standard centre Universal centre
universal plate plate

Inserts

Universal touch dimmer Relay switch Relay switch with floating LV triac switch Universal touch
2-channel contact dimmer insert

Standard touch dimmer Universal relay switch TRONIC switch Push-button


1-channel controller

Manually operated satellites Automatically operated satellites

1-gang rocker Standard


centre plate Presence detector/ Automatic switch Automatic switch
Ceiling automatic universal/standard 2.20m
switch
Satelite unit

Push-button Satelite insert Satelite insert


2-wire 3-wire

Zwiti_Tastdimmer_2015_GB.indd 7 27.02.15 14:04


40-103_3870_GB_26_Electronic:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:15 Uhr Seite 82

Light Management Touch dimmer inserts

Ref.-no.
Universal touch dimmer insert
1254 UDE
Technical data
Rated voltage: AC 230 V ~, 50/60 Hz
Connected load: 50 ... 420 W/VA
Type of loads: 230 V incandescent lamps
(resistive load, trailing edge phase control)
230 V halogen lamps (resistive load, trailing edge phase control)
TRONIC transformers (capacitive load, trailing edge phase control)
inductive transformers (inductive load, leading edge phase control)
Mix of the specified load types (do not mix capacitive loads with inductive loads).
When using mixed loads with inductive transformers, the ohmic load must not exceed 50 %.
Connection: screw terminals
Terminals for: 2 x 2.5 mm2 or 1 x 4 mm2

Integrated memory function (storing of brightness value)


Electronic short-circuit protection
Overload-proof
Electronic overtemperature protection
Switch-on via lamp-saving soft start
Suitable amplifiers: ULZ 1215 REG, 247 EB or 246 EB (max. 10)
When using 247 EB or 246 EB, charge dimmer with minimum capacity.

Connection of satellite units (combinations possible):


Satellite insert "2-wire", ref.-no.: 1220 NE
Centre plate (ref.-no.: ..1561.07..) has same functionality as on universal touch dimmer insert
Number of satellite units: unlimited
Total length of satellite cables: max. 100 m

Mechanical push-buttons (make contact, not illuminated)


Short operation: On / Off
Longer operation: dimming
Number of satellite units: unlimited
Total length of satellite cables: max. 100 m
Note: Satellite operation is only possible, when a "cover" (centre plate, automatic switch
or other suitable cover) is placed on the main unit.
Illuminated mechanical push-buttons must have a separate N-terminal.
The storage of the dimming value (memory function) is not possible with mechanical push-buttons.

Satellite insert "3-wire", ref.-no.: 1223 NE


in combination with automatic switch ref.-no.: ..1180.., ..1180-1.., ..1280.., ..1280-1..,
presence detector ref.-no.: PMU 360 .. or
ceiling automatic switch ref.-no.: DAW 360 ..

The main unit must likewise be operated with an automatic switch, presence detector
or ceiling automatic switch. Otherwise there is no function!

Number of satellite units: max. 5


Total length of satellite cables: max. 100 m

82
40-103_3870_GB_26_Electronic:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:15 Uhr Seite 83

Touch dimmer inserts Light Management

Ref.-no.
Universal 2-gang dimmer insert
1252 UDE
Product characteristics
Electronic short-circuit protection with permanent switch-off after 7 seconds at the latest
Electronic overtemperature protection
Lamp-saving soft start
Power extension through amplifiers
Different load types are possible on the two outputs
Asymmetric load distribution possible
Automatic setting of the dimming principle suitable for the load
Connection of more than one 2-wire extension is possible
Suitable amplifiers: ULZ 1215 REG, 247 EB or 246 EB (max. 10)
When using 247 EB or 246 EB, charge dimmer with minimum capacity!

Technical data
Rated voltage: AC 230 V ~, 50/60 Hz
Connected load per output: 50 ... 260 W/VA
Type of loads: 230 V incandescent lamps
(resistive load, trailing edge phase control)
230 V halogen lamps (resistive load, trailing edge phase control)
TRONIC transformers (capacitive load, trailing edge phase control)
inductive transformers (inductive load, leading edge phase control)
Mix of the specified load types (do not mix capacitive loads with inductive loads).
When using mixed loads with inductive transformers, the ohmic load must not exceed 50 %.
Connection: screw terminals
Terminals for: 2 x 2.5 mm2 or 1 x 4 mm2
Approvals: VDE

Connection of satellite units (combinations possible):


Satellite insert "2-wire", ref.-no.: 1220 NE
Centre plate (ref.-no.: ..1561.07..) has same functionality as that on universal 2-gang dimmer insert
Number of satellite units: unlimited
Total length of satellite cables: max. 100 m
The satellite unit always controls both outputs at the same time.

Note: Satellite operation is only possible, when a centre plate is placed on the main unit.
Satellite operation via mechanical push-buttons is not possible.

83
40-103_3870_GB_26_Electronic:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:15 Uhr Seite 84

Light Management Touch dimmer inserts

Ref.-no.
Standard touch dimmer insert
1225 SDE
Technical data
Rated voltage: AC 230 V ~, 50/60 Hz
Connected load: 20 ... 500 VA
Dimming method: leading edge phase control
Type of loads: 230 V incandescent lamps
230 V halogen lamps
inductive transformers
Mixed loads of the specified types
Fuse, type: T 2 A H 250 V
Connection: screw terminals
Terminals for: 2 x 2.5 mm2 or 1 x 4 mm2

Inductive transformers should have at least 85 % nominal load.


The total load including the transformer power loss must not exceed 500 VA.
Memory function (storing of brightness value)
Electronic overtemperature protection
Suitable amplifiers: 246 EB (max. 10)
When using 246 EB, charge dimmer with minimum capacity.

Connection of satellite units (combinations possible):


Satellite insert "2-wire", ref.-no.: 1220 NE
Centre plate (ref.-no.: ..1561.07..) has same functionality as on standard touch dimmer insert
Number of satellite units: unlimited
Total length of satellite cables: max. 100 m

Mechanical push-buttons (make contact, not illuminated)


Short operation: On / Off
Longer operation: dimming
Number of satellite units: unlimited
Total length of satellite cables: max. 100 m
Note: Satellite operation is only possible, when a "cover" (centre plate, automatic switch
or other suitable cover) is placed on the main unit.
Illuminated mechanical push-buttons must have a separate N-terminal.
The storage of the dimming value (memory function) is not possible with mechanical push-buttons.

Satellite insert "3-wire", ref.-no.: 1223 NE


in combination with automatic switch ref.-no.: ..1180.., ..1180-1.., ..1280.., ..1280-1..,
presence detector ref.-no.: PMU 360 .. or
ceiling automatic switch ref.-no.: DAW 360 ..

The main unit must likewise be operated with an automatic switch, presence detector
or ceiling automatic switch. Otherwise there is no function!

Number of satellite units: max. 10


Total length of satellite cables: max. 100 m

84
40-103_3870_GB_26_Electronic:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:15 Uhr Seite 85

LED touch dimmer inserts Light Management

Ref.-no.
LED touch dimmer insert
1271 LED DE
Intended use
Switching and dimming of incandescent lamps, HV halogen lamps, HV LED lamps
and compact fluorescent lamps
Suitable for mixed load operation of ohmic load (incandescent lamps, HV halogen lamps)
with HV LED lamps
Suitable for mixed load operation of ohmic load (incandescent lamps, HV halogen lamps)
with compact fluorescent lamps
Installation in appliance box according to DIN 49073
Operation with suitable cover
No mixed load operation of HV LED lamps with compact fluorescent lamps
No operation with transformers
HV LED and CFLs generate high pulsed current when operated in leading edge phase control.
Depending on the model and power rating of these lamps, the connected load can differ from
the given data.
Product characteristics
Device is operating in leading edge phase control
Device can also be operated without neutral conductor
Lamp-saving soft start
Switch-on brightness can be saved permanently
Minimum brightness can be set
Connection of extensions possible
Power failures exceeding 1 second will cause cause the device to switch off
Electronic short circuit protection with permanent switch-off
Electronic overtemperature protection
Technical data
Rated voltage: AC 230 V ~, 50/60 Hz
Stand-by power: max. 0.5 W
Power loss: max. 4 W
Ambient temperature: +5 ... +25 C
Contact type:
Connected load
Incandescent lamps: 20 ... 120 W
HV halogen lamps: 20 ... 120 W
When operated without a neutral conductor, the minimum load for incandescent lamps
and HV halogen lamps increases to 50 W.
Dimmable HV LED lamps: typical 3 ... 100 W
Dimmable compact fluorescent lamps: typical 3 ... 100 W
ohmic and HV LED: typical 3 ... 100 W
ohmic and CFL: typical 3 ... 100 W
HV LED and CFL: not permitted
Reduction of load
for every 5 C exceededing 25 C: 10 %
for installation into wooden or hollow walls: 15 %
for installation into multiple combinations: 20 %
Amplifiers: none
Connection: screw terminals
single wire: max. 4 mm2
stranded without ferrule: max. 4 mm2
stranded with ferrule: max. 2.5 mm2
Number of satellite units
Satellite insert 2-wire ref.-no. 1220 NE: unlimited
Satellite insert 3-wire ref.-no. 1223 NE: 5
unlit installation buttons: unlimited
Total length of extension unit cable: max. 100 m
Total length power cable: max. 100 m

85
40-103_3870_GB_26_Electronic:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:15 Uhr Seite 86

Light Management Push-button controller

Ref.-no.
Push-button controller
for dimming of fluorescent lamps controlled by electronic ballasts or
TRONIC transformers with control voltage 1 10 V
1240 STE
Product characteristics
The light bulb is switched on and off via the load cable and dimmed via the 1-10 V interface.
Switch-on brightness can be saved permanently
Basic brightness can be saved permanently
Connection of extensions possible
The 1-10 V interface is short-circuit proof for the control current

Technical data
Rated voltage: AC 230 V ~, 50/60 Hz, neutral conductor required
Connected load
Incandescent lamps: 700 W
Electronic ballast: depending on type
Control voltage: 0.5 ... 10 V
Control current: max. 50 mA
Switch contact: relay, mains potential
Ambient temperature: +5 ... +25 C
Connection: screw terminals
Terminals for: 2 x 2.5 mm2 or 1 x 4 mm2

Connection of satellite units (combinations possible):


Satellite insert "2-wire", ref.-no.: 1220 NE
Centre plate (ref.-no.: ..1561.07..) has same functionality as on standard touch dimmer insert
Minimum brightness can not be adjusted
Number of satellite units: unlimited
Total length of satellite cables: max. 100 m

Mechanical push-buttons (make contact, not illuminated)


Short operation: On / Off
Longer operation: dimming
Number of satellite units: unlimited
Total length of satellite cables: max. 100 m
Note: Satellite operation is only possible, when a "cover" (centre plate, automatic switch
or other suitable cover) is placed on the main unit.
Illuminated mechanical push-buttons must have a separate N-terminal.
The storage of the dimming value (memory function) is not possible with mechanical push-buttons.

Satellite insert "3-wire", ref.-no.: 1223 NE


in combination with automatic switch ref.-no.: ..1180.., ..1180-1.., ..1280.., ..1280-1..,
presence detector ref.-no.: PMU 360 .. or
ceiling automatic switch ref.-no.: DAW 360 ..

The main unit must likewise be operated with an automatic switch, presence detector
or ceiling automatic switch. Otherwise there is no function!

Number of satellite units: max. 10


Total length of satellite cables: max. 100 m

86
40-103_3870_GB_26_Electronic:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:15 Uhr Seite 87

Relay insert Light Management

Ref.-no.
Universal relay switch insert
1-channel
1201 URE
Technical data
Rated voltage: AC 230 V ~, 50/60 Hz, neutral conductor required
Connected load
Incandescent lamps: 2300 W
HV halogen lamps: 2300 W
TRONIC transformers: 1500 W
inductive transformers: 1000 VA
Operate inductive transformers with at least 85 % nominal load.
The overall load, including the transformer power loss, must not exceed 1000 VA.
Fluorescent lamps
non-compensated: 1200 VA
parallel compensated: 0920 VA
lead-lag circuit: 2300 VA
Mixed loads of the specified types
Connection: screw terminals
Terminals for: 2 x 2.5 mm2 or 1 x 4 mm2
Approvals: VDE

Important: Energy saving lamps cause high inrush currents which may cause the switch contact to
get stuck. Then a reduction of capacity is required! Please check suitability of lamps before installation.

Connection of satellite units (combinations possible):


Satellite insert "2-wire", ref.-no.: 1220 NE
Centre plate (ref.-no.: ..1561.07..) has same functionality as on relay insert
Number of satellite units: unlimited
Total length of satellite cables: max. 100 m

Mechanical push-buttons (make contact, not illuminated)


Short operation: On / Off
Number of satellite units: unlimited
Total length of satellite cables: max. 100 m
Note: Satellite operation is only possible, when a "cover" (centre plate, automatic switch
or other suitable cover) is placed on the main unit.
Illuminated mechanical push-buttons must have a separate N-terminal.

Satellite insert "3-wire", ref.-no.: 1223 NE


in combination with automatic switch ref.-no.: ..1180.., ..1180-1.., ..1280.., ..1280-1..,
presence detector ref.-no.: PMU 360 .. or
ceiling automatic switch ref.-no.: DAW 360 ..

The main unit must likewise be operated with an automatic switch, presence detector
or ceiling automatic switch. Otherwise there is no function!

Number of satellite units: max. 10


Total length of satellite cables: max. 100 m

87
40-103_3870_GB_26_Electronic:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:15 Uhr Seite 88

Light Management Relay insert

Ref.-no.
Relay switch insert with floating contact
1-channel 1201-1 URE
with additional floating contact for switching of a second phase (min. 12 V, 100 mA) not SELV
Technical data
Rated voltage: AC 230 V ~, 50/60 Hz, neutral conductor required
Connected load
Incandescent lamps: 800 W
HV halogen lamps: 750 W
Mixed loads of the specified types
Minimum load: 12 V, 100 mA
Switch contact : floating relay contact, suitable for switching
of a second phase, not suitable for SELV
Connection: screw terminals
Terminals for: 2 x 2.5 mm2 or 1 x 4 mm2

Connection of satellite units (combinations possible):


Satellite insert "2-wire", ref.-no.: 1220 NE
Centre plate (ref.-no.: ..1561.07..) has same functionality
as on relay insert
Number of satellite units: unlimited
Total length of satellite cables: max. 100 m
Mechanical push-buttons (make contact, not illuminated)
Short operation: On / Off
Number of satellite units: unlimited
Total length of satellite cables: max. 100 m

Note: Satellite operation is only possible, when a "cover"


(centre plate, automatic switch or other suitable cover) is
placed on the main unit.
Illuminated mechanical push-buttons must have a separate
N-terminal.

Satellite insert "3-wire", ref.-no.: 1223 NE


in combination with automatic switch ref.-no.: ..1180..,
..1180-1.., ..1280.., ..1280-1..,
presence detector ref.-no.: PMU 360 .. or
ceiling automatic switch ref.-no.: DAW 360 ..

The main unit must likewise be operated with an automatic


switch, presence detector or ceiling automatic switch.
Otherwise there is no function!

Number of satellite units: max. 10


Relay insert 1201-1 URE Total length of satellite cables: max. 100 m
Satellite insert 1220 NE
Satellite insert 1223 NE
Mechanical push-button
Further satellites

88
40-103_3870_GB_26_Electronic:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:15 Uhr Seite 89

Relay insert Light Management

Ref.-no.
Relay switch insert
2-channel
1202 URE
Product characteristics
Output HLK with potential-free NO contact for switching a second electric circuit, not SELV or PELV
Switch-on delay of output HLK can be switched off
Shut-off delay of output HLK adjustable
Connection of extensions possible
Technical data
Rated voltage: AC 230 V ~, 50/60 Hz, neutral conductor required
Relay channel 1 (lighting):
Connected load
Incandescent lamps: 1000 W
HV halogen lamps: 1000 W
TRONIC transformers: 0750 VA
inductive transformers: 0750 VA
Fluorescent lamps non-compensated: 0500 VA
Switch contact: relay, mains potential (same phase as insert supply voltage)
Shut-off delay: depending on cover
Relay channel 2 (motor):
Shut-off delay: Adjustable (2, 10, 30, 60, 120 min)
Connected load
Incandescent lamps: 0800 W
HV halogen lamps: 0750 W
Motor: 0450 VA at a max. switch-on current of 2.1 A
Switch contact: floating relay contact, suitable for switching of a second phase,
not suitable for SELV
Connection: screw terminals
Terminals for: 2 x 2.5 mm2 or 1 x 4 mm2

Time delay function:


The function can be realised e.g. with a standard centre plate.
Channel 1 (lighting) switches ON and OFF without delay.
Channel 2 (motor) switches ON depending on channel 1 immediately or with a delay and OFF
also with a delay. The time delay can be deactivated.
Connection of satellite units (combinations possible):
Satellite insert "2-wire", ref.-no.: 1220 NE
Centre plate (ref.-no.: ..1561.07..) has same functionality as on relay insert
Number of satellite units: unlimited
Total length of satellite cables: max. 100 m
Mechanical push-buttons (make contact, not illuminated)
Short operation: On / Off
Number of satellite units: unlimited
Total length of satellite cables: max. 100 m
Note: Satellite operation is only possible, when a "cover" (centre plate, automatic switch
or other suitable cover) is placed on the main unit.
Illuminated mechanical push-buttons must have a separate N-terminal.
Satellite insert "3-wire", ref.-no.: 1223 NE
in combination with automatic switch ref.-no.: ..1180.., ..1180-1.., ..1280.., ..1280-1..,
presence detector ref.-no.: PMU 360 .. or
ceiling automatic switch ref.-no.: DAW 360 ..

The main unit must likewise be operated with an automatic switch, presence detector
or ceiling automatic switch. Otherwise there is no function!

Number of satellite units: max. 10


Total length of satellite cables: max. 100 m

89
40-103_3870_GB_26_Electronic:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:15 Uhr Seite 90

Light Management Relay insert

Ref.-no.
TRONIC switch insert "silent switching"
1254 TSE
Technical data
Rated voltage: AC 230 V ~, 50/60 Hz
Connected load: 50 ... 420 W/VA
Type of loads: 230 V incandescent lamps
230 V halogen lamps
TRONIC transformers
Mixed loads of the specified types
Supply phase angle: approx. 2 ms
Connection: screw terminals
Terminals for: 2 x 2.5 mm2 or 1 x 4 mm2
Electronic short-circuit protection
Overload-proof
Electronic overtemperature protection
Switch-on via lamp-saving soft start

LV triac switch insert "silent switching"


1244 NVSE
Technical data
Rated voltage: AC 230 V ~, 50/60 Hz
Connected load: 40 ... 400 W/VA
Type of loads: 230 V incandescent lamps
230 V halogen lamps
Inductive transformers
Mixed loads of the specified types
Supply phase angle: approx. 2 ms
Fuse, type: T 1.6 A H 250 V
Connection: screw terminals
Terminals for: 2 x 2.5 mm2 or 1 x 4 mm2
Impose at least 85 % of the rated load on inductive transformers
Electronic overtemperature protection
Switch-on via lamp-saving soft start

Connection of satellite units (combinations possible):


Satellite insert "2-wire", ref.-no.: 1220 NE
Centre plate (ref.-no.: ..1561.07..) has same functionality as on switch insert
Number of satellite units: unlimited
Total length of satellite cables: max. 100 m
Mechanical push-buttons (make contact, not illuminated)
On / Off (toggel)
Number of satellite units: unlimited
Total length of satellite cables: max. 100 m
Note: Satellite operation is only possible, when a "cover" (centre plate, automatic switch
or other suitable cover) is placed on the main unit.
Illuminated mechanical push-buttons must have a separate N-terminal.

Satellite insert "3-wire", ref.-no.: 1223 NE


in combination with automatic switch ref.-no.: ..1180.., ..1180-1.., ..1280.., ..1280-1..,
presence detector ref.-no.: PMU 360 .. or
ceiling automatic switch ref.-no.: DAW 360 ..
The main unit must likewise be operated with an automatic switch, presence detector
or ceiling automatic switch. Otherwise there is no function!

Number of satellite units: max. 10


Total length of satellite cables: max. 100 m

90
40-103_3870_GB_26_Electronic:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:15 Uhr Seite 91

Satellite inserts Light Management

Ref.-no.
Satellite insert "2-wire"
1220 NE
To extend installations with switching or dimming inserts.
It offers the same operation features as the master unit.
The satellite insert can only be operated with the standard centre plate ..1561.07..
Technical data
Rated voltage: AC 230 V ~, 50/60 Hz
Connection: connected to master unit
Number of satellite units: unlimited
Total cable length: max. 100 m
Connection: screw terminals
Terminals for: 2 x 2.5 mm2 or 1 x 4 mm2
Approvals: VDE

Satellite insert "3-wire"


1223 NE
The satellite insert can only be operated with presence detector universal ref.-no: PMU 360 ..,
ceiling automatic switch ref.-no: DAW 360 .. or automatic switches ref.-no.: ..1180.., 1180-1..,
..1280.., ..1280-1..
Technical data
Rated voltage: AC 230 V ~, 50/60 Hz, neutral conductor required
Connection: Connected to master unit
(with presence detector or automatic switch)
Number of satellites
connected to Universal dimmer insert: max. 5
connected to other inserts: max. 10
Total cable length: max. 100 m
Connection: screw terminals
Terminals for: 2 x 2.5 mm2 or 1 x 4 mm2

91
40-103_3870_GB_26_Electronic:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:15 Uhr Seite 92

Light Management Staircase application

Ref.-no.
Staircase automatic switch installations
consisting of pulse unit, automatic switch Standard or Universal and power unit
to upgrade 3- or 4-wire staircase lighting systems with automatic switches.
Up to 16 pulse units can be connected to the power unit. The pulse unit ref.-no. 1208 UI
together with the power unit ref-no. 1208 REG is the only admissible combination.

Pulse unit
1208 UI

Intended use
Manual or automatic control of the power unit ref-no. 1208 REG
Installation in appliance box according to DIN 49073
Operation with suitable cover

Product characteristics
Manual switching in combination with standard centre plate
Automatic switching in combination with automatic switch
Insert designed with 2-wire technology

Technical data
Rated voltage: AC 230 V ~, 50 Hz
Connection: screw terminals
Terminals for: 2 x 2.5 mm2 or 1 x 4 mm2
Approvals: VDE

92
40-103_3870_GB_26_Electronic:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:15 Uhr Seite 93

Staircase application Light Management

Ref.-no.
Power unit for rail mounting
1208 REG
Intended use
Manual or automatic switching of light in stairways
Installation in distribution boxes on DIN rail according to EN 60715
Switch-on via pulse unit or push-buttons

Product characteristics
Adjustable shut-off delay
Electronic overload protection for the control input
Four different operating modes can be set:
Automatic function without switch-off pre-warning
Automatic function with switch-off pre-warning
Light switched ON continuously
Light switched OFF continuously

Technical data
Rated voltage: AC 230 V ~, 50 Hz
Power consumption: approx. 1 W
Permissible current for control input: max. 40 mA
Mounting width: 18 mm (1 rail unit)
Operating temperature: +5 ... +45 C
Switching capacity: 16 A / AC 250 V ~
Incandescent lamps: 2300 W
HV halogen lamps: 2300 W
Fluorescent lamps
parallel compensated: 0920 W
non-compensated: 1200 VA
lead-lag circuit: 2300 W
TRONIC transformers: 1500 W
Inductive transformers: 1000 VA
Electronic ballast: depending on type
Minimum load: 100 mA
Duty cycle: 100 %
Radio interference suppression: according to EN 55 014
Total length of control cable: max. 100 m
Connection: screw terminals
Terminals for: 2 x 2.5 mm2 or 1 x 4 mm2
Shut-off delay: approx. 10 s ... 15 min
Shut-off delay tolerance: 20 %
Max. number of pulse units: 16
Operation modes: OFF
Automatic without warning
Automatic with warning
ON
Approvals: VDE

93
40-103_3870_GB_26_Electronic:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:15 Uhr Seite 94

Light Management Centre plates

Ref.-no.
Standard centre plate
for inserts ref.-no.: 1201 URE, 1201-1 URE, 1202 URE, 1225 SDE, 1240 STE,
1244 NVSE, 1254 TSE, 1254 UDE, 1271 LED DE
for satellite unit ref.-no.: 1220 NE

Function
A 1561.07 .. Operation with e.g. a dimmer insert:
1. Longer operation of the upper half: dimming from min. to max.
2. Short operation of the upper half: ON
3. Longer operation of the lower half: dimming from max. to min.
4. Short operation of the lower half: OFF
5. Short operation of the full surface area: ON or OFF
6. Operation of the full surface area for min. 3 sec.: storing the current brightness value
7. Longer operation of lower half in OFF mode: switching ON with min. brightness

for AS and A range


CD 1561.07 ..
AS 1561.07 .. page 258
ABAS 1561.07 .. page 258
A 1561.07 .. page 293
for CD range
CD 1561.07 .. page 346
for SL range
SL 1561.07 .. page 377
SL 1561.07 .. for LS range
.. 1561.07 .. page 399 / 431

Universal centre plate


for inserts ref.-no.: 1201 URE, 1201-1 URE, 1225 SDE, 1240 STE, 1244 NVSE,
1254 TSE, 1254 UDE, 1271 LED DE

Function
Four different modes of operation can be selected (timer, twilight switch, memory switch, random switch).
A potentiometer is used for settings of time and brightness values.
The Universal centre plate is used in combination with a switching or dimming insert (except 2-channel relay
switch insert). In installations with a presence detector or an automatic switch, the light can also be switched
depending on movement. The Universal centre plate detects the ambient brightness by means of a light sen-
A 1561.07 U .. sor. The sensor is located together with the status LED behind the window in the middle of the centre plate.
Operation with e.g. a dimmer insert:
1. Longer operation of the upper half: dimming from min. to max.
2. Short operation of the upper half: ON
3. Longer operation of the lower half: dimming from max. to min.
4. Short operation of the lower half: OFF
5. Short operation of the full surface area: ON or OFF
6. Operation of the full surface area for min. 3 sec.: storing the current brightness value
7. Longer operation of lower half in OFF mode: switching ON with min. brightness
CD 1561.07 U ..
for AS and A range
AS 1561.07 U .. page 258
A 1561.07 U .. page 294
for CD range
CD 1561.07 U .. page 346
for LS range
.. 1561.07 U .. page 309 / 431
LS 1561.07 U ..

94
40-103_3870_GB_26_Electronic:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:15 Uhr Seite 95

Centre plates Light Management

Ref.-no.
Radio centre plate (eNet)
for inserts ref.-no.: 1201 URE, 1201-1 URE, 1202 URE, 1225 SDE, 1240 STE,
1244 NVSE, 1254 TSE, 1254 UDE, 1271 LED DE

Intended use:
Manual and radio-controlled operation of suitable flush-mounted inserts for switching or dimming
Operation with suitable radio transmitters

Function FM A 1561.07 ..
Operation with e.g. a dimmer insert:
1. Longer operation of the upper half: dimming from min. to max.
2. Short operation of the upper half: ON
3. Longer operation of the lower half: dimming from max. to min.
4. Short operation of the lower half: OFF
5. Short operation of the full surface area: ON or OFF
6. Operation of the full surface area for min. 3 sec.: storing the current brightness value
7. Longer operation of lower half in OFF mode: switching ON with min. brightness
FM CD 1561.07 ..
for AS and A range
FM AS 1561.07 .. page 258
FM A 1561.07 .. page 294
for CD range
FM CD 1561.07 .. page 346
for SL range
FM SL 1561.07 .. page 377
for LS range FM .. 1561.07 ..
FM .. 1561.07 .. page 399 / 432

Standard centre plate, 2-gang


for universal 2-gang dimmer insert ref.-no.: 1252 UDE

Function
Operation with e.g. a dimmer insert:
1. Longer operation of the upper half: dimming from min. to max.
2. Short operation of the upper half: ON A 1565.07 ..
3. Longer operation of the lower half: dimming from max. to min.
4. Short operation of the lower half: OFF
5. Short operation of the full surface area: ON or OFF
6. Operation of the full surface area for min. 3 sec.: storing the current brightness value
7. Longer operation of lower half in OFF mode: switching ON with min. brightness

for AS and A range


AS 1565.07 .. page 258
ABAS 1565.07 .. page 258 CD 1565.07 ..
A 1565.07 .. page 293
for CD range
CD 1565.07 .. page 346
for SL range
SL 1565.07 .. page 377
for LS range
.. 1565.07 .. page 399 / 432
.. 1565.07 ..

95
40-103_3870_GB_26_Electronic:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:15 Uhr Seite 96

Light Management Automatic switch

Automatic switch 180 for 1.1 m mounting height


Standard ref.-no.: .. 1180 .. and Universal ref.-no.: .. 1180-1 ..

Automatic switch standard Automatic switch universal

(1) Sensitivity setting


1,10 m

(2) Brightness setting


(3) Operating mode switch
(4) Switch off delay/Run-on time

The 1.10 m automatic switches have a two-level detection field with a detection angle of 180.
Detection field approx. 10 m x 12 m at an installation height of 1.10 m.
For different installation heights the nominal range varies.
~ 12 m

Due to the alignment of the upper lens level, the detection field is spatially not limited.
This may, among other things, cause movements out of the specified detection field to trigger
the automatic switch (over-ranging).

~ 10 m

Ref.-no.

for inserts ref.-no.: 1201 URE, 1201-1 URE, 1202 URE, 1225 SDE,
1240 STE, 1244 NVSE, 1254 TSE, 1254 UDE, 1271 LED DE, 1208 UI
for satellite unit ref.-no.: 1223 NE

for AS and A range


1.1 m Standard A 1180 .. page 259 / 295
1.1 m Universal A 1180-1 .. page 259 / 295
1.1 m IP 44 Standard A 1180 WU .. page 259 / 295
1.1 m IP 44 Universal A 1180-1 WU .. page 259 / 295

CD 1180 ..
for CD range
1.1 m Standard CD 1180 .. page 347
1.1 m Universal CD 1180-1 .. page 347
1.1 m IP 44 Standard CD 1180 WU .. page 347
1.1 m IP 44 Universal CD 1180-1 WU .. page 348

SL 1180 ..
for SL range
1.1 m Universal SL 1180-1 .. page 377

for LS range
1.1 m Standard .. 1180 .. page 400 / 432
1.1 m Universal .. 1180-1 .. page 399 / 432
1.1 m IP 44 Standard ES 1180 WU .. page 432
LS 1180 .. 1.1 m IP 44 Universal ES 1180-1 WU .. page 433

96
40-103_3870_GB_26_Electronic:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:15 Uhr Seite 97

Automatic switch Light Management

Automatic switch 180 for 2.2 m mounting height


Standard ref.-no.: AS .. 1280 .. and Universal ref-no.: AS .. 1280-1 ..

The 2.20 m automatic switches have a detection field with an opening angle of 180. Detection field approx.
12 x 6 m (tangential approach) or approx. 8 x 4 m (direct approach). Information regarding the range applies
to an installation height of 2.20 m. For different installation heights the nominal range varies.
A greater installation height results in a correspondingly greater detection range. Please note that an
infra-red source at great distance may not radiate enough energy to trigger the automatic switch.
Standard
Brightness setting: approx. 1 ... 200 lx (and day-time operation) Mounting hight 2.20 m
adjustable via teach function
The ambient brightness can be permanently saved as brightness threshold with the aid of the teach function.
As-delivered state approx. 10 Lux.
Shut-off delay: approx. 2 min

approx. 12 m
Locking time: approx. 0.3 ... 4 s
Universal
Brightness setting: approx. 1 ... 200 lx (and day-time operation adjustable
via IR remote control)
Shut-off delay: approx. 10 s ... 60 min
Sensitivity: 25 ... 100 % Detection field
Locking time: approx. 0.3 ... 4 s approx. approx.
Detection angle: approx. 180 6m 6m
Short-time operation
Pulse duration: approx. 0.3 s
Pulse interval: approx. 2.7 s

Ref.-no.

for inserts ref.-no.: 1201 URE, 1201-1 URE, 1202 URE, 1225 SDE,
1240 STE, 1244 NVSE, 1254 TSE, 1254 UDE, 1271 LED DE, 1208 UI
for satellite unit ref.-no.: 1223 NE

for AS and A range


2.2 m Standard AS A 1280 .. page 259 / 295
2.2 m Universal AS A 1280-1 .. page 259 / 295

Sealing kit
for automatic switches 180, mounting height 2.2 m ref.-no.: AS A 1280 .., AS A 1280-1 .. AS A 1280 ..
AS A 50 DS page 259 / 296

for CD range
2.2 m Standard AS CD 1280 .. page 348
2.2 m Universal AS CD 1280-1 .. page 348

for LS range
2.2 m Standard AS .. 1280 .. page 400 / 433 AS CD 1280 ..
2.2 m Universal AS .. 1280-1 .. page 400 / 433

Sealing kit
for automatic switches 180, mounting height 2.2 m ref.-no.: AS CD 1280 / 1280-1 ..,
AS LS 1280 / 1280-1 ..
AS CD 50 DS page 348 / 400

IR Remote control
for automatic switches 180 universal 2.2 m ref.-no.: AS .. 1280-1 .. AS .. 1280 ..
(Spare part)
AS FB IR page 348 / 433

97
40-103_3870_GB_26_Electronic:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:15 Uhr Seite 98

Light Management Automatic switch

Ref.-no.
Ceiling automatic switch
for inserts ref.-no.: 1254 UDE, 1271 LED DE, 1225 SDE, 1240 STE,
1201 URE, 1201-1 URE, 1202 URE, 1254 TSE, 1244 NVSE
for satellite unit ref.-no.: 1223 NE
for pulse unit ref.-no.: 1208 UI
white DAW 360 WW
aluminium (lacquered) DAW 360 AL
Primary application: hallways, sanitary facilities, etc.

Intended use
Automatic switching of lighting depending on the thermal movement and ambient brightness.
Operation with insert for dimming, switching or satellite insert "3-wire"
DAW 360 ..
Ceiling installation on flush-mounted insert
1m 3m 5m
0 2m 4m
Product characteristics
Shut-off delay, sensitivity and brightness threshold adjustable
Test operation for checking the detection area
Pulse operation
Dimming phase in combination with dimming insert
Storing a switch-on brightness with dimming inserts
Manual operation possible with "2-wire" satellite insert or conventional push-button
78 lens segments in 5 detection levels
Extension of the detection area in combination with the "3-wire" satellite insert
Detection area can be limited using cover
The ceiling automatic switch
has a detection area of 360. Dimming phase with dimming insert
The PIR sensor technology If the ceiling automatic switch is fitted on a dimming insert, the lighting is dimmed
operates with 5 detection pla- to minimum brightness after the shut-off delay has elapsed and is then switched off.
nes and 78 lenses. The dimming time is approx. 30 s. If a motion is detected during the dimming phase,
the ceiling automatic switch switches the lighting to the stored switch-on brightness again.

Technical data
Sensor type: PIR (passive infra-red)
Operating temperature: +5 ... +35 C
Switching capacity: depending on insert
3.00 m Detection angle: 360
Number of segments/detection levels: 78 / 5
Installation height for nominal range: approx. 3 m
Range, tangential approach: approx. 10 m
The device has a detection
Range, direct approach: approx. 6 m
area of 20 m x 12 m at an
Shut-off delay: approx. 1 sec test / short-time operation
installation height of 3 m.
approx. 10 sec ... 30 min
The sensitivity depends on
Brightness: approx. 2 ... 80 lx
the direction of movement.
day-time operation
night-time operation
Number of satellite units
Satellite insert 2-wire ref.-no. 1220 NE: unlimited
mechanical push-button (make contact): unlimited
(Not illuminated. If push-button is to be illuminated,
use exclusively push-button with N-terminal!)
Satellite insert 3-wire ref.-no. 1223 NE
connected to Universal dimmer insert: max. 5
connected to other inserts: max. 10
Total length of satellite cable: max. 100 m

98
40-103_3870_GB_26_Electronic:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:15 Uhr Seite 99

Presence detector Light Management

Not suitable for alarm systems

Ref.-no.
Presence detector universal
for inserts ref.-no.: 1254 UDE, 1271 LED DE, 1225 SDE, 1240 STE,
1201 URE, 1201-1 URE, 1202 URE, 1254 TSE, 1244 NVSE
for satellite unit ref.-no.: 1223 NE
for pulse unit ref.-no.: 1208 UI
white PMU 360 WW
aluminium (lacquered) PMU 360 AL
Primary application: desk workplaces, office rooms, etc.

Intended use
Automatic switching of lighting depending on the thermal movement and ambient brightness.
Operation with insert for switching or dimming or "3-wire" satellite insert to expand the detection area.
Ceiling installation on flush-mounted insert.

Product characteristics
Constant light control in combination with dimmer insert
2-point light control in combination with switch insert
Shut-off delay and brightness value settable
Test operation for checking the detection area
Push-on cover for limiting the detection area
Expansion of the detection area in combination with 3-wire satellite insert
Manual switch-on and switch-off possible with 2-wire satellite insert or installation button

Technical data
Detection angle: 360
Nominal range at desk height: approx. 5 m
Nominal range at floor level: approx. 8 m
Installation height for nominal range: approx. 2.5 m
The nominal field of detection varies with different
heights of installation.
Number of segments/detection levels: 80 / 6
Rated voltage: AC 230 V ~, 50 Hz
Shut-off delay: 1 s in the test mode;
approx. 10 s ... 30 min
Brightness: approx. 10 ... 1000 lx

Number of satellite units


Satellite insert 2-wire ref.-no. 1220 NE: unlimited
mechanical push-button (make contact): unlimited
(Not illuminated. If push-button is to be illuminated,
use exclusively push-button with N-terminal!)
Satellite insert 3-wire ref.-no. 1223 NE
connected to Universal dimmer insert: max. 5
connected to other inserts: max. 10
Total length of satellite cable: max. 100 m

Surface-mounted housing
to fix power units for ceiling installation (surface-mounted) of presence detector ref.-no. PMU 360 ..
and ceiling automatic switch ref.-no. DAW 360 ..
white PM-KAPPE
aluminium (lacquered) PM-KAPPE AL
Dimensions: diameter 103 mm, height: 45 mm

99
40-103_3870_GB_26_Electronic:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:15 Uhr Seite 100

Light Management Presence detector

Ref.-no.
Presence detector compact
with integrated relay switch
white PMK 360 WW
aluminium (lacquered) PMK 360 AL
Primary application: desk workplaces, office rooms, etc.
Intended use
Automatic switching of lighting depending on the thermal movement and ambient brightness.
Ceiling installation, surface-mounted

Product characteristics
2-point light control
Shut-off delay and brightness value settable
Test operation for checking the detection area
Push-on cover for limiting the detection area
Parallel connection of multiple presence detectors possible
Manual switch-on and switch-off possible with installation button

Technical data
Detection angle: 360
Nominal range at desk height: approx. 5 m
Nominal range at floor level: approx. 8 m
Installation height for nominal range: approx. 2.5 m
The nominal field of detection varies with
different heights of installation.
Number of segments/detection levels: 80 / 6
Rated voltage: AC 230 V ~, 50 Hz
Shut-off delay: 1 s in the test mode;
approx. 10 s ... 30 min
Brightness: approx. 10 ... 1000 lx
Switch contact: relay, mains potential
Permissible loads
Incandescent lamps: 1000 W
HV halogen lamps: 1000 W
TRONIC transformers: 0750 W
Inductive transformers: 0750 W
Fluorescent lamps
non-compensated: 0500 VA
parallel compensated: 0400 VA
Approvals: VDE
If large areas are to be monitored, it is possible to use up to five presence detectors
together in the same systems.
Important: Energy saving lamps cause high inrush currents which may cause the switch contact to
get stuck. Then a reduction of capacity is required! Please check suitability of lamps before installation.

Protection cage
for ceiling automatic switch ref-no. DAW 360 ..
(Remove push-on cover when installed in surface-mounted housing. Detection range may be reduced.)
for presence detector universal ref.-no. PMU 360 ..
(When installed in surface-mounted housing, the detection range may be reduced.)
for presence detector compact ref.-no.: PMK 360 ..
white SK 180-90 WW
varnished steel with plastic coating
dimensions ( x H): approx. 180 x 90 mm

100
40-103_3870_GB_26_Electronic:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:15 Uhr Seite 101

Timer switch Light Management

Ref.-no.
Timer switch insert
for timer switch displays
ref.-no.: ..5201 DTST.., ..5201 DTU..
201 TE

Technical data
Rated voltage: AC 230 V ~, 50 Hz, neutral line required
Switching capacity
Incandescent lamps: 1000 W
HV halogen lamps: 1000 W
LV halogen lamps with
TRONIC transformer: 0750 W
inductive transformer: 0750 W
Operate inductive transformers with at least 85 % nominal load.
Fluorescent lamps
non-compensated: 0500 VA
parallel compensated (47 F): 0400 VA
lead-lag circuit: 1000 VA
Check lamps for suitability. High inrush currents.
Relay output: 1 floating contact (make contact)
Switching time interval: min. 60 s
Connection: screw terminals
Terminals for: 1 x 2.5 mm2 or 2 x 1.5 mm2
Circuit breaker: max. 16 A
Change-over time: min. 500 ms
Approvals: VDE

Via two separate satellite inputs, the consumer can be switched by a push-button
(mechanical 2-gang push-button insert, 2 make contacts).

Not to be used for disconnecting!

101
40-103_3870_GB_26_Electronic:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:15 Uhr Seite 102

Light Management Timer switch

Ref.-no.
Standard timer switch display
for timer switch insert ref.-no.: 201 TE

Product characteristics
Programming of two switch-on times and two switch-off times each
for the parts of the week Mo-Fr and Sa+Su
Programmed switching times are retained permanently
Display switches off after a power failure, data and time are retained
for a power reserve of approx. 4 hours
Automatic summer/winter time changeover
Accuracy: 1 minute per month
Device components
(1) Display
(2) Buttons
(3) b in display = automatic function OFF
(4) Display field for current time of day
(5) Display field for the status of the switching output
(6) Display field for next switching time for automatic
function, or notice text when setting the time of day.
(7) Memory slot of the switching time, only visible during
programming
Timer with all segments
(8) Function display for the buttons

for AS and A range


A 5201 DTST .. page 260 / 296

A 5201 DTST ..

for CD range
CD 5201 DTST .. page 349

CD 5201 DTST ..

for LS range
.. 5201 DTST .. page 401 / 434

.. 5201 DTST ..

102
40-103_3870_GB_26_Electronic:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:15 Uhr Seite 103

Timer switch Light Management

Ref.-no.
Universal timer switch display
for timer switch insert ref.-no.: 201 TE

Product characteristics
Simple operation via 4-button keypad
2 independent program memories for up to 18 switching times (e.g. 9 ON and 9 OFF)
Factory-programmed switching times in two program memories (A, B)
Timer function (automatic shut-off after a preset time)
Random function
Astro function
Summer/winter time change-over by key operation
Individual astro function by astro time shift
Actuation via satellite insert possible
Reset to factory default settings possible
Power reserve: Programs permanently saved. Current data (time, month, date, day)
stored up to 24 hours (maintenance-free and without batteries)
Accuracy: 1 minute per month
Interval between 2 switchings: 1 minute min.

for AS and A range


A 5201 DTU .. page 260 / 296

A 5201 DTU ..

for CD range
CD 5201 DTU .. page 349

CD 5201 DTU ..

for LS range
.. 5201 DTU .. page 401 / 434

.. 5201 DTU ..

103
Just Smart -
Radio retrofitting in electrical installations
JUNG eNet is the smart bidirectional radio system for controlling lighting, blinds, and shutters. Ideally
suited for retrofitting, it provides smart networking and centralised control of building functions. The
system features fast installation, easy operation, high flexibility and is future-proof. Using JUNG eNet,
building technology is easily networked, lighting and blinds are easily incorporated into scenarios and

Light switching Blinds and


and dimming shutter control

Operation with hand-held Operation with wall


transmitter transmitter
Remote controlled functions and scenes: The hand- The wall mounting transmitter 1 to 4-gang can
held transmitter with display inform about the current interact with each actuator of the system. Control
switching status. Other variants with 2 or 4 channels commands are transmitted wireless for light or
or a toggle transmitter are also available. shade; including scene function.

Zwiti_eNet_2015_GB.indd 8 27.02.15 14:05


s
conveniently operated through control panels. With the JUNG eNet server, this can be done with just
a monitor or mobile, tablet or Smartphone. Even system design and commissioning can be carried out
quickly and easily.

eNet
Scene setting Monitoring energy
and operation consumption

Operation with computer, tablet and smartphone

The regulation of eNet and the entire house technology is simple intuitive with the JUNG user interface for computers,
tablets and smartphones. Scroll, select and control via touchscreen with the highest ease of use.

Zwiti_eNet_2015_GB.indd 9 27.02.15 14:05


104-135_3870_GB_26_eNet:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:17 Uhr Seite 106

eNet Transmitter

Ref.-no.
Radio hand-held transmitter
1-channel Toggle
anthracite FM HS 1 T
Intended use
Radio hand transmitter for radio transmission of switching, dimming,
and blind movement commands
Operation with radio actuators from the eNet system

Product characteristics Change of direction for moving blind: Press the button for longer
One button for switching and dimming a channel than 1 second.
Status indication with LED Change of direction for stationary blind: First, press the button for
Battery-powered device less than 1 second,
Signalling of transmission errors can be switched off then press the button for longer than 1 second.
Can be set with eNet server Stopping the blind: Press the button for less than 1 second.
Scenes: All On, All Off, individual scenes Adjusting the blind: Press the button for less than 1 second.
Operation locks Operating push-button actuator
Supplementary functions with eNet server Buttons: The load is switched on for the duration of the button-
Update of the device software press.
Reading of error memory The maximum actuation length is 60 seconds.
Operating light Technical data
Switching: Press the button for less than 0.4 seconds. Rated voltage: DC 3 V
Dimming: Press the button for longer than 0.4 seconds. Battery type: 1 x lithium CR 2450N
The dimming process ends when the button is released. (included)
Switching on at minimum brightness: Press the button for longer Ambient temperature: 5 ... +45 C
than 0.4 seconds. Dimensions (L x W x H): 55 x 40.5 x 15 mm
Operating blind Radio frequency: 868.3 MHz
Moving the Venetian blind: Press the button for longer than Transmitting power: max. 20 mW
1 second. Transmission range in free field: typical 100 m

Radio hand-held transmitter


2-channel
anthracite FM HS 2
Product characteristics
Two adjacent buttons each belong to one channel
Status indication with LED
Switch-on brightness of dimmer actuators can be saved
Battery-powered device
Scenes, radio hand transmitter, 2x: All Off, three individual scenes
Signalling of transmission errors can be switched off
Can be set with eNet server
Master dimming function
Scene All On
Operation locks
Supplementary functions with eNet server
Update of the device software
Reading of error memory
Technical data
Rated voltage: DC 3 V
Battery type: 1 x lithium CR 2450N (included)
Ambient temperature: 5 ... +45 C
Dimensions (L x W x H): 55 x 40.5 x 15 mm
Radio frequency: 868.3 MHz
Transmitting power: max. 20 mW
Transmission range in free field: typical 100 m

106
104-135_3870_GB_26_eNet:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:17 Uhr Seite 107

Transmitter eNet

Ref.-no.
Radio hand-held transmitter
4-channel
anthracite FM HS 4

Intended use
Hand transmitter for radio transmission of switching, dimming,
blind movement and scene commands
Operation with radio actuators from the eNet system

Product characteristics Recalling scenes


Two adjacent buttons each belong to one channel Press the scene button briefly.
Status indication with LED
Switch-on brightness of dimmer actuators can be saved Changing scene
Battery-powered device Press the scene button briefly.
Scenes, radio hand transmitter, 4x: All Off, seven individual Actuators switch to the saved scene.
scenes Setting a new scene.
Signalling of transmission errors can be switched off Press scene button for longer than 4 seconds.
Actuators first switch to the old scene and save the new scene
Can be set with eNet server after 4 seconds.
Master dimming function
Scene All On Save switch-on brightness
Operation locks With dimmer actuators a brightness value can be saved to which
the dimmer actuator switches after a short button press.
Supplementary functions with eNet server The buttons of a channel are set as channel buttons.
Update of the device software Set required switch-on brightness.
Reading of error memory Press both buttons of a channel simultaneously for longer than
4 seconds.
Operating light The light is briefly switched off and switched on again to the
Switching: Press the button for less than 0.4 seconds. switch-on brightness. Switch-on brightness is saved.
Dimming: Press the button for longer than 0.4 seconds.
The dimming process ends when the button is released. Polling sum status
Switching on dimmer actuators at minimum brightness: The buttons of a channel are set as channel buttons.
Press the right-hand button for longer than 0.4 seconds. Press both buttons of a channel simultaneously for 1 to 4 seconds.
Switching on dimmer actuators at minimum brightness Signalling of radio transmission and group status.
and dimming to maximum brightness: Press the left-hand
button for longer than 0.4 seconds. Technical data
Rated voltage: DC 3 V
Operating blind Battery type: 1 x lithium CR 2450N
Moving the blind: Press the button for longer than (included)
1 second. Ambient temperature: 5 ... +45 C
Stopping or adjusting the blind: Press the button Dimensions (L x W x H): 93 x 53 x 15.5 mm
for less than 1 second. Radio frequency: 868.3 MHz
Transmitting power: max. 20 mW
Operating push-button actuator Transmission range in free field: typical 100 m
Push-button: The load is switched on for the duration
of the button-press.

107
104-135_3870_GB_26_eNet:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:17 Uhr Seite 108

eNet Transmitter

Ref.-no.
Radio hand-held transmitter with display
24-channel
anthracite FM HS D 24

Intended use
Hand transmitter for radio transmission of switching, dimming,
blind movement and scene commands
Operation with radio actuators from the eNet system

Product characteristics Operating push-button actuator


LC display for user guidance Press the right or left button:
Menu buttons with changing assignments, depending on The load is switched on for the duration of the button-press.
the menu context
Navigation buttons for orientation in the menu Recalling scenes
Three freely-configurable button pairs Press the scene button briefly.
Status LED to display the transmission status Actuators switch to the saved scene values.
10 lists for the compilation of favourite functions
16 scenes Changing scene
All On and All Off Press the scene button briefly.
Lock-out protection for shutters or blinds Actuators switch to the saved scene value.
Restraint function Set new scene values.
Master dimming function Press scene button for longer than 4 seconds.
Operation with rechargeable battery Actuators first switch to the saved scene value and save
(LIR 2477, in the scope of delivery) the new scene value after 4 seconds.
Charging the battery with or without charging cradle
(ref.-no.: FM HS TF) or USB charging device Dimming a scene
Charging cable included in the scope of delivery The dimmer actuators in a recalled scene can be dimmed,
although the brightness differences between the individual
Supplementary functions can be activated via eNet server dimmer actuators remain.
Operation locks The master dimming function must be assigned to a rocker.
Update of the device software (only with power supply connected) Recall a scene - either using the scene menu or a button.
Dim brighter: Long press of the left master dimming button.
Operating light Dim darker: Long press of the right master dimming button.
Switch on: Brief press of left button.
Switch off: Brief press of right button. Technical data
Dim brighter: Long press of left button. Rated voltage: DC 3.6 V
The dimming process ends when the button isreleased. Battery type (rechargeable): 1 x lithium LIR 2477 (included)
Dim darker: Long press of right button. Dimensions (L x W x H): 131 x 67 x 17 mm
The dimming process ends when the button is released. Ambient temperature: 5 ... +45 C
Radio frequency: 868.3 MHz
Operating blind Transmitting power: max. 20 mW
Move blind upwards: Long press of left button. Transmission range in free field: typical 100 m
Move blind downwards: Long press of right button.
Stop or adjust blind: Short press of right or left button.

Docking station
for hand-held transmitter with display ref.-no.: FM HS D 24
anthracite FM HS TF
With charging function. Connection via USB cable e.g. to USB charger ref.-no. 521-2 USB

108
104-135_3870_GB_26_eNet:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:17 Uhr Seite 109

Transmitter eNet

Ref.-no.
Universal radio transmitter
2-channel
FM US 2 UP
Intended use
Transmitter for radio communication of switching, dimming, blind movement and scene commands
Activation by push-button, switch, blind push-button, blind switch or other devices with push-button
contact or switching contact
Mounting in appliance box according to DIN 49073
Mounting in surface-mounted housing or built-in housing (ref.-no. FM-EBG) for false ceilings

Product characteristics Operating blind


Detection of voltage levels and changes on the input Move blind: Long press on button.
Settable transmission behaviour Stop or adjust blind: Short press on button.
Connection for signal lamp e.g. for connection of push-buttons Operating push-button actuator
with separate signal contact (ref.-no. 534 U) Push-button: The load is switched on for the duration
Display of transmission status with status LED or signal lamp of the button-press.
Operating modes, settable with operating mode switch Recalling scenes
1-gang switching/dimming/blind Press button briefly.
1-gang automatic function Actuators switch to the saved scene value.
2-gang switching/dimming/push-button Changing scene
2-gang automatic function Press button briefly.
Can be set with eNet server Actuators switch to the saved scene value.
Scenes: All On, All Off, individual scenes Set new scene values.
2-gang blind Press the button for longer than 4 seconds.
Operation locks Actuators first switch to the saved scene value and save
Setup connections enabled/disabled the new scene value after 4 seconds.
Status for restraint Save switch-on brightness
Repeater function With dimmer actuators a brightness value can be saved to which
Update device software the actuator switches after a short button press.
One and two-button operation Only for two button operation.
The operation of functions or electrical consumers depends Set required switch-on brightness.
on the application and the connected components. Press both buttons simultaneously for longer than 4 seconds.
The operation of the usual switching function follows if switches The light is briefly switched off and switched on again to the
are connected. switch-on brightness. Switch-on brightness is saved.
Two operating modes are used when push-buttons
are connected Technical data
Single button operation lighting: Switching lighting on or off Rated voltage: AC 110 ... 230 V ~, 50/60 Hz
or dimming it brighter/darker takes place alternately when the Stand-by power: 0.5 W
appropriate button is pressed repeatedly. Ambient temperature: 25 ... +70 C
Two button operation lighting: Two buttons form a function pair. Inputs
Pressing the left button switches or dims lighting on or brighter, Cable length: max. 100 m
pressing the right one switches it off or makes it darker. Input current at rated voltage: approx. 2 mA
Single button operation blind: Upward or downward movement Signal duration: min. 200 ms
takes place alternately when the appropriate button is pressed Signal lamp output
repeatedly. Rated voltage: AC 110 ... 230 V ~
Two button operation blind: Two buttons form a function pair. Output current: 40 mA
Pressing the left button moves a blind upwards, pressing the right Connection mode: screw terminals
one moves it downwards. single wire: 0.75 ... 4 mm2
Status indication stranded with ferrule: 0.75 ... 2.5 mm2
Status LED/signal lamp on: transmission active Dimensions ( x H): 53 x 23 mm
Status LED/signal lamp flashes quickly for 5 seconds: Radio frequency: 868.3 MHz
transmission faulty Transmitting power: max. 20 mW
Operating light Transmission range in free field: typical 100 m
Switch: Short press on button.
Dim: Long press on the button.
The dimming process ends when the button is released.

109
104-135_3870_GB_26_eNet:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:17 Uhr Seite 110

eNet Transmitter
Adapter frames are included in delivery:
ref.-no. LS 4 AR for LS range (pre-mounted) and ref.-no. CD 4 AR for CD range.
AS / A ranges without adapter frame.
Can not be combined with frames in Flat Design.

Ref.-no.
Radio transmitter modules

Intended use
Radio sensor for transmission of switching, dimming,
blind movement and scene commands
Operation with radio actuators from the eNet system
Product characteristics
Each button is "divided" into an upper and lower half
belonging to a channel
Display of the actuator status for status poll by a
green LED per channel
Display of the transmission status by a red LED
Switch-on brightness of dimmer actuators can be saved. Operation and
Battery-powered device channel assignment
Signalling of transmission errors can be switched off
Can be set with eNet server
Master dimming function
Scene All On
Operation locks
Supplementary functions with eNet server
Update of the device software
Technical data
Rated voltage: DC 3 V
Battery type: 1 x lithium CR 2450N (included)
Ambient temperature: 5 ... +45 C
Transmission range in free field: typical 100 m
Radio frequency: 868.3 MHz
Transmitting power: max. 20 mW

Radio transmitter module 1-channel


for cover kit 1-gang, complete, ref.-no.: .. 401 TSA ..
for cover 1-gang with symbols, ref.-no.: .. 401 TSAP ..
1 green LED: actuator status
1 red LED: transmission status
FM 4001 M

Radio transmitter module 2-channel


for cover kit 2-gang, complete, ref.-no.: .. 402 TSA ..
for cover 2-gang with symbols, ref.-no.: .. 402 TSAP ..
2 green LED: actuator status
1 red LED: transmission status
FM 4002 M

Radio transmitter module 3-channel


for cover kit 3-gang, complete, ref.-no.: .. 403 TSA ..
for cover 2-gang with symbols, ref.-no.: .. 402 TSAP ..
for cover 4-gang with symbols, ref.-no.: .. 404 TSAP ..
3 green LED: actuator status
1 red LED: transmission status
FM 4003 M

Radio transmitter module 4-channel


for cover kit 4-gang, complete, ref.-no.: .. 404 TSA ..
for cover 4-gang with symbols, ref.-no.: .. 404 TSAP ..
4 green LED: actuator status
1 red LED: transmission status
FM 4004 M

110
104-135_3870_GB_26_eNet:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:17 Uhr Seite 111

eNet

Ref.-no.
Radio converter in SCHUKO housing
FM GATE 1 ZS NA
Intended use
Control of eNet actuators by Radio Management transmitters
Control of Radio Management actuators by eNet transmitters
Mounting on SCHUKO (only for indoor use)

Product characteristics
Reception of Radio Management commands and conversion into eNet commands
Reception of eNet commands and conversion into Radio Management commands
24 transmitter channels from both systems can be connected
Scene 1 to scene 5 from both systems can be recalled and changed
All On and All Off can be recalled from both systems
Master dimming function

Supplementary functions with eNet server


Update of the device software
Repeater function
Reading of error memory

Technical data
Rated voltage: AC 230 V ~, 50/60 Hz
Rated load current: 16 A
Power consumption: max. 1 W
Ambient temperature: 5 ... +45 C
Dimensions (W x H x D): 57 x 127 x 78 mm
eNet radio data
Radio frequency: 868.3 MHz
Transmitting power: max. 20 mW
Transmission range in free field: typical 100 m
Radio Management radio data
Carrier frequency: 433.42 MHz (ASK)
Transmitting power: max. 10 mW
Transmission range in free field: typical 100 m

Radio repeater
FM R 100 SG WW
Intended use
Receiving and repeating eNet radio telegrams
Extending the range of radio transmitters and actuators
Operation in SCHUKO sockets indoors

Product characteristics
Repeating of all received radio telegrams or only of selected radio transmitters and actuators
125 transmitters/actuators can be connected
Two repeaters are cascadable
Signalling of telegram repetitions, status LED flashes for 50 ms

Technical data
Rated voltage: AC 230 V ~, 50/60 Hz
Rated load current: 16 A
Ambient temperature: 5 ... +45 C
Dimensions (W x H x D): 57 x 127 x 78 mm
Radio frequency: 868.3 MHz
Transmission range in free field: typical 100 m
Transmitting power: max. 20 mW

111
104-135_3870_GB_26_eNet:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:17 Uhr Seite 112

eNet

IP Protection level IP 44 ensured


P Colour printing possible
L Laser labelling possible

Ref.-no.
Radio centre plate (eNet)
for inserts ref.-no.: 1201 URE, 1201-1 URE, 1202 URE, 1225 SDE,
1240 STE, 1244 NVSE, 1254 TSE, 1254 UDE, 1271 LED DE

Intended use
Manual and radio-controlled operation of suitable flush-mounted inserts
for switching or dimming
Mounting on flush-mounted insert
Operation with suitable radio transmitters

Product characteristics
Evaluation of satellites
Scene operation possible
Status indication with LED
Status feedback to radio transmitter
Switch-on brightness can be saved permanently when combined
with flush-mounted inserts for dimming

Can be set with eNet server


Maximum brightness
Minimum brightness
Dimming speed
Switch-on delay / switch-off delay
Dim up/dim down ramp
Switch-off warning
Operation locks
Continuous on, Continuous off
Hotel function
Run-on time
Light control
Status LED can be switched off

Supplementary functions with eNet server


Update of the device software
Reading of error memory

for AS range
Duroplastic (scratch-proof) glossy
ivory P FM AS 1561.07
white P FM AS 1561.07 WW

for A range
Duroplastic (scratch-proof) glossy
white P FM A 1561.07 WW
black FM A 1561.07 SW
Duroplastic lacquered
aluminium P L FM A 1561.07 AL
champagne P FM A 1561.07 CH
mocha FM A 1561.07 MO
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
white L FM A 1561.07 BF WW
black L FM A 1561.07 BF SW
Thermoplastic (breakproof) lacquered
matt anthracite FM A 1561.07 BF ANM

112
104-135_3870_GB_26_eNet:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:17 Uhr Seite 113

eNet

Ref.-no.
Radio centre plate (eNet)

for CD range
Duroplastic (scratch-proof) glossy
ivory P FM CD 1561.07
white P FM CD 1561.07 WW
brown FM CD 1561.07 BR
grey FM CD 1561.07 GR
light grey P FM CD 1561.07 LG
black FM CD 1561.07 SW
metal versions (anodized aluminium)
gold-bronze L FM CD 1561.07 GB
platinum L FM CD 1561.07 PT

for SL range
white FM SL 1561.07 WW
gold-bronze FM SL 1561.07 GB
black FM SL 1561.07 SW

for the LS range


Duroplastic (scratch-proof) glossy
ivory P FM LS 1561.07
white P FM LS 1561.07 WW
light grey P FM LS 1561.07 LG
black FM LS 1561.07 SW

metal versions
aluminium P L FM AL 1561.07
stainless steel L FM ES 1561.07
anthracite (aluminium lacquered) L FM AL 1561.07 AN
dark (aluminium lacquered) L FM AL 1561.07 D
chrome FM GCR 1561.07
gold-coloured FM GO 1561.07
gold-plated FM LS 1561.07 GGO
classic brass P FM ME 1561.07 C
antique brass FM ME 1561.07 AT

113
104-135_3870_GB_26_eNet:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:17 Uhr Seite 114

eNet

Ref.-no.
Radio centre plate for blinds control (eNet)
for motor control inserts ref.-no.: 230 ME, 232 ME and 224 ME

Intended use
Manual and radio-controlled operation of electrically-driven blinds, shutters and awnings
Operation with suitable radio transmitters
Mounting on blind insert

Product characteristics
Positioning of the blind/shutter via scene request
Position for sun protection and twilight
Status feedback to radio transmitter
Blind/shutter running time can be saved
Status indicator via LED

Can be set with eNet server


Slat change-over time/fabric-stretching time
Change-over-time for direction change
Running direction invertible
Operation locks
Deactivating satellite evaluation
Position for sun protection, twilight, lock-out protection and wind alarm

Supplementary functions with eNet server


Update of the device software
Reading of error memory

Operation
Operation is performed directly on the device or on a connected satellite.
Moving the blind
Press top or bottom button for longer than one second.
The blind/shutter moves in the desired direction to the end position or stops
when the button is pressed again.
The status LED lights up as long as the blind/shutter is activated.
Adjusting the slats
Press top or bottom button for less than one second.
A moving blind/shutter is stopped and a stationary blind/shutter is briefly activated.

for AS range
Duroplastic (scratch-proof) glossy
ivory FM AS 5232
white FM AS 5232 WW

for A range
Duroplastic (scratch-proof) glossy
white FM A 5232 WW
black FM A 5232 SW
Duroplastic lacquered
aluminium FM A 5232 AL
champagne FM A 5232 CH
mocha FM A 5232 MO
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
white FM A 5232 BF WW
black FM A 5232 BF SW
Thermoplastic (breakproof) lacquered
matt anthracite FM A 5232 BF ANM

114
104-135_3870_GB_26_eNet:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:17 Uhr Seite 115

eNet

Ref.-no.
Radio centre plate for blinds control (eNet)

for CD range
Duroplastic (scratch-proof) glossy
ivory FM CD 5232
white FM CD 5232 WW
brown FM CD 5232 BR
grey FM CD 5232 GR
light grey FM CD 5232 LG
black FM CD 5232 SW
metal versions (anodized aluminium)
gold-bronze FM CD 5232 GB
platinum FM CD 5232 PT

for SL range
white FM SL 5232 WW
gold-bronze FM SL 5232 GB
black FM SL 5232 SW

for the LS range


Duroplastic (scratch-proof) glossy
ivory FM LS 5232
white FM LS 5232 WW
light grey FM LS 5232 LG
black FM LS 5232 SW

metal versions
aluminium FM AL 5232
stainless steel FM ES 5232
anthracite (aluminium lacquered) FM AL 5232 AN
dark (aluminium lacquered) FM AL 5232 D
chrome FM GCR 5232
gold-coloured FM GO 5232
classic brass FM ME 5232 C
antique brass FM ME 5232 AT

115
104-135_3870_GB_26_eNet:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 18:31 Uhr Seite 116

eNet

Ref.-no.
Radio brightness detector, solar-powered
FM FS 1 S
Intended use
Sensor for brightness-dependent control of eNet actuators
Mounting on window panes in indoor areas

Product characteristics
Triggers scenes when the set sun protection and twilight value is exceeded or undershot
Temperature-dependent sun protection possible
Scene buttons for sun protection and twilight
Brightness measurement via brightness sensor
Sends brightness values to the eNet server if brightness changes more than 50 %
Test operation for adjusting protection and temperature threshold
Solar-powered device
Integrated battery as energy store

Can be set with eNet server:


Operation locks
Behaviour of actuators when a scene is removed

Supplementary functions with eNet server:


Update of the device software
Reading of error memory

Sun protection
The sun protection function allows automatic lowering of a blind/shutter in strong sunlight.
If a set sun protection value is exceeded for more than 2 minutes, the sun protection sensor
transmits the "Sun protection" scene and the blinds move to their previously saved sun
protection position. If the brightness falls below the set sun protection value for longer than
15 minutes, then the blind/shutter will move upwards again.

Sun protection, temperature-dependent


Temperature-dependent sun protection can primarily be used in the colder months of the year.
The shading of the interior is triggered when the set temperature value is exceeded, in addition to the
sun protection value. After triggering the sun protection, the temperature evaluation is deactivated.

Twilight
When darkness begins, the twilight function allows automatic lowering of a blind/shutter
or lighting switching. If the set twilight value is undershot for more than 4 minutes, the "Twilight"
scene is opened. If the set twilight threshold is exceeded for approx. 15 minutes, the blind/shutter
moves upwards or the lighting switches. To allow the blind/shutter to move upwards automatically,
also at dawn, position the sun sensor so that it is not in the shadow of the blind/shutter.

Technical data
Ambient temperature: 5 ... +45 C
Brightness setting: 4 000 ... 80 000 lx
Twilight setting: 12 ... 4 000 lx
Temperature setting: +15 ... +40 C (and OFF)
Charging time: approx. 30 minutes at min. 10 000 lx
Dimensions ( x H): 75 x 27 mm
Radio frequency: 868.3 MHz
Transmitting power: max. 20 mW
Transmission range: approx. 100 m (free field)

116
104-135_3870_GB_26_eNet:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:17 Uhr Seite 117

eNet

Ref.-no.
Radio energy detector
FM ES 3680 UP
Intended use
Energy sensor for radio transmission of voltage, current and energy values
Operation with eNet server
Installation in appliance box according to DIN 49073
Mounting in surface-mounted housing or built-in housing (ref.-no. FM-EBG) for false ceilings

Product characteristics
Detection of current and voltage of the connected consumer
Calculation of the active, reactive, apparent power and the active energy
Event or time-controlled transmission of measured value telegrams to the eNet server
Update of the device software

Technical data
Rated voltage: AC 230 V ~, 50/60 Hz
Rated load current: 16 A
Peak current (1 s): 80 A
Peak current (1 min): 24 A
Power consumption: max. 0.5 W
Transmission interval: 1 ... 60 min
Ambient temperature: 25 ... +70 C
Connection: screw terminals
single wire: 0.75 ... 4 mm2
stranded with ferrule: 0.75 ... 2.5 mm2
Dimensions ( x H): 53 x 23 mm
Radio frequency: 868.3 MHz
Transmitting power: max. 20 mW
Transmission range in free field: typical 100 m
Measuring ranges
Current: 0 mA ... 16 A
Accuracy (current): 0.5 % of the current value and 8 mA
Voltage: 207 ... 250 V
Accuracy (voltage): 0.5 % of the current value
Transmitted power and energy values
Active power: 4000 ... 4000 W
Apparent power: 0 ... 4000 VA
Reactive power: 4000 ... 4000 var
Accuracy (power): 0.5 % of the current value and 2 W/VA/var
Active energy: 99999 ... 99999 kWh

117
104-135_3870_GB_26_eNet:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:17 Uhr Seite 118

eNet

Ref.-no.
Radio energy detector in SCHUKO housing
FM ES 3680 ZS
Intended use
Energy sensor for radio transmission of voltage, current and energy values
Operation with eNet server

Product characteristics
Detection of current and voltage of the connected consumer
Calculation of the active, reactive, apparent power and the active energy
Event or time-controlled transmission of measured value telegrams to the eNet server
Update of the device software

Technical data
Rated voltage: AC 230 V ~, 50/60 Hz
Rated load current: 16 A
Peak current (1 s): 80 A
Peak current (1 min): 24 A
Power consumption: max. 0.5 W
Transmission interval: 1 ... 60 min
Ambient temperature: 5 ... +45 C
Dimensions (W x H x D): 57 x 127 x 78 mm
Radio frequency: 868.3 MHz
Transmitting power: max. 20 mW
Transmission range in free field: typical 100 m
Measuring ranges
Current: 0 mA ... 16 A
Accuracy (current): 0.5 % of the current value and 8 mA
Voltage: 207 ... 250 V
Accuracy (voltage): 0.5 % of the current value
Transmitted power and energy values
Active power: 4000 ... 4000 W
Apparent power: 0 ... 4000 VA
Reactive power: 4000 ... 4000 var
Accuracy (power): 0.5 % of the current value and 2 W/VA/var
Active energy: 99999 ... 99999 kWh

118
104-135_3870_GB_26_eNet:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:17 Uhr Seite 119

eNet

Ref.-no.
Radio energy detector, 4-channel, for rail mounting
FM ES 36804 REG
Intended use
Energy sensor to determine voltage, current and energy values
Transfer of the measured values to the eNet server
Operation with power supply (ref.-no. NT 1220 REG VDC) and receiver module
(ref.-no. FM FK 32 REG) or eNet server
Installation in distribution boxes on DIN rail according to DIN EN 60715

Product characteristics
Detection of the current and voltage of four separate circuits
Separate calculation of the active, reactive, apparent power and the active energy
for each measuring channel
Event or time-controlled transmission of measured value telegrams to the eNet server
Update of the device software

Technical data
Rated voltage: AC 230 V ~, 50/60 Hz
Rated load current: 16 A
Peak current (1 s): 80 A
Peak current (1 min): 24 A
Power consumption per channel: 225 mW
Ambient temperature: 5 ... +45 C
Transmission interval: 1 ... 60 min
Connection of load terminals: screw terminals
single wire: 1.5 ... 4 mm2
stranded without ferrule: 0.75 ... 4 mm2
stranded with ferrule: 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2
Mounting width: 72 mm (4 rail units)
Bus line
Rated voltage: DC 12 V SELV
Current consumption: 10 mA
Connection bus: terminal
Cable length: max. 3 m
Measuring ranges per channel
Current: 0 mA ... 16 A
Accuracy (current): 0.5 % of the current value and 8 mA
Voltage: 207 ... 250 V
Accuracy (voltage): 0.5 % of the current value
Transmitted power and energy values
Active power: 4000 ... 4000 W
Apparent power: 0 ... 4000 VA
Reactive power: 4000 ... 4000 var
Accuracy (power): 0.5 % of the current value and 2 W/VA/var
Active energy: 99999 ... 99999 kWh

119
104-135_3870_GB_26_eNet:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:17 Uhr Seite 120

eNet

Ref.-no.
Radio switch actuator, 1-channel
FM AS 10 UP
Intended use
Switching of lighting
Operation with suitable eNet radio transmitters
Installation in appliance box according to DIN 49073
Installation in surface-mounted housing or panel-mounted housing (ref.-no. FM-EBG)
for suspended ceilings

Product characteristics
Operating mode switch for: switch/push-button actuator or parameterisation
via eNet server
Status feedback to radio transmitter
Scene operation possible
Switchable output with Prog button
Status indicator via LED

Operating mode "Switch"


Switch-on telegram: Device switches on
Switch-off telegram: Device switches off

Operating mode "Push-button"


Relay contact remains closed as long as ON or OFF telegrams
are being received
The maximum switch-on time is 60 seconds
Can be set with eNet server:
Flash function
Run-on time
Switch-on delay / switch-off delay
Operation as NO or NC contacts
Switch-off warning
Minimum switching repeat time
Operation locks
Continuous on, Continuous off

Supplementary functions with eNet server


Update of the device software
Repeater function
Reading of error memory

120
104-135_3870_GB_26_eNet:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:17 Uhr Seite 121

eNet

Ref.-no.
Radio switch actuator with floating contact, 1-channel
FM AS PF 10 UP

Intended use Technical data


Switching of lighting Rated voltage: AC 230 V ~,
Operation with suitable eNet radio transmitters 50/60 Hz
Installation in appliance box according to Ambient temperature: 25 ... +70 C
DIN 49073 Switching current at 35 C
Installation in surface-mounted housing or ohmic: 16 A (AC1)
panel-mounted housing (ref.-no. FM-EBG) For switching current
for suspended ceilings > 10 A connecting cable 2.5 mm2
Fluorescent lamps: 4 AX
Product characteristics Min. switching current AC: 100 mA
Operating mode switch for: switch/push-button Contact type:
actuator or parameterisation via eNet server Stand-by power: 0.5 W
Status feedback to radio transmitter Connected load at 35 C
Scene operation possible Incandescent lamps: 2300 W
Switchable output with Prog button HV halogen lamps: 2000 W
Status indicator via LED TRONIC transformers: 1500 W
inductive transformers: 1000 VA
Operating mode "Switch" HV LED lamps: typical 500 W
Switch-on telegram: Device switches on Compact fluorescent lamps: typical 500 W
Switch-off telegram: Device switches off Fluorescent lamps
non-compensated: 920 VA
Operating mode "Push-button" capacitive load: 690 VA (560 F)
Relay contact remains closed as long as ON or Connection mode: screw terminals
OFF telegrams are being received single wire: 0.75 ... 4 mm2
The maximum switch-on time is 60 seconds stranded with ferrule: 0.75 ... 2.5 mm2
Dimensions ( x H): 53 x 28 mm
Can be set with eNet server Radio frequency: 868.3 MHz
Flash function Transmitting power: max. 20 mW
Run-on time Transmission range
Switch-on delay / switch-off delay in free field: typical 100 m
Operation as NO or NC contacts
Switch-off warning
Minimum switching repeat time
Operation locks
Continuous on, Continuous off

Supplementary functions with eNet server


Update of the device software
Repeater function
Reading of error memory

121
104-135_3870_GB_26_eNet:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:17 Uhr Seite 122

eNet

Ref.-no.
Radio switch actuator, 2-channel
FM AS 26 UP

Intended use Technical data


Switching of lighting and motors Rated voltage: AC 230 V ~,
Operation with suitable eNet radio transmitters 50/60 Hz
Installation in appliance box according to Ambient temperature: 25 ... +70 C
DIN 49073 Switching current at 35 C
Installation in surface-mounted housing or ohmic: 16 A (AC1)
panel-mounted housing (ref.-no. FM-EBG) For switching current
for suspended ceilings > 10 A connecting cable 2.5 mm2
Current carrying capacity
Product characteristics of device: 16 A
Operating mode switch for: switch/push-button Fluorescent lamps: 4 AX
actuator together for both outputs or para- Min. switching current AC: 100 mA
meterisation via eNet server Contact type:
Independent switching of two electrical loads Stand-by power: max. 0.5 W
Status feedback to radio transmitter Connected load per output at 35 C
Scene operation possible Incandescent lamps: 2300 W
Status indicator via LED HV halogen lamps: 2000 W
TRONIC transformers: 1500 W
Operating mode "Switch" inductive transformers: 1000 VA
Switch-on telegram: Device switches on HV LED lamps: typical 500 W
Switch-off telegram: Device switches off Compact fluorescent lamps: typical 500 W
Fluorescent lamps
Operating mode "Push-button" non-compensated: 920 VA
Relay contact remains closed as long as ON or Motors: 450 VA
OFF telegrams are being received capacitive load: 690 VA (560 F)
The maximum switch-on time is 60 seconds Connection mode: screw terminals
single wire: 0.75 ... 4 mm2
Can be set with eNet server for each output stranded with ferrule: 0.75 ... 2.5 mm2
Flash function Dimensions ( x H): 53 x 28 mm
Run-on time Radio frequency: 868.3 MHz
Switch-on delay / switch-off delay Transmitting power: max. 20 mW
Operation as NO or NC contacts Transmission range
Switch-off warning in free field: typical 100 m
Minimum switching repeat time
Operation locks
Continuous on, Continuous off

Supplementary functions with eNet server


Update of the device software
Repeater function
Reading of error memory

122
104-135_3870_GB_26_eNet:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:17 Uhr Seite 123

eNet

Ref.-no.
Radio blinds actuator
FM J 50700 UP

Intended use Technical data


Controlling electrically driven blinds, shutters Rated voltage: AC 230 V ~,
and awnings 50/60 Hz
Operation with suitable eNet radio transmitters Ambient temperature: 25 ... +70 C
Installation in appliance box according to Minimum actuation time in operating mode
DIN 49073 Blind: 0.1 s
Installation in surface-mounted housing or Shutter: 0.3 s
panel-mounted housing (ref.-no. FM-EBG) Min. switching current AC: 100 mA
for suspended ceilings Contact type:
Stand-by power: max. 0.5 W
Product characteristics Running time: 1 ... 600 s
Operating mode switch for the selection of blind Running time default setting: 120 s
actuator, shutter actuator or parameterisation via Slat adjusting time: 0 ... 10 s
eNet server Connected load
Positioning of the blind and slats via scene recall Motors: 1000 W
Position for sun protection and twilight can be Connection mode: screw terminals
saved single wire: 0.75 ... 4 mm2
Status feedback to radio transmitter stranded with ferrule: 0.75 ... 2.5 mm2
Switchable output with Prog button Dimensions ( x H): 53 x 28 mm
Blind/shutter running time can be saved Radio frequency: 868.3 MHz
Slat change-over time can be saved Transmitting power: max. 20 mW
Fabric-stretching for awnings Transmission range
Status indicator via LED in free field: typical 100 m

Can be set with eNet server


Change-over-time for direction change
Running direction invertible
Operation locks
Position for sun protection, twilight,
lock-out protection and wind alarm

Supplementary functions with eNet server


Update of the device software
Repeater function
Reading of error memory

123
104-135_3870_GB_26_eNet:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:17 Uhr Seite 124

eNet

Ref.-no.
Radio LED universal dimmer
FM UD 20250 UP

Intended use Technical data


Switching and dimming of incandescent lamps, Rated voltage: AC 230 V ~,
HV halogen lamps and Tronic-Transformers with 50/60 Hz
halogen lamps or dimmable inductive transformers Power loss: max. 1.5 W
with halogen or LED lamps, HV-LED lamps and Stand-by power: max. 0.5 W
compact fluorescent lamps Ambient temperature: 25 ... +70 C
Operation with suitable radio transmitters Connected load at 45 C
Mounting in appliance box according to DIN 49073 Power specifications including
in combination with a suitable cover transformer power dissipation.
Installation in surface-mounted housing or Operate inductive transformers
panel-mounted housing (ref.-no. FM-EBG) with at least 85 % nominal load.
for suspended ceilings For ohmic-inductive mixed load, maximum 50 %
proportion of ohmic load. Otherwise incorrect
Product characteristics calibration of the dimmer may result.
Switch-on via lamp-saving soft start Incandescent lamps: 20 ... 250 W
Switch-on brightness can be saved permanently HV halogen lamps: 20 ... 250 W
Minimum brightness can be saved permanently TRONIC transformers: 20 ... 250 W
Scene operation possible Inductive transformers: 20 ... 250 VA
Status indication with LED Dimmable HV LED lamps: typical 3 ... 70 W
Status feedback to radio transmitter Dimmable compact
Switchable with Prog button fluorescent lamps: typical 3 ... 70 W
Electronic short-circuit protection with permanent ohmic-inductive: 20 ... 250 VA
switch-off after 7 seconds at the latest ohmic-capacitive: 20 ... 250 W
Electronic over-temperature protection capacitive-inductive: not permitted
Automatic or manual setting of the dimming Reduction of load for every 5 C
principle suitable for the load exceededing 45 C: 5 %
Power extension possible by means of amplifier. for installation into wooden
Do not connect any HV-LED lamps or compact or hollow walls: 15 %
fluorescent lamps in combination with amplifier. for installation into multiple
combinations: 20 %
Can be set with eNet server Amplifiers: see amplifier
Maximum brightness instructions
Dimming speed Connection mode: screw terminals
Switch-on delay / switch-off delay single wire: 0.75 ... 4 mm2
Dim up/dim down ramp stranded with ferrule: 0.75 ... 2.5 mm2
Switch-off warning Contact type:
Operation locks Total length power cable: max. 100 m
Continuous on, Continuous off Dimensions ( x H): 53 x 28 mm
Hotel function Radio frequency: 868.3 MHz
Run-on time Transmitting power: max. 20 mW
Light control Transmission range
in free field: typical 100 m
Supplementary functions with eNet server
Update of the device software
Repeater function
Reading of error memory

124
104-135_3870_GB_26_eNet:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:17 Uhr Seite 125

eNet

Ref.-no.
Radio push-button controller 1 10 V
FM ST 50 UP

Intended use Technical data


Switching and brightness setting of luminaires Rated voltage: AC 230 V ~,
with 1 10 V interface 50/60 Hz
Operation with suitable radio transmitters Stand-by power: max. 0.5 W
Mounting in appliance box according to DIN 49073 Ambient temperature: 25 ... +70 C
in combination with a suitable cover Contact type:
Installation in surface-mounted housing or Control voltage: 0.5 ... 11 V
panel-mounted housing (ref.-no. FM-EBG) Control current: max. 50 mA
for suspended ceilings Switching current
ohmic: 6A
Product characteristics Fluorescent lamps: 3 AX
Switch-on brightness can be saved permanently Min. switching current: 100 mA
Minimum brightness can be saved permanently Connected load
Scene operation possible ohmic load: 1380 W
Status indicator of the 1 10 V subscribers capacitive load: 690 VA (560 F)
via LED Connection mode: screw terminals
Status feedback to radio transmitter single wire: 0.75 ... 4 mm2
1 10 V subscribers switchable with Prog button stranded with ferrule: 0.75 ... 2.5 mm2
1 10 V interface is protected against reverse Dimensions ( x H): 53 x 28 mm
polarity Total length power cable: max. 100 m
Total length of control cable: max. 100 m
Can be set with eNet server Radio frequency: 868.3 MHz
Maximum brightness Transmitting power: max. 20 mW
Dimming speed Transmission range
Switch-on delay / switch-off delay in free field: typical 100 m
Dim up/dim down ramp
Switch-off warning
Operation locks
Continuous on, Continuous off
Hotel function
Run-on time
Light control

Supplementary functions with eNet server


Update of the device software
Repeater function
Reading of error memory

125
104-135_3870_GB_26_eNet:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:17 Uhr Seite 126

eNet

Ref.-no.
Radio DALI gateway
FM STD 8 UP

Intended use Technical data


Switching and brightness setting of DALI luminaires Rated voltage: AC 230 V ~,
Operation with suitable radio transmitters 50/60 Hz
Mounting in appliance box according to DIN 49073 Power consumption: max. 2 W
in combination with a suitable cover Ambient temperature: 25 ... +70 C
Installation in surface-mounted housing or DALI system voltage: DC 16 V
panel-mounted housing (ref.-no. FM-EBG) Output current: max. 24 mA
for false ceilings Number of DALI devices: max. 12
Reduction of load
Product characteristics Number of DALI devices
Electronic short-circuit protection of the DALI over 45 C: max. 8
supply with permanent switch-off after 8 seconds Number of control units
Electronic over-temperature protection of the in parallel: max. 6
DALI supply with self-retain Connection: screw terminals
DALI supply for a maximum of 12 subscribers single wire: 0.75 ... 4 mm2
Parallel switching of up to 6 DALI control units with stranded with ferrule: 0.75 ... 2.5 mm2
the option of supplying up to 72 DALI subscribers Dimensions ( x H): 53 x 28 mm
Switch-on brightness can be saved permanently Radio frequency: 868.3 MHz
Minimum brightness can be saved permanently Transmitting power: max. 20 mW
Scene operation possible Transmission range
Status indication with LED in free field: typical 100 m
Status feedback to radio transmitter
DALI ballast is switchable with Prog button

Can be set with eNet server


Maximum brightness
Dimming speed
Switch-on delay / switch-off delay
Dim up/dim down ramp
Switch-off warning
Operation locks
Continuous on, Continuous off
Hotel function
Run-on time
Light control

Supplementary functions with eNet server


Update of the device software
Repeater function
Reading of error memory

126
104-135_3870_GB_26_eNet:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:17 Uhr Seite 127

eNet

Ref.-no.
Installation box
FM-EBG
The housing is equipped with a strain relief and a cover for the
contact terminals. It enables the installation of flush mounting
actuators into false ceilings or on DIN rails.
Dimensions: 97 x 53 x 36 mm

Master receiver for rail mounting


Rail mounting device, 2 rail units
FM FK 32 REG
Intended use
Radio receiver for rail mounted actuators
Operation with power supply, ref.-no.: NT 1220 REG VDC
Mounting on DIN rail according to EN 60715 in distribution boxes
Product characteristics
Integrated antenna
External antenna (ref.-no.: FM ANT) can additionally be connected
to improve radio reception, e.g. in metallic distribution boxes
Technical data
Rated voltage: DC 12 V SELV
Current consumption: typical 15 mA
Ambient temperature: 5 ... +45 C
Protection class: III
Mounting width: 36 mm (2 rail units)
Number of RMD modules: max. 32
Connection bus: terminal
Cable length: max. 3 m
Cable type: J-Y(St)Y 2 x 2 x 0.8 mm2
Radio frequency: 868.3 MHz
Radio range: typical 100 m
Transmitting power: max. 20 mW

Antenna
FM ANT
Intended use
The antenna with magnetic pedestal supplements the integrated antenna
of the master receiver for rail mounting and eNet server to improve radio
reception, e.g. in metallic distribution boxes
Technical data
Antenna length: 17 cm
Cable length: 2.7 m
Connection: SMB connector
Radio frequency: 868.3 MHz

127
104-135_3870_GB_26_eNet:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:17 Uhr Seite 128

eNet

Ref.-no.
Power supply for rail mounting
for master receiver ref.-no.: FM FK 32 REG and eNet server ref.-no.: ENET-SERVER
Rail mounting device, 2 rail units
NT 1220 REG VDC
Technical data
Input voltage: AC 100 ... 240 V ~, 50/60 Hz
Input current: 505 mA
Output voltage: DC 12 V
Output current: 2A
Mounting width: 36 mm (2 rail units)
Connection: screw terminals

Radio switch actuator for rail mounting, 1-channel


Rail mounting device, 2 rail units
FM AS 16 REG

Intended use Technical data


Switching of lighting Rated voltage: AC 230 V ~,
Operation with suitable eNet radio transmitters 50/60 Hz
Operation with power supply Ambient temperature: 5 ... +45 C
(ref.-no. NT 1220 REG VDC) and master receiver Switching current at AC 230 V ~
(ref.-no. FM FK 32 REG) or eNet server ohmic: 16 A
Installation in distribution boxes on DIN rail For switching current
according to EN 60715 > 10 A connecting cable 2.5 mm2
Fluorescent lamps: 4 AX
Product characteristics Min. switching current AC: 100 mA
Operating mode switch for: switch/push-button Contact type:
actuator or parameterisation via eNet server Stand-by power: max. 0.2 W
Status feedback to radio transmitter Connected load
Scene operation possible Incandescent lamps: 2300 W
Switchable output with Prog button HV halogen lamps: 2000 W
Status indicator via LED TRONIC transformers: 1500 W
HV LED lamps: typical 500 W
Operating mode "Switch" Compact fluorescent lamps: typical 500 W
Switch-on telegram: Device switches on inductive transformers: 1000 VA
Switch-off telegram: Device switches off Fluorescent lamps
non-compensated: 920 VA
Operating mode "Push-button" capacitive load: 690 VA (560 F)
Relay contact remains closed as long as ON Connection, outputs: screw terminals
or OFF telegrams are being received single wire: 1.5 ... 4 mm2
The maximum switch-on time is 60 seconds stranded without ferrule: 0.75 ... 4 mm2
stranded with ferrule: 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2
Can be set with eNet server Mounting width: 36 mm (2 rail units)
Flash function Bus line
Run-on time Rated voltage: DC 12 V SELV
Switch-on delay / switch-off delay Current consumption: max. 20 mA
Operation as NO or NC contacts Connection bus: terminal
Switch-off warning Cable length: max. 3 m
Minimum switching repeat time
Operation locks
Continuous on, Continuous off

Supplementary functions with eNet server


Update of the device software
Reading of error memory

128
104-135_3870_GB_26_eNet:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:17 Uhr Seite 129

eNet

Ref.-no.
Radio switch/blinds actuator, 8/4-channel, for rail mounting
Rail mounting device, 4 rail units
FM AS 816 REG
Intended use Technical data
Switching of lighting Rated voltage: AC 230 V ~,
Switching of single-phase fan motors 50/60 Hz
Controlling electrically driven blinds, shutters and Ambient temperature: 5 ... +45 C
awnings Switching voltage: AC 250 V ~
Operation with suitable eNet radio transmitters Minimum actuation time in operating mode
Operation with power supply Blind: 0.1 s
(ref.-no. NT 1220 REG VDC) and master receiver Shutter: 0.3 s
(ref.-no. FM FK 32 REG) or eNet server Running time: 1 ... 600 s
Installation in distribution boxes on DIN rail Running time default setting: 120 s
according to EN 60715 Slat adjusting time: 0 ... 10 s
Product characteristics Switching current per output for AC 230 V ~
Operating mode switch for switch-over of switch ohmic: 16 A (AC1)
actuator, push-button actuator, blind actuator, For switching current
shutter actuator or configuration via eNet server > 10 A connecting cable 2.5 mm2
Status feedback to radio transmitter Fluorescent lamps: 4 AX
Scene operation possible Switching current neighbouring
Outputs switchable with Prog button load outputs: 20 A
Status indicator of the outputs via LED Current carrying capacity
Operating mode "Switch" of device: max. 80 A
Switch-on telegram: Device switches on Min. switching current AC: 100 mA
Switch-off telegram: Device switches off Contact type:
Operating mode "Push-button" Stand-by power: max. 0.5 W
Relay contact remains closed as long as ON or Connected load per output:
OFF telegrams are being received Motors: 1000 W
The maximum switch-on time is 60 seconds Incandescent lamps: 2300 W
Operating mode "Venetian blind/Rolling shutter" HV halogen lamps: 2000 W
Positioning of the blind and slats via scene recall TRONIC transformers: 1500 W
Position for sun protection and twilight inductive transformers: 1000 VA
Blind/shutter running time can be saved HV LED lamps: typical 500 W
Slat change-over time can be saved Compact fluorescent lamps: typical 500 W
Fabric-stretching for awnings Fluorescent lamps
Can be set in the operating mode non-compensated: 920 VA
"Switch/Push-button" with eNet server capacitive load: 690 VA (560 F)
Operating mode for each output can be Connection, outputs: screw terminals
set separately single wire: 1.5 ... 4 mm2
Flash function stranded without ferrule: 0.75 ... 4 mm2
Run-on time stranded with ferrule: 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2
Switch-on delay / switch-off delay Mounting width: 72 mm (4 rail units)
Operation as NO or NC contacts Bus line
Switch-off warning Rated voltage: DC 12 V SELV
Minimum switching repeat time Current consumption: 60 mA
Operation locks Connection bus: terminal
Continuous on, Continuous off Cable length: max. 3 m
Can be set in the operating mode "Venetian
blind/Rolling shutter" with eNet server
Change-over-time for direction change
Running direction invertible
Operation locks
Position for sun protection, twilight,
lock-out protection and wind alarm
Supplementary functions with eNet server
Update of the device software
Reading of error memory

129
104-135_3870_GB_26_eNet:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:17 Uhr Seite 130

eNet

Ref.-no.
Radio blinds actuator for rail mounting
Rail mounting device, 2 rail units
FM J 50700 REG

Intended use Technical data


Controlling electrically driven blinds, shutters Rated voltage: AC 230 V ~,
and awnings 50/60 Hz
Operation with suitable eNet radio transmitters Ambient temperature: 5 ... +45 C
Operation with power supply Minimum actuation time in operating mode
(ref.-no. NT 1220 REG VDC) and master receiver Blind: 0.1 s
(ref.-no. FM FK 32 REG) or eNet server Shutter: 0.3 s
Installation in distribution boxes on DIN rail Min. switching current AC: 100 mA
according to EN 60715 Contact type:
Stand-by power: max. 0.2 W
Product characteristics Running time: 1 ... 600 s
Operating mode switch for switch-over to blind Running time default setting: 120 s
actuator, shutter actuator or parameterisation via Slat adjusting time: 0 ... 10 s
eNet server Connected load
Positioning of the blind and slats via scene recall Motors: 1000 W
Position for sun protection and twilight can be Connection of load terminals: screw terminals
saved single wire: 1.5 ... 4 mm2
Status feedback to radio transmitter stranded without ferrule: 0.75 ... 4 mm2
Switchable output with Prog button stranded with ferrule: 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2
Blind/shutter running time can be saved Mounting width: 36 mm (2 rail units)
Slat change-over time can be saved Bus line
Fabric-stretching for awnings Rated voltage: DC 12 V SELV
Status indicator via LED Current consumption: max. 20 mA
Connection bus: terminal
Can be set with eNet server Cable length: max. 3 m
Change-over-time for direction change
Running direction invertible
Operation locks
Position for sun protection, twilight,
lock-out protection and wind alarm

Supplementary functions with eNet server


Update of the device software
Reading of error memory

130
104-135_3870_GB_26_eNet:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:17 Uhr Seite 131

eNet

Ref.-no.
Radio LED universal dimmer for rail mounting, 1-channel
Rail mounting device, 2 rail units
FM UD 5500 REG

Intended use Technical data


Switching and dimming of incandescent lamps, Rated voltage: AC 230 V ~,
HV halogen lamps and Tronic-Transformers with 50/60 Hz
halogen lamps or dimmable inductive transformers Power loss: max. 4 W
with halogen or LED lamps, HV-LED lamps and Stand-by power: max. 0.3 W
compact fluorescent lamps Ambient temperature: 5 ... +45 C
Operation with power supply Connected load at 35 C
(ref.-no. NT 1220 REG VDC) and master receiver Power specifications including transformer
(ref.-no. FM FK 32 REG) or eNet server power dissipation.
Operation with suitable radio transmitters Operate inductive transformers with at least
Installation in distribution boxes on DIN rail 85 % nominal load.
according to EN 60715 For ohmic-inductive mixed load, maximum
50 % proportion of ohmic load. Otherwise
Product characteristics incorrect calibration of the dimmer may result.
Switch-on via lamp-saving soft start Incandescent lamps: 20 ... 500 W
Switch-on brightness can be saved permanently HV halogen lamps: 20 ... 500 W
Minimum brightness can be saved permanently TRONIC transformers: 20 ... 500 W
Scene operation possible Inductive transformers: 20 ... 500 VA
Status indication with LED Dimmable HV LED lamps: typical 3 ... 100 W
Status feedback to radio transmitter Dimmable compact
Switchable with Prog button fluorescent lamps: typical 3 ... 100 W
Electronic short-circuit protection with permanent ohmic-inductive: 20 ... 500 VA
switch-off after 7 seconds at the latest ohmic-capacitive: 20 ... 500 W
Electronic over-temperature protection capacitive-inductive: not permitted
Automatic or manual setting of the dimming Reduction of load for every
principle suitable for the load 5 C exceededing 35 C: 5 %
Power extension possible by means of amplifier Amplifiers: see amplifier
Do not connect any HV-LED lamps or compact instructions
fluorescent lamps in combination with amplifier. Connection, outputs: screw terminals
single wire: 1.5 ... 4 mm2
Can be set with eNet server stranded without ferrule: 0.75 ... 4 mm2
Maximum brightness stranded with ferrule: 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2
Dimming speed Contact type:
Switch-on delay / switch-off delay Length of output cable,
Dim up/dim down ramp per channel: max. 100 m
Switch-off warning Mounting width: 36 mm (2 rail units)
Operation locks Bus line
Continuous on, Continuous off Rated voltage: DC 12 V SELV
Hotel function Current consumption: 10 mA
Run-on time Connection bus: terminal
Light control Cable length: max. 3 m

Supplementary functions with eNet server


Update of the device software
Reading of error memory

131
104-135_3870_GB_26_eNet:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 18:38 Uhr Seite 132

eNet

Ref.-no.
Radio LED universal dimmer for rail mounting, 4-channel
Rail mounting device, 8 rail units
FM UD 420250 REG

Intended use Technical data


Switching and dimming of incandescent lamps, Rated voltage: AC 230 V ~,
HV halogen lamps and Tronic-Transformers with 50/60 Hz
halogen lamps or dimmable inductive transformers Power loss: max. 8 W
with halogen or LED lamps, HV-LED lamps and Stand-by power: max. 1.2 W
compact fluorescent lamps Ambient temperature: 5 ... +45 C
Operation with power supply Connected load per output at 45 C
(ref.-no. NT 1220 REG VDC) and master receiver Power specifications including transformer
(ref.-no. FM FK 32 REG) or eNet server power dissipation.
Operation with suitable radio transmitters Operate inductive transformers with at least
Installation in distribution boxes on DIN rail 85 % nominal load.
according to EN 60715 For ohmic-inductive mixed load, maximum
50 % proportion of ohmic load. Otherwise
Product characteristics incorrect calibration of the dimmer may result.
Switch-on via lamp-saving soft start Max. load for outputs connected in parallel
Switch-on brightness for each output can be is limited to 95 %.
saved permanently The minimum load of parallel switching
Minimum brightness for each output can be of load outputs is 250 VA.
saved permanently Incandescent lamps: 20 ... 250 W
Scene operation possible HV halogen lamps: 20 ... 250 W
Status indicator of the outputs via LED TRONIC transformers: 20 ... 250 W
Status feedback to radio transmitter Inductive transformers: 20 ... 250 VA
Outputs switchable with Prog button Dimmable HV LED lamps: typical 3 ... 50 W
Increase in output power possible through Dimmable compact
parallel switching of multiple outputs fluorescent lamps: typical 3 ... 50 W
Electronic short-circuit protection with permanent ohmic-inductive: 20 ... 250 VA
switch-off after 7 seconds at the latest ohmic-capacitive: 20 ... 250 W
Electronic over-temperature protection capacitive-inductive: not permitted
Automatic or manual setting of the dimming Amplifiers: see amplifier
principle suitable for the load instructions
Power extension possible by means of amplifier Connection, outputs: screw terminals
Do not connect any HV-LED lamps or compact single wire: 1.5 ... 4 mm2
fluorescent lamps in combination with amplifier. stranded without ferrule: 0.75 ... 4 mm2
stranded with ferrule: 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2
Can be set with eNet server Contact type:
Maximum brightness Length of output cable,
Dimming speed per channel: max. 100 m
Switch-on delay / switch-off delay Mounting width: 144 mm (8 rail units)
Dim up/dim down ramp Bus line
Switch-off warning Rated voltage: DC 12 V SELV
Operation locks Current consumption: 10 mA
Continuous on, Continuous off Connection bus: terminal
Hotel function Cable length: max. 3 m
Run-on time
Light control

Supplementary functions with eNet server


Update of the device software
Reading of error memory

132
104-135_3870_GB_26_eNet:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:17 Uhr Seite 133

eNet

Ref.-no.
eNet server
Rail mounting device, 6 rail units
including plug-in power supply (ref.-no. ST NT 12 VDC) for provisional operation at construction site
ENET-SERVER
Intended use
Commissioning, diagnosis and maintenance of eNet installations via PC, tablet or laptop
Operation of eNet installations via PC, smartphone, tablet or laptop
Radio receiver for eNet RMD modules
Operation only with approved power supply
Mounting on DIN rail according to EN 60715 in distribution boxes with power supply RMD
(ref.-no. NT 1220 REG VDC)
Mobile use of the eNet server with plug-in power supply (ref.-no. ST NT 12 VDC)

Product characteristics
Internal eNet radio and WLAN antenna
External eNet radio and WLAN antennas for extending the radio ranges can additionally
be connected
LEDs for signalling
Buttons for construction site mode and restart of the eNet server
Electrical separation between the connections of the external antennas and the
Ethernet connection

Technical data
Rated voltage: DC 12 V SELV
Current consumption: 400 mA
Power consumption
Operation: max. 6 W
Stand-by: max. 2 W
Ambient temperature: 5 ... +45 C
Storage/transport temperature: 20 ... +70 C
Relative humidity: 20 ... 70 % (no condensation)
Protection class: III
Mounting width: 108 mm (6 rail units)
Connection, power supply: terminal
LAN: RJ45 socket 8-pin
WLAN antenna, external: SMB connector
Bus line
Cable length: max. 3 m
Number of RMD modules: max. 32
IP communication
LAN: 10/100 Mbit/s Ethernet
WLAN: 2.4 GHz, IEEE 802.11g
IP connections: max. 8
eNet communication
Radio frequency: 868.3 MHz
Transmission range in free field: typical 100 m
Transmitting power: max. 20 mW

133
104-135_3870_GB_26_eNet:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:17 Uhr Seite 134

eNet

Ref.-no.
Plug-in power supply 12 V
(Spare part)
ST NT 12 VDC
Technical data
Rated voltage: AC 230/240 V ~, 50/60 Hz
Output voltage: DC 12 V
Output current: max. 1 A
Primary current: max. 130 mA
Connected load: 12 W
Efficiency: approx. 80 %
Ambient temperature: +5 ... +25 C

WLAN antenna
FM WLAN ANT
Technical data
Radio frequency: 2.4 GHz

Radio signal quality meter


FM DT
Product characteristics
Display of the signal quality of a selected eNet device using LEDs
Display of the signal quality of status messages using LEDs
Display of radio signals of non-eNet radio transmitters in the 868.3 MHz frequency band using LEDs
Switch-on, switch-off of the repeater functions of network-operated actuators, transmitters and
energy sensors
Battery operation with one included lithium button cell (CR 2450N)
Devices switches off after 5 minutes without actuation
Technical data
Rated voltage: DC 3 V
Battery type: 1 x lithium CR 2450N (included)
Ambient temperature: 5 ... +45 C
Radio frequency: 868.3 MHz
Transmission range in free field: max. 100 m
Transmitting power: max. 20 mW

134
104-135_3870_GB_26_eNet:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:17 Uhr Seite 135

eNet

Ref.-no.
Radio IP gateway
FM-GATE-IP
Intended use
Gateway for the operation of eNet switching, dimming and blind actuators
via tablet PC or smartphone
Operation with USB power supply
Operation with WiFi router or access point, which support DHCP
(Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol), or with fixed IP address
Only for indoor operation

Product characteristics
Up to 5 tablet PCs or smartphones can be simultaneously connected to the gateway
Status LED to display the state of operation
20 lists for the compilation of favourite functions
24 channels for the operation of eNet actuators
16 scenes
Update of the device software via tablet PC or smartphone
Wall bracket
Operation with fixed IP address

Function dependent on the app used


All On and All Off
Lock-out protection for shutters or blinds
Restraint function
Master dimming function

Supplementary functions can be activated via eNet server


Operation locks

Supplementary function with eNet server


Reading of error memory

Technical data
Rated voltage: DC 5 V
Current consumption: typical 150 mA
Ambient temperature: 0 ... +45 C
Dimensions (L x W x H): 80 x 76 x 25.5 mm
Connection USB: micro socket
LAN: RJ45 socket 8-pin
Radio frequency: 868.3 MHz
Transmitting power: max. 20 mW
Transmission range in free field: typical 100 m

135
Blinds centre plates

Centre plate Centre plate with Centre plate with Centre plate with Centre plate with Centre plate with
Standard radio receiver memory function memory function standard timer universal timer
eNet

Inserts

Motor control insert Standard Motor control insert Motor control insert
Standard 230 V~ Universal 230 V~ Universal 24 V DC

For the connection of a 230 V motor. For the connection of a 230 V motor. For the connection of a 24 V motor.
The device has no satellite input and Additional shutter control devices for Additional shutter control devices for
therefore represents a cost effective group and central operation can be group and central operation can be
solution for single applications. connected via satellite inputs. connected via satellite inputs.

Each motor control insert can be combined with one of the shown centre plates.

Zwiti_JalousieManagement_2015_GB.indd 10 27.02.15 14:07


Management
Blinds

Blinds Management
Products and systems for the convenient control of blinds and shutters. With the various components
and connection possibilities the Blinds Management offers solutions for all requirements. Whether it is
done mechanically, electronically, automatically or by radio JUNG has just the right solution.

Zwiti_JalousieManagement_2015_GB.indd 11 27.02.15 14:07


136-146_3870_GB_26_Jalousie:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:19 Uhr Seite 138

Blinds Management Motor control inserts

Ref.-no.
Motor control insert
Universal AC 230 V ~
232 ME

Technical data
Rated voltage: AC 230 V ~, 50 Hz, neutral line required
Switching capacity: max. 1 motor 1000 W
Relay output: 2 make contacts, interlocked
Connection: screw terminals
Terminals for: 2 x 2.5 mm2 or 1 x 4 mm2
Approvals: VDE
The motor control insert enables the control of one motor with limit position switch up to
a maximum of 1000 VA. Please observe the information given by the motor manufactures.
The insert can be extended with inserts of the Blinds Management system or mechanical
push-button inserts.

Motor control insert


Universal DC 24 V
224 ME

Technical data
Rated voltage: DC 24 V 10 %
Switching capacity: max. 3 A
Relay output: 2 change-over relays in a reversing polarity circuit
Connection: screw terminals
Terminals for: 2 x 2.5 mm2 or 1 x 4 mm2
The motor controller insert enables the control of one or more motors (parallel connection)
with a total current of 3 A. The motor controller insert requires a power supply unit for
24 V DC SELV. A protected separation between primary and secondary side of the power
supply unit must be ensured. Please observe the information given by the motor manufactures.

Motor control insert


Standard AC 230 V ~
230 ME

Technical data
Rated voltage: AC 230 V ~, 50 Hz, neutral line required
Switching capacity: max. 1 motor 1000 W
Relay output: 2 make contacts, interlocked
Connection: screw terminals
Terminals for: 2 x 2.5 mm2 or 1 x 4 mm2
Approvals: VDE
No satellite operation possible.
The motor control insert enables the control of one motor with limit position switch up to
a maximum of 1000 VA. Please observe the information given by the motor manufactures.

138
136-146_3870_GB_26_Jalousie:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 18:43 Uhr Seite 139

Centre plates Blinds Management

Ref.-no.
Centre plate with anti lock-out function
for motor control inserts ref.-no.: 230 ME, 232 ME and 224 ME

The centre plate with activated anti lock-out function assures, that nobody can be
shut out by automatic blinds (e.g. wind, alarm, brightness sensor, timer).
A blind/shutter position can be set. The blind/shutter will stop at the desired position.

Function
Short touch: UPPER or LOWER touch area for adjusting the slats, blind/shutter will be
moved for the period the push-button is held, stopping the continuous moving
Longer touch: LOWER touch area for continuous move downwards
Longer touch (> 4 sec.): FULL touch area for activating the storing mode, UPPER touch
area for activating the anti lock-out function (illuminated LED) A 5232 (S) ..
Short touch: UPPER touch area for deactivating the anti lock-out function".
After mains failures the anti lock-out function is also deactivated.

for AS and A range


AS 5232 .. page 260
ABAS 5232 .. page 260
A 5232 .. page 296
for CD range CD 5232 (S) ..
CD 5232 .. page 349
for SL range
SL 5232 .. page 377
for LS range
.. 5232 .. page 401 / 434

SL 5232 ..

Centre plate with anti lock-out function and sensor connection


for motor control inserts ref.-no.: 230 ME, 232 ME and 224 ME
LS 5232 (S) ..
Same functions as centre plate witout sensor connection, ref.-no.: .. 5232 ..

Sun protection: A sunlight sensor permits automatic lowering of the blind/shutter dependent on sunshine.
The potentiometer on the reverse side of the centre plate enables the setting of the brightness value between
approx. 5,000 and approx. 80,000 lux. Factory setting: 15,000 lux

for AS and A range AL 5232 (S) AN


AS 5232 S .. page 260
A 5232 S .. page 297
for CD range
CD 5232 S .. page 349
for LS range
.. 5232 S .. page 401 / 434

ES 5232 (S)

139
136-146_3870_GB_26_Jalousie:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:19 Uhr Seite 140

Blinds Management Centre plates

Ref.-no.
Radio centre plate for blinds control (eNet)
for motor control inserts ref.-no.: 230 ME, 232 ME and 224 ME

Product characteristics
Positioning of the blind/shutter via scene request
Position for sun protection and twilight
Status feedback to radio transmitter
Blind/shutter running time can be saved
Status indicator via LED
Operation
Operation is performed directly on the device, with a connected satellite or remote controlled.
Moving the blind
FM A 5232 .. Press top or bottom button for longer than one second.
The blind/shutter moves in the desired direction to the end position or stops when
the button is pressed again.
The status LED lights up as long as the blind/shutter is activated.
Adjusting the slats
Press top or bottom button for less than one second.
A moving blind/shutter is stopped and a stationary blind/shutter is briefly activated.

FM CD 5232 .. for AS and A range


FM AS 5232 .. page 260
FM A 5232 .. page 297
for CD range
FM CD 5232 .. page 350
for SL range
FM SL 5232 .. page 377
for LS range
FM SL 5232 ..
FM .. 5232 .. page 401 / 435

Centre plate with memory function and sensor connection


for motor control inserts ref.-no.: 230 ME, 232 ME and 224 ME

Function
The centre plate with memory function enables the individual storing of one up and one down operation time.
.. 5232 MS .. These two blind operation times are repeated every 24 hour.
This provides comfortable, automatic blinds control which can, for example, be used for presence simulation.
Short touch (< 1 sec.): UPPER or LOWER touch area for adjusting the slats, blind/shutter will be moved
for the period the push button is held, stopping the continuous moving
Longer touch (> 1 sec.): LOWER touch area for continuous moving downwards UPPER touch area for
continuous moving upwards
Longer touch (> 3.5 sec.): Storing of the up or down operation time.
Longer touch (> 8 sec.): Switching between manual and memory mode
AL 5232 MS Sun protection: A sunlight sensor permits automatic lowering of the blind/shutter
dependent on sunshine.
The factory setting of the brightness value is approx. 15,000 lux

for AS and A range


AS 5232 MS .. page 261
A 5232 MS .. page 297
for CD range
ES 5232 MS CD 5232 MS .. page 350
for SL range
SL 5232 MS .. page 377
for LS range
.. 5232 MS .. page 401 / 435

140
136-146_3870_GB_26_Jalousie:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:19 Uhr Seite 141

Centre plates Blinds Management

Ref.-no.
Centre plate with timer function "standard"
for motor control inserts ref.-no.: 230 ME, 232 ME and 224 ME

Function:
The blinds/shutter are controlled with the button (moving upwards)
and the button (moving downwards).
Short operation (up to 1 sec.): The blind remains in motion for the duration of the
push-button action.
This function is used to adjust the louvres of the blind.
Long operation (at least 1 sec.): Shutter control remains locked for approx. 2 min.
i.e. "continuous operation".

A "fast programming function" enables the individual storing of one up and one down
operation time. These two blind operation times are repeated every 24 hours.
A 5232 ST ..
Product characteristics:
Easy operation with 4 keys
Programming without insert possible
Switching time blocks Mo Fr 1 x UP, 1 x DOWN
Switching time blocks Sa Su: 1 x UP, 1 x DOWN
Fast programming function
Factory-programmed switching times
Running reserve > 6 hrs. with charge storage capacitor

CD 5232 ST ..
for AS and A range
A 5232 ST .. page 261
for CD range
CD 5232 ST .. page 297
for SL range
SL 5232 ST .. page 350
for LS range
.. 5232 ST .. page 402 / 435
SL 5232 ST ..

LS 5232 ST ..

141
136-146_3870_GB_26_Jalousie:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:19 Uhr Seite 142

Blinds Management Centre plates

Ref.-no.
Centre plate with timer function "universal"
for motor control inserts ref.-no.: 230 ME, 232 ME and 224 ME

Function:
The blinds/shutter are controlled with the button (moving upwards)
and the button (moving downwards).
Short operation (up to 1 sec.): The blind remains in motion for the duration of the
push-button action.
This function is used to adjust the louvres of the blind.
Long operation (at least 1 sec.): Blind or shutter remains operated for approx. 2 min.
i.e. "continuous operation".

A 5232 T3 .. The device enables the individual storing of one up and one down operation time.
These two blind operation times are repeated every 24 hour.
This provides comfortable, automatic blinds control which can be used for
presence simulation.

Product characteristics
Simple operation with four key
Display of the next moving time
CD 5232 T3 .. Three memory programs for a total of up to 18 switching times
Factory-programmed switching times in two memory programs
Random function
Astro function
Individual Astro function with Astro time shift
Random and Astro functions can be combined
Automatic summer/winter time switching
Individual motor operating times adjustable
SL 5232 T3 ..
Programmed switching times are permanently safe.
Actual data (time, month, date, day) safe up to 24 hours (no attendance and
no back-up batteries required).
Wind alarm function via extension unit (only with motor control insert ME 232)

for AS and A range


A 5232 T3 .. page 261
.. 5232 T3 .. for CD range
CD 5232 T3 .. page 298
for SL range
SL 5232 T3 .. page 351
for LS range
.. 5232 T3 .. page 402 / 435

AL 5232 T3

ES 5232 T3

142
136-146_3870_GB_26_Jalousie:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:19 Uhr Seite 143

Centre plates Blinds Management

Ref.-no.
Centre plate with timer function "universal" and sensor connection
for motor control inserts ref.-no.: 230 ME, 232 ME and 224 ME

Same functions as centre plate "universal" (without sensor connection),


ref.-no.: .. 5232 T3 ..

Brightness sensor:
Sun protection (evaluates indoor or outdoor sensor)
Separate running time can be stored when outdoor sensor is used
Dusk/dawn function: automatic move-down of the blind/shutter at dusk
(at the earliest 2 hours before astro time, at the latest at the programmed time)
and automatic move-up of the blind/shutter at dawn (at the earliest at the
programmed time, at the latest 2 hours after astro time) A 5232 TS3 ..
Delay function: automatic move-down of the blind/shutter at dusk but at the
earliest at the programmed time. Automatic move-up of the blind/shutter at
dawn but at the latest at the programmed time

for AS and A range


A 5232 TS3 .. page 261
for CD range CD 5232 TS3 ..
CD 5232 TS3 .. page 298
for SL range
SL 5232 TS3 .. page 351
for LS range
.. 5232 TS3 .. page 402 / 435

SL 5232 TS3 ..

.. 5232 TS3 ..

143
136-146_3870_GB_26_Jalousie:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:19 Uhr Seite 144

Blinds Management Decoupling relays

Ref.-no.
Decoupling relay
TR-S
For blinds control in case more than one motor should be connected to a mechanical
switch/push-button or a motor control insert. The relay is designed for two drives.
Technical data
Mains voltage: AC 230 V ~, 50 Hz
Control: AC 230 V ~, 50 Hz
Switching capacity: 4 A, AC 230 V ~
cos 0.8 ind.
Duty cycle: 100 %
Protection level: IP 44

Decoupling relay for rail mounting


Rail mounting device, 2.5 rail units
TR-S REG
For blinds control in case more than one motor should be connected to a mechanical
switch/push-button or a motor control insert. The relay is designed for two drives.
Technical data
Mains voltage: AC 230 V ~, 50 Hz
Control: AC 230 V ~, 50 Hz
Switching capacity: 4 A, AC 230 V ~
cos 0.8 ind.
Duty cycle: 100 %

Decoupling relay, flush-mounted


TR-SUP
For blinds control in case more than one motor should be connected to a mechanical
switch/push-button or a motor control insert. The relay is designed for two drives.
Decoupling relay for flush-mounting in wall box (deep wall box recommended).
Technical data
Mains voltage: AC 230 V ~, 50 Hz
Control: AC 230 V ~, 50 Hz
Switching capacity: 4 A, AC 230 V ~ cos 0.8 ind.
Duty cycle: 100 %

Motor 2

PE

N
10 5
M2
9 4
M2 Z
8 3 10
Z M2
5
7 2
N 9 4
M1 M2 Z
6 1 8 3
M1 L1 Z
7 2
N
M1
6 1
M1 L1
PE

Motor 1

PE N L1
230 V ~

Connection of TR-SUP

144
136-146_3870_GB_26_Jalousie:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:19 Uhr Seite 145

Sensors Blinds Management

Ref.-no.
Sunlight / dawn sensor
32 SD
The sensor can be combined with the Blinds Management centre plates with sensor connection
ref.-no.: ..5232 S.. and ..5232 TS3.. The suction sensor will be connected to the window pane.
Sunlight protection offers an automatic move-down of the blinds when the brightness
intensity rises above a pre-set level. The end-position of the blinds may be individually
selected by positioning the detector on the window.
The dawn function enables the automatic move-down of the blinds when the brightness
intensity drops below a pre-set level. This function is only possible in combination with the
timer centre plates with sensor connection. The cable with prefabricated plug can be
extended up to 25 m with telecommunication wire.

Extension flex
for sunlight /dawn sensor ref-no.: 32 SD
32 K
Cable lenghts: approx. 5 m (white)

Brightness sensor
LA 90
Can be used as "external sensor" in combination with centre plates
with sensor connection: ..5232 S.. and ..5232 TS3.
Intended use
Sensor for brightness detection. Provides a sun protection or twilight function
in connection with covers of the blind system.
Surface-mounted device for outdoor installation.

Rain sensor
RW 95
Intended use
Sensor for detection and evaluation of precipitation
In connection with blind/shutter controllers, enables, e.g. the retraction of awnings when it begins to rain.
Surface-mounted device for outdoor installation
Product characteristics
Serpentine-shaped sensor surface detects wetting due to precipitation.
Change-over relay remains switched on until the sensor is dry again. For at least 10 minutes.
Integrated heater speeds up the drying of the sensor surface and melts snow and ice.
Technical data
Rated voltage: AC 230 V ~, 50/60 Hz Ambient temperature: 30 ... +50 C
Current consumption: 15 mA (with preheating) Protection class: II
Power consumption: max. 4.5 W Protection level: IP 65
(incl. auxiliary heating) Connecting cable: flexible PVC cord,
Switch-off delay: approx. 10 min 2.9 m, JZ-600, 3 x 0.75 mm2
Relay output: 2.9 m, JZ-600, 2 x 0.75 mm2
dry: contact open Dimensions: 130 x 90 x 90 mm
rain: contact closed (incl. fitting bracket)
Relay switching capacity: max. 1500 W Weight: approx. 600 g
(resistive load) (incl. fitting bracket)
Relay contact rating: () 6 A / AC 250 V ~ Mounting position: fixed by 110 fitting bracket

145
136-146_3870_GB_26_Jalousie:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:19 Uhr Seite 146

Blinds Management Sensors

Ref.-no.
Converter
for connection of wind sensor ref.-no.: VT 04
32 U
Product characteristics
Detection and evaluation of wind speeds
8 wind speeds can be set
The wind alarm is triggered 1.5 seconds after the set wind speed
threshold value is exceeded
Test operation for function testing

Wind sensor
VT 04
Use shielded cable (J-Y(St)Y 2x2x0.6mm2 is recommended)
to connect the wind sensor.
Protection level: IP 43

146
Temperature Management
Always the perfect comfort temperature: The product solutions from JUNG Temperature Management
enable individually controllable and energy-saving room temperature control. Of course, the ease of use
the devices and a wide variety of designs are taken for granted. NEW: The room thermostat with backlit
display provides a time controlled individual temperature. Switching times can be set as well as various
temperature levels. The daylight saving time is converted automatically.

The Temperature Management contains control units with make and break contacts to operate various heating systems.

Room thermostat
with display

Management
Temperature
Room temperature
insert with centre plate
Electronic valve drive
AC 230 V ~

Room temperature
insert with centre plate

Floor temperature insert


with centre plate

Electric floor heating system


AC 230 V ~
147-158_3870_GB_26_TempManag:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:29 Uhr Seite 148

Temperature Management

Ref.-no.
Room thermostat (1-way contact)
Screwless terminals for wires up to 2.5 mm2
screw fixing only, without claws
1-pole break contact 10 (4) A, AC 230 V ~, 50/60 Hz
(The value in brackets indicates inductive loads with cos = 0.6)
Neutral conductor required.
Hysteresis: 0.5 K
Nominal range: +5 C ... +30 C
Separate terminal for temperature reduction of 5 K (e.g. during night time)
ON/OFF switch with status LED
When set temperature is reached the contact opens up.

for AS and A ranges


Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory TR A 231
white TR A 231 WW
black TR A 231 SW
Thermoplastic (breakproof) lacquered
aluminium TR A 231 AL
champagne TR A 231 CH
TR A 231 .. mocha TR A 231 MO
matt anthracite TR A 231 ANM

for CD range
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory TR CD 231
white TR CD 231 WW
brown TR CD 231 BR
grey TR CD 231 GR
TR CD 231 .. light grey TR CD 231 LG
black TR CD 231 SW
metal versions (anodized aluminium)
gold-bronze TR CD 231 GB
platinum TR CD 231 PT

for SL range
white TR SL 231 WW
TR SL 231 ..
gold-bronze TR SL 231 GB
black TR SL 231 SW

for LS range
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory TR LS 231
white TR LS 231 WW
light grey TR LS 231 LG
TR LS 231 .. black TR LS 231 SW
metal versions
aluminium TR AL 231
stainless steel TR ES 231
anthracite (aluminium lacquered) TR AL 231 AN
dark (aluminium lacquered) TR AL 231 D
chrome TR GCR 231
gold-coloured TR GO 231
gold-plated TR LS 231 GGO
TR .. 231 ..
classic brass TR ME 231 C
antique brass TR ME 231 AT

148
147-158_3870_GB_26_TempManag:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:29 Uhr Seite 149

Temperature Management

Ref.-no.
Room thermostat (1-way contact)
Screwless terminals for wires up to 2.5 mm2
screw fixing only, without claws
1-pole break contact 10 (4) A, AC 24 V ~
(The value in brackets indicates inductive loads with cos = 0.6)
Neutral conductor required.
Hysteresis: 0.5 K
Nominal range: +5 C ... +30 C
Separate terminal for temperature reduction of 5 K (e.g. during night time)
ON/OFF switch with status LED
When set temperature is reached the contact opens up.

for AS and A ranges


Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory TR A 241
white TR A 241 WW
black TR A 241 SW
Thermoplastic (breakproof) lacquered
aluminium TR A 241 AL
champagne TR A 241 CH
mocha TR A 241 MO TR A 241 ..
matt anthracite TR A 241 ANM

for CD range
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory TR CD 241
white TR CD 241 WW
brown TR CD 241 BR
grey TR CD 241 GR
light grey TR CD 241 LG TR CD 241 ..
black TR CD 241 SW
metal versions (anodized aluminium)
gold-bronze TR CD 241 GB
platinum TR CD 241 PT

for SL range
white TR SL 241 WW
TR SL 241 ..
gold-bronze TR SL 241 GB
black TR SL 241 SW

for LS range
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory TR LS 241
white TR LS 241 WW
light grey TR LS 241 LG
black TR LS 241 SW TR LS 241 ..
metal versions
aluminium TR AL 241
stainless steel TR ES 241
anthracite (aluminium lacquered) TR AL 241 AN
dark (aluminium lacquered) TR AL 241 D
chrome TR GCR 241
gold-coloured TR GO 241
gold-plated TR LS 241 GGO
TR .. 241 ..
classic brass TR ME 241 C
antique brass TR ME 241 AT

149
147-158_3870_GB_26_TempManag:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:29 Uhr Seite 150

Temperature Management

Ref.-no.
Room thermostat (make/break contact)
Screwless terminals for wires up to 2.5 mm2
screw fixing only, without claws
1-pole, 2-way, heating 10 (4) A, AC 230 V ~, 50/60 Hz
1-pole, 2-way, cooling 5 (2) A, AC 230 V ~, 50/60 Hz
(The value in brackets indicates inductive loads with cos = 0.6)
Neutral conductor required.
Hysteresis: 0.5 K
Nominal range: +5 C ... +30 C
When set temperature is reached the make/break contact switches over.

for AS and A ranges


Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory TR A 236
white TR A 236 WW
black TR A 236 SW
Thermoplastic (breakproof) lacquered
aluminium TR A 236 AL
champagne TR A 236 CH
mocha TR A 236 MO
TR A 236 .. matt anthracite TR A 236 ANM

for CD range
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory TR CD 236
white TR CD 236 WW
brown TR CD 236 BR
grey TR CD 236 GR
light grey TR CD 236 LG
TR CD 236 .. black TR CD 236 SW
metal versions (anodized aluminium)
gold-bronze TR CD 236 GB
platinum TR CD 236 PT

for SL range
white TR SL 236 WW
gold-bronze TR SL 236 GB
TR SL 236 ..
black TR SL 236 SW

for LS range
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory TR LS 236
white TR LS 236 WW
light grey TR LS 236 LG
TR LS 236 .. black TR LS 236 SW
metal versions
aluminium TR AL 236
stainless steel TR ES 236
anthracite (aluminium lacquered) TR AL 236 AN
dark (aluminium lacquered) TR AL 236 D
chrome TR GCR 236
gold-coloured TR GO 236
gold-plated TR LS 236 GGO
TR .. 236 ..
classic brass TR ME 236 C
antique brass TR ME 236 AT

150
147-158_3870_GB_26_TempManag:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:29 Uhr Seite 151

Temperature Management

Ref.-no.
Room thermostat (make/break contact)
Screwless terminals for wires up to 2.5 mm2
screw fixing only, without claws
1-pole, 2-way, heating 10 (4) A, AC 24 V ~
1-pole, 2-way, cooling 5 (2) A, AC 24 V ~
(The value in brackets indicates inductive loads with cos = 0.6)
Neutral conductor required.
Hysteresis: 0.5 K
Nominal range: +5 C ... +30 C
When set temperature is reached the make/break contact switches over.

for AS and A ranges


Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory TR A 246
white TR A 246 WW
black TR A 246 SW
Thermoplastic (breakproof) lacquered
aluminium TR A 246 AL
champagne TR A 246 CH
mocha TR A 246 MO
matt anthracite TR A 246 ANM TR A 246 ..

for CD range
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory TR CD 246
white TR CD 246 WW
brown TR CD 246 BR
grey TR CD 246 GR
light grey TR CD 246 LG
black TR CD 246 SW TR CD 246 ..
metal versions (anodized aluminium)
gold-bronze TR CD 246 GB
platinum TR CD 246 PT

for SL range
white TR SL 246 WW
gold-bronze TR SL 246 GB
TR SL 246 ..
black TR SL 246 SW

for LS range
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory TR LS 246
white TR LS 246 WW
light grey TR LS 246 LG
black TR LS 246 SW TR LS 246 ..
metal versions
aluminium TR AL 246
stainless steel TR ES 246
anthracite (aluminium lacquered) TR AL 246 AN
dark (aluminium lacquered) TR AL 246 D
chrome TR GCR 246
gold-coloured TR GO 246
gold-plated TR LS 246 GGO
TR .. 246 ..
classic brass TR ME 246 C
antique brass TR ME 246 AT

151
147-158_3870_GB_26_TempManag:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:29 Uhr Seite 152

Temperature Management

Ref.-no.
Floor thermostat
Screwless terminals for wires up to 2.5 mm2
screw fixing only, without claws
1-pole make contact 10 A, AC 230 V ~, 50/60 Hz
for control of electrical floor heating and floor temperature systems with NTC remote sensor
(length: 4 m, 7.8 mm)
Neutral conductor required
On/off switch
LED indicates heating
Hysteresis: 1 K
Nominal range: +10 C ... +50 C
Separate terminal for temperature reduction of 5 K (e.g. during night time)

for AS and A ranges


Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory FTR A 231
white FTR A 231 WW
black FTR A 231 SW
Thermoplastic (breakproof) lacquered
aluminium FTR A 231 AL
FTR A 231 .. champagne FTR A 231 CH
mocha FTR A 231 MO
matt anthracite FTR A 231 ANM

for CD range
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory FTR CD 231
white FTR CD 231 WW
brown FTR CD 231 BR
FTR CD 231 .. grey FTR CD 231 GR
light grey FTR CD 231 LG
black FTR CD 231 SW
metal versions (anodized aluminium)
gold-bronze FTR CD 231 GB
platinum FTR CD 231 PT

for SL range
white FTR SL 231 WW
FTR SL 231 ..
gold-bronze FTR SL 231 GB
black FTR SL 231 SW

for LS range
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory FTR LS 231
white FTR LS 231 WW
light grey FTR LS 231 LG
FTR LS 231 .. black FTR LS 231 SW
metal versions
aluminium FTR AL 231
stainless steel FTR ES 231
anthracite (aluminium lacquered) FTR AL 231 AN
dark (aluminium lacquered) FTR AL 231 D
chrome FTR GCR 231
gold-coloured FTR GO 231
gold-plated FTR LS 231 GGO
FTR .. 231 ..
classic brass FTR ME 231 C
antique brass FTR ME 231 AT

152
147-158_3870_GB_26_TempManag:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:29 Uhr Seite 153

Temperature Management

Ref.-no.
Humidistat
The relative humidity is a decisive factor for a healthy room climate.
JUNG humidistats regulate the humidity, thereby preventing damage from mould and mildew.
Function
The humidistat uses an integrated sensor to measure the moisture and temperature in the room.
If the humidity exceeds a value set previously on the knob on the humidistat, a connected device
is activated to dehumidify the room.
To set a fixed humidity value: turn the setscrew on the rear of the attachment module to 60 %
Activating the automatic mode Party mode
Longer pressing of the mode-of-operation button. Fan operation is activated manually for six hours.
After 5 s, the humidistat switches back to the automatic LED yellow: on, LED green: on, LED red: flashing
mode of operation. LED yellow: off, LED green off Standby mode
LED red: off. When the relay is switched on in the Fan operation is deactivated manually
automatic mode, the green LED is on. for four hours.
Manual mode LED yellow: on, LED green: off, LED red: on
Fan operation is activated manually for one hour.
LED yellow: on, LED green: on, LED red: off A 5201 HYG ..

for AS and A ranges


Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory A 5201 HYG
white A 5201 HYG WW
black A 5201 HYG SW
Thermoplastic (breakproof) lacquered
aluminium A 5201 HYG AL
champagne A 5201 HYG CH CD 5201 HYG ..
mocha A 5201 HYG MO
matt anthracite A 5201 HYG ANM

for CD range
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory CD 5201 HYG
white CD 5201 HYG WW
grey CD 5201 HYG GR
light grey CD 5201 HYG LG LS 5201 HYG ..

for LS range
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory LS 5201 HYG
white LS 5201 HYG WW
black LS 5201 HYG SW
metal versions
aluminium AL 5201 HYG
ES 5201 HYG
stainless steel ES 5201 HYG
anthracite (aluminium lacquered) AL 5201 HYG AN

Technical data
Rated voltage: AC 230 V ~ Motors: 15 mA ... 4 A
Mains frequency: 50 / 60 Hz Switching voltage DC: max. 24 V
Ambient temperature: 0 ... +45 C Switching current DC: 15 mA ... 8 A
Storing temperature: +10 ... +70 C Control range: 20 ... 95 % relative humidity (r. h.)
Storage humidity: 20 ... 60 % relative humidity (r. h.) Measuring tolerance: 5 % r. h.
Contact: floating make contact Switching difference: 2%
Contact type: Length of output cable ( 1.5 mm2): max. 100 m
Switching voltage AC: max. 230 V Connection: screw terminals
Switching current AC1 (cos > 0.8): 15 mA ... 8 A Terminals for: 2.5 mm2
Switching current AC3 (cos < 0.8): 15 mA ... 4 A

153
147-158_3870_GB_26_TempManag:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:29 Uhr Seite 154

Temperature Management

Room thermostat standard with display

with white illuminated display


screw fixing only, without claws

Intended use
Measuring and controlling the room temperature
Measuring and controlling the floor temperature
Room temperature control via floor heating with a limiting function
(for example in conjunction with tiled stoves)
Can be used for "heating only" or "cooling only"
Installable in a box in conformance with DIN 49073
Only for use in dry, enclosed rooms

Product characteristics
Large display with backlighting
Text display for self-explanatory operation
Different user languages can be selected
Internal temperature sensor
An external remote sensor can be connected
ECO input [clock] for the activation of a freely settable temperature, e.g. for night reduction
Time limit for the manually selected temperature
Simply switch between 2 temperatures (comfort, reduction)
Short-time timer ("party function")
Frost protection function
Display of energy consumption for electric heating systems
Pulse width modulation (PWM) or two-point control system
Adjustable cycle time (PWM), hysteresis and minimum on/off time (two-point)
Switch-on delay, such as for burners (with two-point control)
Adaptation to valves normally open or closed
Valve protection (as a room temperature controller with and without a limiting function)
Separate resetting of user and installer settings

The control method depends on the type of heating and is determined by the installer:
Room temperature controller:
The heating is turned on when the room temperature falls below the set target temperature
(measured with an internal sensor or external remote sensor).
Floor temperature controller:
The underfloor heating is turned on when the floor temperature falls below the set target
temperature (measured using an external remote sensor).
Room temperature controller with a limiter (in conjunction with underfloor heating):
The room temperature is measured and regulated using the internal sensor.
An additional external remote sensor is connected to measure the floor temperature,
and a target temperature range for the floor is set. The room temperature control is
deactivated when the floor temperature is outside of this range. If temperature falls below
this range, the heater is turned on, and if the temperature is above this range, the heater
is turned off independent of the current room temperature.

154
147-158_3870_GB_26_TempManag:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:29 Uhr Seite 155

Temperature Management

Ref.-no.
Technical data
Rated voltage: AC 230 V ~, 50 Hz, neutral line required
Output: Relay (make contact)
Switching current:
as room temperature controller: 10 mA ... 10 (4) A, 230 V ~
as floor temperature controller: 10 mA ... 16 (4) A, 230 V ~
Power consumption: approx. 1.2 W
Ambient temperature: 0 ... +40 C (no condensation)
Storing temperature: 20 ... +70 C (no condensation)
Temperature setting: in increments of 0.5 C
as room temperature controller: 5 ... 30 C
as floor temperature controller: 10 ... 40 C
Temperature indication: in increments of 0.1 C
Output signal: pulse width modulation (PWM)
or two-point control (on/off)
PWM cycle time: adjustable (10 ... 30 min)
Hysteresis: adjustable (with two-point control)
Minimum switching time: adjustable (1 ... 30 min)
Power reserve: approx. 10 years (lithium cell)

for AS and A ranges


Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory TR D A 231
white TR D A 231 WW
black TR D A 231 SW
Thermoplastic (breakproof) lacquered
aluminium TR D A 231 AL
champagne TR D A 231 CH
mocha TR D A 231 MO TR D A 231 ..
matt anthracite TR D A 231 ANM

for CD range
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory TR D CD 231
white TR D CD 231 WW

TR D CD 231 ..

for LS range
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory TR D LS 231
white TR D LS 231 WW
black TR D LS 231 SW

TR D LS 231 ..

metal versions
aluminium (lacquered) TR D AL 231
stainless steel (lacquered) TR D ES 231
anthracite (lacquered) TR D AL 231 AN
classic brass (lacquered) TR D ME 231 C
antique brass (lacquered) TR D ME 231 AT

TR D ES 231

155
147-158_3870_GB_26_TempManag:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:29 Uhr Seite 156

Temperature Management

Room thermostat universal with display

with white illuminated display


screw fixing only, without claws

Intended use
Measuring and controlling the room temperature
Measuring and controlling the floor temperature
Room temperature control via floor heating with a limiting function
(for example in conjunction with tiled stoves)
Can be used for "heating only" or "cooling only"
Installable in a box in conformance with DIN 49073
Only for use in dry, enclosed rooms

Product characteristics
Large display with backlighting
Text display for self-explanatory operation
Programmable even when the controls are removed
Different user languages can be selected
Real-time clock with automatic switchover to/from daylight saving time
Internal temperature sensor
An external remote sensor can be connected
Three selectable and adjustable time temperature programs for automatic mode
A maximum of nine operating times per day (the setting can also be terminated
after a specific operating time)
Can be individually programmed every day, or a block of operating times can be set:
workdays/non-workdays, all days the same
Can be manually adjusted at any time
"Vacation" mode with the entered date (from/to)
"At-home" mode (present)
Short-time timer ("party function")
Frost protection function
Display of energy consumption for electric heating systems
Pulse width modulation (PWM) or two-point control system
Adjustable cycle time (PWM), hysteresis and minimum on/off time (two-point)
Switch-on delay, such as for burners (with two-point control)
Adaptation to valves normally open or closed
Valve protection (as a room temperature controller with and without a limiting function)
Separate resetting of user and installer settings

The control method depends on the type of heating and is determined by the installer:
Room temperature controller:
The heating is turned on when the room temperature falls below the set target temperature
(measured with an internal sensor or external remote sensor).
Floor temperature controller:
The underfloor heating is turned on when the floor temperature falls below the set target
temperature (measured using an external remote sensor).
Room temperature controller with a limiter (in conjunction with underfloor heating):
The room temperature is measured and regulated using the internal sensor.
An additional external remote sensor is connected to measure the floor temperature,
and a target temperature range for the floor is set. The room temperature control is
deactivated when the floor temperature is outside of this range. If temperature falls below
this range, the heater is turned on, and if the temperature is above this range, the heater
is turned off independent of the current room temperature.

156
147-158_3870_GB_26_TempManag:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:29 Uhr Seite 157

Temperature Management

Ref.-no.
Technical data
Rated voltage: AC 230 V ~, 50 Hz, neutral line required
Output: Relay (make contact)
Switching current:
as room temperature controller: 10 mA ... 10 (4) A, 230 V ~
as floor temperature controller: 10 mA ... 16 (4) A, 230 V ~
Power consumption: approx. 1.2 W
Ambient temperature: 0 ... +40 C (no condensation)
Storing temperature: 20 ... +70 C (no condensation)
Temperature setting: in increments of 0.5 C
as room temperature controller: 5 ... 30 C
as floor temperature controller: 10 ... 40 C
Temperature indication: in increments of 0.1 C
Output signal: pulse width modulation (PWM)
or two-point control (on/off)
PWM cycle time: adjustable (10 ... 30 min)
Hysteresis: adjustable (with two-point control)
Minimum switching time: adjustable (1 ... 30 min)
Power reserve: approx. 10 years (lithium cell)

for AS and A ranges


Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory TR UD A 231
white TR UD A 231 WW
black TR UD A 231 SW
Thermoplastic (breakproof) lacquered
aluminium TR UD A 231 AL TR UD A 231 ..
champagne TR UD A 231 CH
mocha TR UD A 231 MO
matt anthracite TR UD A 231 ANM

for CD range
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory TR UD CD 231
white TR UD CD 231 WW
TR UD CD 231 ..
for LS range
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory TR UD LS 231
white TR UD LS 231 WW
black TR UD LS 231 SW
metal versions
aluminium (lacquered) TR UD AL 231
stainless steel (lacquered) TR UD ES 231
anthracite (lacquered) TR UD AL 231 AN
classic brass (lacquered) TR UD ME 231 C TR UD LS 231 ..
antique brass (lacquered) TR UD ME 231 AT

External sensor
for room thermostat ref.-no. TR D .. 231 .., TR UD .. 231 ..
spare part for floor thermostat ref.-no. FTR .. 231 ..
NTC sensor in plastic cap 7.8 mm
with 4 m cable FF 7.8

157
147-158_3870_GB_26_TempManag:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:29 Uhr Seite 158

Temperature Management

Ref.-no.
Thermal valve drive AC 230 V ~
M 30 x 1.5 TVA 230 NC WW
Intended use
Operation of straightway and 3-way valves. For controller with switched output,
2-point regulation or pulse width modulation (PWM), in combination with single room
control systems. Suitable for retrofitting of existing heating systems with corresponding
adapter.
Product characteristics
Simple installation onto the valve
Visible and haptic position indication
Noiseless and maintenance-free

Technical data
Voltage: AC 230 V ~, 50/60 Hz
Function: valve in closed position when power is off (NC)
Power consumption during operation: 2W
Switch-on current: 250 mA
Valve lift: max. 4.5 mm
Run time for 4.5 mm valve lift: approx. 3.5 min
Spring power: max. 125 N
Ambient temperature: 0 ... +50 C
Thread: M 30 x 1.5
Mounting position: all positions possible
Colour: white (similar RAL 9010)

Adapter set
for valve drive ref.-no.: TVA 230 NC WW
Closing dimensions
with white cap: 4.5 ... 9.5 mm
with black cap: 8.5 ... 13.5 mm
without cap: 13.5 ... 18.5 mm
M 30 x 1.5 ASET 3015
M 30 x 1.0 ASET 3010
M 28 x 1.5 ASET 2815

Adapter
For mounting on Danfoss valve RA-N (RA 2000)
A 110

158
Observer
Smoke alarm device
Observer
The observer range is persuasive due to its performance and functionality.
In the outdoor area they offer the optimal solution for nearly all applications.

~ 25 m ~ 32 m ~ 20 m
~ 11 m

~8m ~ 16 m ~ 16 m ~ 16 m

Covered area: 70 Covered area: 110 Covered area: 180 Covered area: 220

Zwiti_Waechter_2015_GB.indd 15 27.02.15 14:13


159-167_3870_GB_26_ObsRauch.qxd:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:26 Uhr Seite 160

Observer

Not suitable for alarm systems


mounting height: 2.40 m

Ref.-no.
Observer 220 with digital signal evaluation
white W 220 WW
Technical data
Nominal range: approx. 16 m
Mounting height: approx. 2.40 m
Detection range: approx. 220, with separate undercrawling protection
Rated voltage: AC 230 V ~, 50/60 Hz
Switch contact: relay, mains potential
Switch-on current: max. 20 A
Circuit breaker: 16 A
Power consumption: approx. 1.1 W
Temperature range: 25 ... +55 C
Shut-off delay: 2 s ... 30 min, continuously adjustable
short-time pulse 0.5 s
Brightness sensor: Day-time and night-time operation approx. 1 ... 1000 lx,
continuously adjustable
Sensitivity: approx. 20 ... 100 %, continuously adjustable
Protection level: IP 55
Terminals: L, N, (relay) wiring up to 2.5 mm2

Field of detection: Switching capacity


The 220 observer has a very Incandescent lamps: 2300 W
dense, horseshoe-shaped field HV halogen lamps: 2300 W
of detection of 220 consisting LV halogen lamps with
of four levels with more than TRONIC transformers: 1200 W
580 switching segments and inductive transformers: 1200 W
additional protection against Operate inductive transformers with at least 85 % nominal load.
undercrawling. Fluorescent lamps
non-compensated: 1200 W
parallel compensated: 0920 W
lead-lag circuit: 2300 W
~ 20 m
Important: Energy saving lamps cause high inrush currents which may cause the switch
contact to get stuck. Then a reduction of capacity is required! Please check suitability of
lamps before installation.
Delay time limitation: Once the detector has switched on, the brightness is no longer evaluated.
~ 16 m To prevent the light from remaining permanently on (e.g. beyond dawn) caused by permanent
movements, the device is provided with an intelligent limiting function.
4 Detection levels: The delay time (time the light remains on after detection of the last movement) is selected
1st level: depending on the real switch-on time:
from approx. 0 to approx. 3 m
Switch-on time Delay time (approx)
2nd level:
up to 60 min depending on setting
from approx. 3 to approx. 7 m
3rd level: up to 70 min 4 min
from approx. 7 to approx. 11 m up to 75 min 2 min
4th level: up to 80 min 1 min
from approx. 11 to approx. 16 m up to 85 min 30 sec
Protection against under- up to 90 min 15 sec
crawling: 90 min switching-off
approx. 0 m to approx. 0.4 m The detector switches off after 90 minutes, at the latest, even if there are still movements
in the detection field. Restarting will only be effected if the ambient brightness drops below
0m the preset brightness level and if a movement is detected in the detection field.
3m
7m
11 m
16 m
2.4 m

160
159-167_3870_GB_26_ObsRauch.qxd:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:26 Uhr Seite 161

Observer

Ref.-no.
Observer 110
white 222 WW
Intended use
Automatic switching of lighting depending on the thermal movement and ambient brightness.
Surface-mounting in indoor and outdoor areas

Product characteristics
Variable installation position
Protected against spray water
Follow-up time, sensitivity and brightness value settable
Test operation for checking the detection area
Sensor head adjustable in 3 axes covered area 222 WW
Screens for limiting the detection area
18 detection zones in 3 levels
Parallel connection of multiple controllers possible
Manual switch-on possible with installation button
~ 25 m
Technical data
Nominal range: approx. 16 m
Mounting height: approx. 2.40 m
~ 16 m
Detection range: approx. 110, approx. 16 x 25 m
Rated voltage: AC 230 V ~, 50 Hz
Current consumption: 6 mA
Power consumption: 1.3 W
Temperature range: 35 ... +50 C
Switch contact: relay, mains potential
Switching capacity:
Incandescent lamps: max. 2200 W/VA
HV halogen lamps: max. 1000 W
Switching current:
ohmic: max. 10 A
cos = 0.5 inductive: max. 5 A
Inrush current: max. 16 A
Stand-by current when contact open: 1 mA
Shut-off delay:
Normal operation: approx. 12 s ... 12 min, continuously adjustable
Brightness sensor: approx. 5 ... 300 lx + daytime operation
continuously adjustable
Range: max. 16 m
Mounting height: 2.30 m ... 2.50 m
Adjusting possibilities:
rotating: 180 horizontal
inclining: 180 vertical
swivelling: 90
Protection level: IP 54
Radio interference suppression: acc. to VDE 0875/6.77
Approvals: VDE

161
159-167_3870_GB_26_ObsRauch.qxd:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:26 Uhr Seite 162

Observer

Ref.-no.
Observer 70
white W 70 WW
anthracite W 70 AN
Technical data
Nominal range: approx. 8 m
Mounting height: approx. 2.40 m
Detection range: approx. 70, approx. 8 x 11 m
Rated voltage: AC 230 V ~, 50 Hz
Switch contact: relay contact, mains potential
Switching capacity:
Incandescent lamps: 1000 W
covered area W 70 ... HV halogen lamps: 1000 W
LV halogen lamps:
inductive transformer: 750 VA
Operate inductive transformers with at least 85 % nominal load.
TRONIC transformer: 750 W
~ 11 m Fluorescent lamps:
non-compensated: 500 VA
parallel compensated (47 F): 400 VA
lead-lag circuit: 1000 W
~8m Power consumption: 1.1 W
Temperature range: 25 ... +55 C
Shut-off delay: approx. 10 s ... 5 min
Brightness sensor: day-time and night-time operation, continuously adjustable
Range: adjustable at 3 levels
Mounting height: 2.40 m
Protection level: IP 55
Radio interference suppression: acc. to VDE 0875 T 14
Important: Energy saving lamps cause high inrush currents which may cause the switch contact to
get stuck. Then a reduction of capacity is required! Please check suitability of lamps before installation.

162
159-167_3870_GB_26_ObsRauch.qxd:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:26 Uhr Seite 163

Observer

Ref.-no.
Radio observer 180
The radio observer detects a semicircular field of 16 x 32 m (180)
at a mounting height of approx. 2.40 m.
144 sensor segments on 3 levels
LED fuctional display
clip-on cover for limiting the field of detection
white FW 180 WW
Intended use
Motion detector for automatic switch-on of lighting depending on thermal
movements and ambient brightness
Operation in conjunction with radio performance unit and suitable radio actuators
Surface-mounting
Product characteristics
The device detects thermal movements caused by people, animals and objects.
Day operation: Motion detection is switched-off. Motion detector measures the lightning
strength every 8 seconds. If a value under 80 lux is determined, then Night mode is started
after a locking time of approx. 1 minute.
Night mode: If motion is detected, the device measures the brightness, evaluates it and sends
a radio telegram to the receiver. If the brightness exceeds 200 lux, the device switches to Day mode.
Switch-on time settable with radio performance unit. If radio actuators are used, the switch-on
time is predefined in the actuator.
Brightness value can be set in the radio performance unit
Detection area can be limited with cover
Battery-powered device
Technical data Detection
Power supply: 9 V DC Detection angle: 180
Battery type: 9 V block Alkaline (LR) Detection range: approx. 16 x 32 m
Power consumption Mounting height: approx. 2.40 m
Daytime operation: approx. 0.14 mW Sensitivity: approx. 20 ... 100 %
Night operation: approx. 0.27 mW Evaluation
Radio signal: approx. 27 mW Operation range: approx. 3 ... 200 lx, 50 %
Radio transmission Sensor, normal operation: 80 lx
Transmitting power: < 10 mW Sensor, retriggering: 200 lx
Transmission frequency: 433.42 MHz (ASK) Sensor OFF: > 200 lx
Range: approx. 100 m (free field) Temperature range: 25 ... +55 C
Radio codes: > 1 billion Protection level: IP 55

Radio performance unit


white FWL 2200 WW
Technical data Power consumption: < 2.5 W
Rated voltage: AC 230 V ~, 50/60 Hz Switch-on current: max. 20 A
Switch contact: relay, mains potential Shut-off delay: approx. 10 s ... 15 min,
Switching capacity retriggered
Incandescent lamps: 2300 W Accuracy: 10 %
HV halogen lamps: 2300 W Brightness setting: approx. 3 ... 80 lx
Fluorescent lamps Accuracy: 10 %
non-compensated: 1200 W Temperature range: 25 ... +55 C
parallel compensated: 0920 W Protection level: IP 44
lead-lag circuit: 2300 W Dimensions (W x H x D): 110 x 94 x 38 mm
Circuit breaker: 10 A
Additional function via push-button (break contact)
Pulse duration: 400 ms, 50 %
Pulse interval: 600 ms
1st function: 1 x pulse, operating time
2nd function: 2 x pulse, ON = 2 hrs, 10 %
3rd function: 3 x pulse, OFF = 2 hrs, 10 %
Important: Energy saving lamps cause high inrush currents which may cause the switch contact to get
stuck. Then a reduction of capacity is required! Please check suitability of lamps before installation.
163
159-167_3870_GB_26_ObsRauch.qxd:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:26 Uhr Seite 164

Observer-System

Ref.-no.
Principle of operation
Infra-red sensors respond to thermal motion caused by people, animals or things and pass
the information on to the system control unit; the performance unit analyses the information and
will switch on the electrical consumer(s).
The observer system is practical at all places where several sensors are required.
Up to 2 x 8 sensors may be connected to a central unit by simple wiring.
Recommended cable for sensors: JY-ST-Y 2 x 2 x 0.8 or YR 4 x 0.8, max. length 100 m!

System sensor 180


to be installed in combination with system control unit
ref.-no.: WL 2200 WW, WL 2200 REG, WL 2200-2 REG
Protection level IP 55
Detection range: approx. 180, 16 x 32 m
at a mounting height of 2.40 m
144 zones on 3 levels, with LED pilot-lamp
and screen for reduction of covered area
white WS 180 WW
Intended use
Automatic switching of electrical loads for the duration of a settable time
when the brightness drops below a brightness threshold
System sensors report detected thermal movements to the performance unit
Surface-mounting in indoor and outdoor areas
Product characteristics
covered area WS 180 WW Protected against spray water
Sensor head adjustable in 2 axes
Cover panel for limiting the detection area
144 switching segments in 3 layers

~ 32 m System control unit


to be installed in combination with system sensor ref.-no.: WS 180 WW
for max. 8 sensors
white WL 2200 WW
Intended use
~ 16 m Automatic switching of electrical loads for the duration of a settable time
when the brightness drops below a brightness threshold
System sensors report detected thermal movements to the performance unit
Surface-mounting in indoor and outdoor areas
Product characteristics
Device reacts to motion signals of system sensors
Power supply for system sensors
Brightness thres-hold settable
Switch-on time settable
Forced switch-off settable
Technical data
Rated voltage: AC 230 V ~, 50 Hz Shut-off delay: approx. 4 s ... 15 min,
Switch contact: relay, mains potential retriggered
Switching capacity Accuracy: 10 %
Incandescent lamps: 2300 W Brightness setting: approx. 3 ... 80 lx
HV halogen lamps: 2300 W Accuracy: 35 %
Fluorescent lamps Limit: forced switching-off
non-compensated: 1200 W after max. 90 min
parallel compensated: 0920 W Protection level: IP 55
lead-lag circuit: 2300 W Radio interference
Power consumption: 1.1 W suppression: acc. to VDE 0876
Temperature range: 25 ... +55 C part 1/12.88
Switch-on current: max. 20 A Approvals: VDE
Important: Energy saving lamps cause high inrush currents which may cause the switch contact to get
stuck. Then a reduction of capacity is required! Please check suitability of lamps before installation.
164
159-167_3870_GB_26_ObsRauch.qxd:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:26 Uhr Seite 165

Observer-System

Ref.-no.
System control unit for rail mounting
to be installed in combination with system sensor ref.-no.: WS 180 WW
for max. 8 sensors
1-channel WL 2200 REG
Power consumption: approx. 1.1 W

for max. 16 sensors, 8 sensors per channnel


2-channel WL 2200-2 REG
Power consumption: approx. 1.8 W

Technical data
Rated voltage: AC 230 V ~, 50 Hz
Connected load at AC 230 V ~
Incandescent lamps: 2300 W
HV halogen lamps: 2300 W
TRONIC transformers: 1200 W
inductive transformers: 1200 VA
Fluorescent lamps
non-compensated: 1200 W
parallel compensated: 0920 W
lead-lag circuit: 2300 W
Rated current per channel: 10 A
Switch-on current per channel: max. 20 A
Min. switching current: 100 mA
Min. switching voltage: AC 12 V
Connection: screw terminals
single wire: 1.5 ... 4 mm2
stranded without ferrule: 0.75 ... 4 mm2
stranded with ferrule: 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2
Temperature range: 25 ... +55 C
Shut-off delay: approx. 4 s ... 15 min, retriggered
Accuracy: 10 %
Brightness setting: approx. 3 ... 80 lx
Accuracy: 35 %
Limit: forced switching-off after max. 90 min
Radio interference suppression: acc. to VDE 0876 part 1/12.88
Mounting width: 72 mm (4 rail units)
Approvals: VDE

Important: Energy saving lamps cause high inrush currents which may cause
the switch contact to get stuck. Then a reduction of capacity is required!
Please check suitability of lamps before installation.

165
The JUNG smoke alarm
device
Smoke detectors saving lives! Whether hallway, kitchen, bedroom or kids room: With the use
of JUNG smoke alarm devices the residents of a building are alerted in case of smoke and
heat caused by fire. The device is available as a conventional stand alone unit or as a radio
version for networking alarm systems, ideal for single and multi-family homes.

The JUNG smoke alarm device automatically verifies its readiness for
operation once a minute. Using the certified magnetic adhesive system,
simply install the device to the ceiling without extensive drilling or bolting
operations. Of course you may have the smoke detector installed by
using conventional drilling. The internal lithium battery that lasts 12 years.
The entire bottom housing cover of the smoke detector is used as the
Test/Stop key.

Zwiti_RWM_2015_GB.indd 16 27.02.15 14:15


159-167_3870_GB_26_ObsRauch.qxd:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:26 Uhr Seite 167

Smoke alarm device

Ref.-no.
Smoke alarm device
white RWM 100 WW
Lithium battery with protective passivation
12 years battery life
Bi-sensor processor technology (smoke + heat)
Real alarm with maximum precision
Qualified for kitchens
88 dB alarm signal at 3 m distance
Dimensions ( x H): 10 x 3.8 cm
Detection range: up to 60 m2 (depending on installation location)
Optimum storing temperature: +10 ... +35 C, <70 % relative humidity
Large user-friendly test/stop button (78 cm2)
Magnetic mount for adhesive fixing or screw fixing
Complies with the increased requirements vfdb Directive 14-01
CE according to EN 14604:2005/AC:2008
TV Nord Cert (Kriwan no. 1772-CPR-120724)

Smoke alarm device set, 3 pieces


white RWM 100-S3 WW

Smoke alarm device set, 12 pieces


white RWM 100-S12 WW

Radio smoke alarm device


white FRWM 100 WW
Radio connectivity
Frequency: 868.3 MHz
Protocol: FSK (Frequency Shift Keying)
Max. number of devices per group: 15
Community group (stair case): assigment of up to 14 groups (appartments)
Radio range: 400 m, 10 % (free field)
Repeater functionality
Lithium battery with protective passivation
12 years battery life
Bi-sensor processor technology (smoke + heat)
Real alarm with maximum precision
Qualified for kitchens
88 dB alarm signal at 3 m distance
Dimensions ( x H): 10 x 3.8 cm
Detection range: up to 60 m2 (depending on installation location)
Optimum storing temperature: +10 ... +35 C, <70 % relative humidity
Large user-friendly test/stop button (78 cm2)
Magnetic mount for adhesive fixing or screw fixing
Complies with the increased requirements vfdb Directive 14-01
CE according to EN 14604:2005/AC:2008

167
Devices for hotels, hospitals
and public buildings
Special demands are placed on electrical installations in public buildings such as hotels or hospitals.
JUNG provides tailor-made solutions which offer the guests, patients and staff optimum security and
the highest level of comfort. The wide variety of designs available guarantee that the products and
systems can be seamlessly integrated into their surroundings.

A 2-gang switch combination allows the control


of the LED function outside the room or the
lights in the room itself. Integrated control lights
display the status of the lighting at any time.

Outside the hotel room the The wall-mounted LED Perfection down to the The oversize rocker for
new hotel display with its reading light is always last detail: the stainless automatic door control
coloured LEDs indicates the right light to read steel shaver socket is a systems is also available
the hotel stuff, if the room by. real highlight. with labelled or embossed
shall be cleaned. symbols.

Zwiti_Notruf_System_2015_GB.indd 17 27.02.15 14:16


Public buildings

Emergency system set


The system set is used to call for help in WCs or
bathrooms in nursing homes and old peoples
homes or WC units in public buildings. It ensures
that a person who needs help in an emergency
can notify the relevant personnel.

Zwiti_Notruf_System_2015_GB.indd 18 27.02.15 14:16


168-185_3870_GB_26_Public:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:31 Uhr Seite 170

Emergency System

Emergency system
The JUNG emergency system is a well-conceived, complete set for emergency calls in WCs or en-suite
bathrooms in old peoples homes and nursing homes or WC facilities in public buildings. It ensures that
a person in need of help can sound the alarm in an emergency and meets all the safety-related requirements
in accordance with DIN VDE 0834.
The emergency system is a modular distributed system.

The following four components are available as a complete emergency system set:
Pull cord push-button
An emergency call can be triggered in the bathroom/WC via an easily accessible pull cord. The pull cord
push-button can also be installed in the middle of the room on the ceiling so that it is easily accessible for
people in need of help. A red lamp on the switch signals that the emergency call has been triggered
successfully.
Emergency signal
Emergency system set The emergency signal can e.g. be installed outside next to the WC door or landing door. A triggered
NRS .. 0834 .. emergency call is signalled visually by a red LED and acoustically by a buzzer. Both signals can, if required,
be changed from continuous light/continuous tone to flashing light/pulsing tone.
Reset button
The reset button is installed next to the door in the same room as the pull cord push-button. The assisting
personnel can reset the triggered call.
Power supply for the emergency call system with DC 24 V

The service unit and the call button are separately available. The service unit can be installed in addition
to the components of the emergency set e.g. in a staff room or lobby. A green button indicates presence
while a yellow button suppresses the acoustic emergency signal for 20 seconds. The call button has an
additional control for triggering an emergency call.
The emergency system is available for the design ranges AS 500 and LS 990 to complete a unique design
in a building. The design frames are part of the system set.
For a system extension all components are available separately.

Ref.-no.
Emergency system set
consists of pull cord push-button, emergency signal,
reset button and power supply
screw fixing only, without claws
with 1-gang frames
for AS 500 and A range
ivory NRS AS 0834
white NRS AS 0834 WW
for CD range
white NRS CD 0834 WW
for LS range
ivory NRS LS 0834
white NRS LS 0834 WW
light grey NRS LS 0834 LG
black NRS LS 0834 SW

170
168-185_3870_GB_26_Public:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:31 Uhr Seite 171

Emergency System

Ref.-no.
Single components (spare parts):
Pull cord push-button
screw fixing only, without claws, without frame
for AS 500 and A range
ivory NRS AS 0834 ZT
white NRS AS 0834 ZT WW
for CD range
white NRS CD 0834 ZT WW
for LS range
ivory NRS LS 0834 ZT
white NRS LS 0834 ZT WW
light grey NRS LS 0834 ZT LG
black NRS LS 0834 ZT SW
pull cord ref.-no.: ZS-34 KO5S included

Emergency signal
screw fixing only, without claws, without frame
for AS 500 and A range
ivory NRS AS 0834 RM
white NRS AS 0834 RM WW
for CD range
white NRS CD 0834 RM WW
for LS range
ivory NRS LS 0834 RM
white NRS LS 0834 RM WW
light grey NRS LS 0834 RM LG
black NRS LS 0834 RM SW

Reset button
screw fixing only, without claws, without frame
for AS 500 and A range
ivory NRS AS 0834 AT
white NRS AS 0834 AT WW
for CD range
white NRS CD 0834 AT WW
for LS range
ivory NRS LS 0834 AT
white NRS LS 0834 AT WW
light grey NRS LS 0834 AT LG
black NRS LS 0834 AT SW

Power supply
screw fixing only, without claws, without frame
supplies the emergency call system with DC 24 V
for AS 500 and A range
ivory NRS AS 0834 NT
white NRS AS 0834 NT WW
for CD range
white NRS CD 0834 NT WW
for LS range
ivory NRS LS 0834 NT
white NRS LS 0834 NT WW
light grey NRS LS 0834 NT LG
black NRS LS 0834 NT SW

171
168-185_3870_GB_26_Public:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:31 Uhr Seite 172

Emergency System

Ref.-no.
UPS module
screw fixing only, without claws, without frame
for the bridging of power failures
for AS 500 and A range
ivory NRS AS 0834 USV
white NRS AS 0834 USV WW
for CD range
white NRS CD 0834 USV WW
for LS range
ivory NRS LS 0834 USV
white NRS LS 0834 USV WW
light grey NRS LS 0834 USV LG
black NRS LS 0834 USV SW

Optional:
Service unit
screw fixing only, without claws, without frame
for AS 500 and A range
ivory NRS AS 0834 DZE
white NRS AS 0834 DZE WW
for CD range
white NRS CD 0834 DZE WW
for LS range
ivory NRS LS 0834 DZE
white NRS LS 0834 DZE WW
light grey NRS LS 0834 DZE LG
black NRS LS 0834 DZE SW

Call button
screw fixing only, without claws, without frame
An additional control for triggering an emergency call.
for AS 500 and A range
ivory NRS AS 0834 RT
white NRS AS 0834 RT WW
for CD range
white NRS CD 0834 RT WW
for LS range
ivory NRS LS 0834 RT
white NRS LS 0834 RT WW
light grey NRS LS 0834 RT LG
black NRS LS 0834 RT SW

172
168-185_3870_GB_26_Public:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:31 Uhr Seite 173

Emergency System

Ref.-no.
Service terminal NRS DZT 20 WW
The Service terminal is used for the central information of 20 emergency calls.
A parallel use of several service terminals is possible.

Intended use:
central remote signalling from up to 20 alarms
optical and acoustical signalling
two-line display for indication of the alarms
programmable alarm messages with up to 16 characters
for allocating the alarms
20 electrically isolated inputs with one ground
evaluation of standby- and operating current
Suppression of the acoustical alarms for 20 seconds
green presence push-button
yellow alarm suppression push-button
programmable with the PC
USB-cable and Software (multi-language) included
power supply 24V DC
inputs 24 V DC
for screw-fixing in a wall box without claws
Dimensions: 145 x 100 x 24 mm (H x W x D)

Surface-mounted housing
for service terminal ref.-no.: NRS DZT 20 WW
white NRS DZT AP WW
Dimensions: 100 x 145 x 25 mm (W x H x D)

173
168-185_3870_GB_26_Public:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:31 Uhr Seite 174

Oversize rocker

IP Protection level IP 44 ensured


P Colour printing possible
L Laser labelling possible

Ref.-no.
Oversize rocker (70 x 212.4 mm)
for switch insert ref.-no.: 506 U, 507 U, 502 U, 503 U
for push switch insert ref.-no.: 506 TU, 507 TU, 502 TU
for push-button insert ref.-no.: 531 U, 532 U, 533 U, 533-2 U
stainless steel IP L ES 2993
white (lacquered stainless steel) IP P L ES 2993 WW
Protection level IP 44 only possible with 3-gang frame!
Inscription on request.
When wallpapering, consider to install supporting frame onto the wallpaper (NO plaster compensation).

Oversize rocker (70 x 212.4 mm) with lens, illumination possible


for switch insert ref.-no.: 506 KOU, 502 KOU, 503 KOU
for push switch insert ref.-no.: 506 KOTU, 502 KOTU
for push-button insert ref.-no.: 531 U, 533 U, 533-2 U, 534 U
stainless steel IP L ES 2993 KO5
white (lacquered stainless steel) IP P L ES 2993 KO5 WW
Protection level IP 44 only possible with 3-gang frame!
Inscription on request.
When wallpapering, consider to install supporting frame onto the wallpaper (NO plaster compensation).

All oversize rockers are available with embossed or printed symbols on request.

Frame
for horizontal and vertical installation
stainless steel
3-gang 81 x 223 mm IP ES 2983
4-gang 81 x 294 mm ES 2984
5-gang 81 x 365 mm ES 2985
white (lacquered stainless steel)
3-gang 81 x 223 mm IP ES 2983 WW
4-gang 81 x 294 mm ES 2984 WW
5-gang 81 x 365 mm ES 2985 WW

174
168-185_3870_GB_26_Public:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:31 Uhr Seite 175

Oversize rocker

Ref.-no.
Surface cap
with integrated frame and non-flammable ground plate
3-gang, 223 x 81 x 47 mm
stainless steel (lacquered) ES 2583 A-L
white LS 583 A WW

Mounting box for surface caps


(Spare part)
3-gang 583 A

Sealing gasket
to ensure protection level IP 44
for all devices/covers with blue "IP 44 marking"
in some cases with additional gaskets acc. to product description
551 WU

Strain relief
for surface caps
for cables 3 x 1.5 mm2 up to 5 x 2.5 mm2 ( 7 up to 13 mm)
58 A ZUG

Inlets for cables, pipes and trunkings in surface caps


for cable and mini trunking
ivory 11
white 11 WW
for trunking 15 x 15 mm
ivory 12
white 12 WW
for pipes with outside 16 mm
ivory 13
white 13 WW

175
168-185_3870_GB_26_Public:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:31 Uhr Seite 176

Key card holder

Ref.-no.
Key card holder
for push-button insert ref.-no.: 531 U, 532 U, 533 U, 534 U

The key card holder is used to keep the hotel card and to ensure a high level of safety and energy savings,
since all possibly powered electrical consumers are switched off automatically when removing the hotel card.
The key card holder will be completed with a push-button of the JUNG portfolio.
The push-button ref-no. 533 U with make/break contact and additional N-terminal is recommended.
The separate N-terminal enables the illumination of the device with incandescent or LED lamp at the same
potential. If the pilot lamp should not be at the same potential, please install the push-button ref-no. 534 U
with separate signalling contact.
When wallpapering, avoid wallpaper on the supporting frame of the push-button insert.

for AS 500 and A range

Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss


ivory A 590 CARD
white A 590 CARD WW
black A 590 CARD SW
Thermoplastic (breakproof) lacquered
aluminium A 590 CARD AL
champagne A 590 CARD CH
mocha A 590 CARD MO
matt anthracite A 590 CARD ANM

for CD range

Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss


white CD 590 CARD WW
metal versions (lacquered)
gold-bronze CD 590 CARD GB-L
platinum CD 590 CARD PT-L

for SL 500

white SL 590 CARD WW


gold-bronze SL 590 CARD GB
black SL 590 CARD SW

for LS range

Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss


ivory LS 590 CARD
white LS 590 CARD WW
light grey LS 590 CARD LG
black LS 590 CARD SW

metal versions (lacquered)


stainless steel ES 2990 CARD
aluminium AL 2990 CARD
anthracite AL 2990 CARD AN

176
168-185_3870_GB_26_Public:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:31 Uhr Seite 177

Triple-tone door signal

Ref.-no.
Triple-tone door signal
with supporting frame, screw fixing only

2 separate terminals for 2 or 3 tone signal


power supply: 8 ... 12 V AC/DC, via external power supply (SELV) e.g. ref.-no. BIS 50 NT
current consumption: approx. 150 mA

for AS 500 and A range

Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss


ivory A 567-G3
white A 567-G3 WW
black A 567-G3 SW

for CD range

Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss


ivory CD 567-G3
white CD 567-G3 WW

for LS range

Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss


ivory LS 2567-G3
white LS 2567-G3 WW

metal versions (lacquered)


aluminium AL 2567-G3
anthracite AL 2567-G3 AN

177
168-185_3870_GB_26_Public:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:31 Uhr Seite 178

Hotel installation

Ref.-no.
1-gang push-button insert
for hotel display DND, corridor unit
Neutral conductor required
with red LED lamp ref.-no.: 90-LED RT
Screwless terminals for wires up to 2.5 mm
1-pole, 1-way (make) with separate contacts for indicator light
10 AX / 250 V ~ 534 EU LED R 230
24 V ~ 534 EU LED R 24

Hotel display DND, corridor unit


for push-button insert ref.-no.: 534 EU LED R ..
with lens and symbol "Do not disturb"

for A range

Duroplastic (scratch-proof) glossy


white A 590 KO51 WW
Duroplastic lacquered
aluminium A 590 KO51 AL
champagne A 590 KO51 CH
mocha A 590 KO51 MO

for LS range

Duroplastic (scratch-proof) glossy


ivory LS 990 KO51
white LS 990 KO51 WW
light grey LS 990 KO51 LG
black LS 990 KO51 SW

metal versions
stainless steel ES 2990 KO51
stainless steel (lacquered) ES 2990 KO51-L
aluminium AL 2990 KO51
aluminium (lacquered) AL 2990 KO51-L
anthracite (aluminium lacquered) AL 2990 KO51 AN
classic brass ME 2990 KO51 C
antique brass ME 2990 KO51 AT

178
168-185_3870_GB_26_Public:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:31 Uhr Seite 179

Hotel installation

Ref.-no.
1-gang switch insert 10 AX / 250 V ~ with indicator light
for hotel display DND, room unit
Neutral conductor required
with red LED lamp ref.-no.: 90-LED RT
Screwless terminals for wires up to 2.5 mm
1-pole, 2-way 506 KOEU R 230

The switch insert will be completed with a 1-gang rocker with lens
of the chosen design range.
Please order the rocker with the additional print N1675DND to complete
the rocker with the DND symbol.

Example:
A 590 KO5 WW with print N1675DND
LS 990 KO5 WW with print N1675DND

Other colours and ranges are available on request.

179
168-185_3870_GB_26_Public:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 19:08 Uhr Seite 180

Hotel installation

Ref.-no.
1-gang push-button insert
for hotel display DND / MUR, corridor unit
Neutral conductor required
Screwless terminals for wires up to 2.5 mm
1-pole, 1-way (make)
10 AX / 250 V ~ 531 EU LED RG 230
24 V ~ 531 EU LED RG 24

Hotel display DND / MUR, corridor unit


for push-button insert ref.-no.: 531 EU LED RG ..
with lens and symbols "Do not disturb" and "Please make up room"

for A range

Duroplastic (scratch-proof) glossy


ivory A 590 KO92 LED
white A 590 KO92 LED WW
Duroplastic lacquered
aluminium A 590 KO92 LED AL
champagne A 590 KO92 LED CH
mocha A 590 KO92 LED MO

for LS range

Duroplastic (scratch-proof) glossy


ivory LS 990 KO92 LED
white LS 990 KO92 LED WW
light grey LS 990 KO92 LED LG
black LS 990 KO92 LED SW

metal versions
stainless steel ES 2990 KO92 LED
stainless steel (lacquered) ES 2990 KO92 LED -L
aluminium AL 2990 KO92 LED
aluminium (lacquered) AL 2990 KO92 LED -L
anthracite (aluminium lacquered) AL 2990 KO92 LED AN
classic brass ME 2990 KO92 LED C
antique brass ME 2990 KO92 LED AT

180
168-185_3870_GB_26_Public:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:31 Uhr Seite 181

Hotel installation

Ref.-no.
2-gang switch insert with indicator light
for hotel display DND/MUR, room unit
Neutral conductor required
Mechanical interlocking to avoid switching of both
rockers at the same time
with red and green LED lamp ref.-no.: 94-LED RT, 94-LED GN
Screwless terminals for wires up to 2.5 mm
1-pole, 1-way
10 AX / 250 V ~ 505 KO5 EU RG 230
24 V ~ 505 KO5 EU RG 24

Hotel display DND / MUR, room unit3870 GB 26 Retuschen


for switch insert ref.-no.: 505 KO5 EU RG ..
with lens and symbols "Do not disturb" and "Please make up room"

for LS range

Duroplastic (scratch-proof) glossy


white LS 995 KO5 WW-1675

Other colours and ranges are available on request:


The 2-gang switch insert with indicator light will be completed with a 2-gang rocker with lens
of the chosen design range. Please order the rocker with the additional print N1675 to complete the rocker
with the DND symbol.

Example:
A 595 KO5 WW with print N1675
LS 995 KO5 SW with print N1675

181
168-185_3870_GB_26_Public:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:31 Uhr Seite 182

Hotel installation

Ref.-no.
2-gang indicator light 230 V
equipped with 1 red and 1 white lamp (squared lenses)
to be controlled with 2-gang switch insert with indicator light
505 KOU or 505 KOVU5
red lamp with symbol: Do not disturb
white lamp with symbol: Make up room

for AS 500 and A range


ivory A 594-2 KO9
white A 594-2 KO9 WW
aluminium A 594-2 KO9 AL
black A 594-2 KO9 SW

for CD range
ivory 594-2 KO9
white CD 594-2 KO9 WW

for LS range
ivory LS 994-2 KO9
white LS 994-2 KO9 WW
light grey LS 994-2 KO9 LG

metal versions
stainless steel ES 2994-2 KO9
aluminium AL 2994-2 KO9
anthracite AL 2994-2 KO9 AN

182
168-185_3870_GB_26_Public:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:31 Uhr Seite 183

Hotel installation

Ref.-no.
1-gang indicator light 230 V
equipped with 1 red lamp (squared lenses)
and symbol Do not disturb

for AS 500 and A range


ivory A 594-1 KO9 DND
white A 594-1 KO9 DND WW
aluminium A 594-1 KO9 DND AL
black A 594-1 KO9 DND SW

for CD range
ivory 594-1 KO9 DND
white CD 594-1 KO9 DND WW

for LS range
ivory LS 994-1 KO9 DND
white LS 994-1 KO9 DND WW
light grey LS 994-1 KO9 DND LG

metal versions
stainless steel ES 2994-1 KO9 DND
aluminium AL 2994-1 KO9 DND
anthracite AL 2994-1 KO9 DND AN

LED reading light


with white LEDs
Operation only with power supply ref.-no. SV 539 LED or SV 539-948 LED.
Connect L, L and N or F1, F2 and of the power supply.

for LS range
white (aluminium lacquered) LS 539 WW LED LW-12
light grey (aluminium lacquered) LS 539 LG LED LW-12
black (aluminium lacquered) LS 539 SW LED LW-12

metal versions
aluminium AL 2539 LED LW-12
stainless steel (aluminium lacquered) ES 2539 LED LW-12
anthracite (aluminium lacquered) AL 2539 AN LED LW-12

183
168-185_3870_GB_26_Public:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:31 Uhr Seite 184

Hotel installation

Ref.-no.
Electric shaver socket outlet SO 7522 EINS
Screw terminals for wires up to 4 mm
with child protection (shutter)
Suitable for US NEMA 1 plug (2 pins) and Europlug

Input voltage: AC 230 V ~


Output voltage: AC 115 V ~ and AC 230 V ~
Isolating transformer
Overtemperature protection
Power: 20 VA

Centre plate
for electric shaver socket outlet ref.-no.: SO 7522 EINS
The device can be installed into multiple frames.

for AS 500 and A range

Duroplastic (scratch-proof) glossy


white SO A 7522 WW PL
black SO A 7522 SW PL
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
white SO A 7522 BF WW PL
black SO A 7522 BF SW PL
Thermoplastic (breakproof) lacquered
aluminium SO A 7522 BF AL PL
champagne SO A 7522 BF CH PL
mocha SO A 7522 BF MO PL

for LS range

Duroplastic (scratch-proof) glossy


ivory SO LS 7522 PL
white SO LS 7522 WW PL
light grey SO LS 7522 LG PL
black SO LS 7522 SW PL

metal versions
stainless steel SO ES 7522 PL
aluminium SO AL 7522 PL
anthracite (aluminium lacquered) SO AN 7522 PL
chrome SO GCR 7522 PL
gold-coloured SO GO 7522 PL
classic brass SO ME 7522 C PL
antique brass SO ME 7522 AT PL

184
168-185_3870_GB_26_Public:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:31 Uhr Seite 185

Hotel installation

Ref.-no.
Wall box for hollow walls, 2-gang 9062-02
for electric shaver socket outlet ref.-no. SO 7522 EINS

Depth: 47 mm
Cutting hole : 2 x 68 mm
Centre distance: 71 mm
For panel thickness: 7 40 mm
Device screws: 4
Cable entries 3 x 1.5 mm

Wall box for brick walls, 2-gang 1656-21


for electric shaver socket outlet ref.-no.: SO 7522 EINS

Length: 149 mm
Width: 80 mm
Depth: 68 mm
Installation opening : 2 x 60 mm
Device screws: 4

Electric shaver
socket outlet BS EN 61558
2 outlets, 115 V and 230 V
(lacquered)
The shaver socket has to be installed into wall box W 115-230
ivory SHSO 115-230
white SHSO 115-230 WW
stainless steel (lacquered) SHSO 115-230 ES-L
aluminium (lacquered) SHSO 115-230 AL-L
anthracite (lacquered) SHSO 115-230 AN-L
gold-bronze (lacquered) SHSO 115-230 GB-L
gold (lacquered) SHSO 115-230 GO-L

Wall box WB 115-230


for electric shaver socket
Material: metal

Wall box WB 115-230 PLA


for electric shaver socket
Material: plastic
Dimensions (WxHxD): 131.5 x 70 x 47 mm
Screw distance: 120 mm
Depth: 47 mm

185
LED technology
In buildings that are open to the public, clear identification is necessary to enable visitors to find
their way around. Signs that provide directions and information are however also a useful aid in
sprawling office buildings, in large hotel complexes or clinics that cover a wide area. This is par-
ticularly the case when the information can also be read in the dark. The LED technology from
JUNG creates the prerequisite for a progressive orientation option which meets all requirements.
Among the essential benefits of the system is its modular structure which makes it easy to install.
Due to the integration in the LS switch design, the unified appearance of the interior architectural
concept is retained and the user will be convinced by yet another factor.

Zwiti_LED_2015_GB.indd 19 27.02.15 14:17


186-193_3870_GB_26_LED.qxd:JungDeutsch.qxd 02.03.2015 12:37 Uhr Seite 187

LS range LED technology

Ref.-no.
Power supply insert
screw fixing only, without claws
The LED power supply insert is exclusively used for LED pilot light and LED info sings.
The device is not dimmable.
for AC 230/240 V ~, 50 Hz SV 539 LED
Technical data
Rated voltage: AC 230/240 V ~, 50 Hz
Ambient temperature: 0 ... +40 C
Terminals: L, N, L'
Protection class (with mounted cover): II
Power consumption (with mounted cover): typ. 2 x 5.4 VA / 2 x 1.0 W
Connection: screw terminals
Terminals for: 2 x 2.5 mm2 or 1 x 4 mm2

Power supply insert


screw fixing only, without claws
The LED power supply insert is exclusively used for LED pilot light and LED info sings.
The device is not dimmable.
for AC 9 36 V ~, 50 Hz; DC 12 48 V SV 539-948 LED
Technical data
Rated voltage:
AC-mode operation: AC 9 ... 36 V ~, 50 Hz
DC operation: DC 12 ... 48 V
Ambient temperature: 0 ... +40 C
Terminals: F1, , F2
Protection class (with mounted cover): II
Power consumption (with mounted cover):
AC-mode operation: 2 x 1.5 VA
DC operation: 2 x 1.0 W
Connection: screw terminals
Terminals for: 2 x 2.5 mm2 or 1 x 4 mm2

LED red/green pilot light


Operation only with power supply ref.-no. SV 539 LED or SV 539-948 LED.
Device with two light pads.
Connection of L and N for green LEDs, L and N for red LEDs.
The inscription is possible with printings on transparent foil.
white (aluminium lacquered) LS 539-2 WW LED RG
light grey (aluminium lacquered) LS 539-2 LG LED RG
black (aluminium lacquered) LS 539-2 SW LED RG
metal versions
aluminium AL 2539-2 LED RG
stainless steel (aluminium lacquered) ES 2539-2 LED RG
LED technology

anthracite (aluminium lacquered) AL 2539-2 AN LED RG


classic brass ME 2539-2 LED RG C
antique brass ME 2539-2 LED RG AT

187
186-193_3870_GB_26_LED.qxd:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:24 Uhr Seite 188

LED technology LS range

Ref.-no.
LED pilot light
with white and blue LEDs
Operation only with power supply ref.-no. SV 539 LED or SV 539-948 LED.
Connection of L and N for white LEDs, L and N for blue LEDs.
The inscription is possible with printings on transparent foil.
white (aluminium lacquered) LS 539 WW LEDWB
light grey (aluminium lacquered) LS 539 LG LEDWB
black (aluminium lacquered) LS 539 SW LEDWB
metal versions
aluminium AL 2539 LEDWB
stainless steel (aluminium lacquered) ES 2539 LEDWB
anthracite (aluminium lacquered) AL 2539 AN LEDWB
classic brass (lacquered) ME 2539 LEDWB C
antique brass (lacquered) ME 2539 LEDWB AT

LED pilot light


with RGB LEDs
Operation only with power supply ref.-no. SV 539 LED or SV 539-948 LED.
Connect L, L and N or F1, F2 and of the power supply.
The inscription is possible with printings on transparent foil.
white (aluminium lacquered) LS 539 WW RGB
light grey (aluminium lacquered) LS 539 LG RGB
black (aluminium lacquered) LS 539 SW RGB
metal versions
aluminium AL 2539 RGB
stainless steel (aluminium lacquered) ES 2539 RGB
anthracite (aluminium lacquered) AL 2539 AN RGB
dark (aluminium lacquered) AL 2539 RGB D
classic brass (lacquered) ME 2539 RGB C
antique brass (lacquered) ME 2539 RGB AT
The following colours can be selected with the DIP switch on the reverse side
of the device: Red, blue, green, purple, yellow, light blue, white

LED reading light


with white LEDs
Operation only with power supply ref.-no. SV 539 LED or SV 539-948 LED.
Connect L, L and N or F1, F2 and of the power supply.
white (aluminium lacquered) LS 539 WW LED LW-12
light grey (aluminium lacquered) LS 539 LG LED LW-12
black (aluminium lacquered) LS 539 SW LED LW-12
metal versions
aluminium AL 2539 LED LW-12
stainless steel (aluminium lacquered) ES 2539 LED LW-12
anthracite (aluminium lacquered) AL 2539 AN LED LW-12

188
186-193_3870_GB_26_LED.qxd:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:24 Uhr Seite 189

LS range LED technology

Ref.-no.
LED info sign
with neutral inscription field.
Dimensions: Info sign 71 x 71 mm (complete device 71 x 142 mm).
Operation only with power supply ref.-no. SV 539 LED or SV 539-948 LED.
For complete installation a frame of the respective design range (LS/AL/ES) is required.
with white LEDs
white (aluminium lacquered) LS 539 N71WWLED W
light grey (aluminium lacquered) LS 539 N71LGLED W
black (aluminium lacquered) LS 539 N71SWLED W
metal versions
aluminium AL 2539 N71LED W
stainless steel (aluminium lacquered) ES 2539 N71LED W
anthracite (aluminium lacquered) AL 2539 N71AN LED W

with blue LEDs


white (aluminium lacquered) LS 539 N71WWLED B
light grey (aluminium lacquered) LS 539 N71LGLED B
black (aluminium lacquered) LS 539 N71SWLED B
metal versions
aluminium AL 2539 N71LED B
stainless steel (aluminium lacquered) ES 2539 N71LED B
anthracite (aluminium lacquered) AL 2539 N71AN LED B

with RGB LEDs


white (aluminium lacquered) LS 539 N71WW RGB
light grey (aluminium lacquered) LS 539 N71LG RGB
black (aluminium lacquered) LS 539 N71SW RGB
metal versions
aluminium AL 2539 N71 RGB
stainless steel (aluminium lacquered) ES 2539 N71 RGB
anthracite (aluminium lacquered) AL 2539 N71AN RGB
The following colours can be selected with the DIP switch on the reverse
side of the device: Red, blue, green, purple, yellow, light blue, white

For individual inscriptions on LED info signs please visit our website
www.jung.de/en > Service > LED Info signs - Inscription

189
186-193_3870_GB_26_LED.qxd:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:24 Uhr Seite 190

LED technology LS range

Ref.-no.
LED floor pilot light
Operation only with power supply ref.-no. SV 539 LED or SV 539-948 LED.
with white LEDs
white (aluminium lacquered) LS 539-O WW LEDW
light grey (aluminium lacquered) LS 539-O LG LEDW
black (aluminium lacquered) LS 539-O SW LEDW
metal versions
aluminium AL 2539-O LEDW
stainless steel (aluminium lacquered) ES 2539-O LEDW
anthracite (aluminium lacquered) AL 2539-O AN LEDW
dark (aluminium lacquered) AL 2539-O LEDW D
classic brass ME 2539-O LEDW C
antique brass ME 2539-O LEDW AT

with blue LEDs


white (aluminium lacquered) LS 539-O WW LEDB
light grey (aluminium lacquered) LS 539-O LG LEDB
black (aluminium lacquered) LS 539-O SW LEDB
metal versions
aluminium AL 2539-O LEDB
stainless steel (aluminium lacquered) ES 2539-O LEDB
anthracite (aluminium lacquered) AL 2539-O AN LEDB
classic brass ME 2539-O LEDB C
antique brass ME 2539-O LEDB AT

with RGB LEDs


white (aluminium lacquered) LS 539-O WW RGB
light grey (aluminium lacquered) LS 539-O LG RGB
black (aluminium lacquered) LS 539-O SW RGB
metal versions
aluminium AL 2539-O RGB
stainless steel (aluminium lacquered) ES 2539-O RGB
anthracite (aluminium lacquered) AL 2539-O AN RGB
classic brass ME 2539-O RGB C
antique brass ME 2539-O RGB AT
The following colours can be selected with the DIP switch on the reverse side
of the device: Red, blue, green, purple, yellow, light blue, white

190
186-193_3870_GB_26_LED.qxd:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:24 Uhr Seite 191

A and LS ranges LED technology

Ref.-no.
SCHUKO socket 16 A / 250 V ~
with LED floor pilot light
with child protection (shutter)
Screwless terminals for wires up to 2.5 mm2
The LED insert is replaceable.
Connection via 2 stranded wires (brown/blue), approx. 220 mm long.
It can be connected directly to AC 230 V ~ or via switch.
Installation into flush box min. 63 mm (depth)
with white LEDs
white (aluminium lacquered) LS 520-O WW LEDW
light grey (aluminium lacquered) LS 520-O LG LEDW
black (aluminium lacquered) LS 520-O SW LEDW
metal versions
aluminium AL 2520-O LEDW
stainless steel ES 2520-O LEDW
anthracite (aluminium lacquered) AL 2520-O AN LEDW
chrome GCR 2520-O LEDW

LED insert
(Spare part)
for SCHUKO sockets ref.-no.: LS 520-O WW LEDW, LS 520-O LG LEDW, LS 520-O SW LEDW,
AL 2520-O LEDW, AL 2520-O AN LEDW, ES 2520-O LEDW, GCR 2520-O LEDW
with white LEDs
520-O LEDW-1

SCHUKO socket 16 A / 250 V ~


with LED floor pilot light
with child protection (shutter)
Screwless terminals for wires up to 2.5 mm2
will be delivered with 1-gang frame ref.-no.: AS 581-1 BF INA..
The combination with inscription module ref.-no..: AS 61 INA BT is not possible.
The LED insert is replaceable.
Connection via 2 stranded wires (brown/blue), approx. 220 mm long.
It can be connected directly to AC 230 V ~ or via switch.
Installation into flush box min. 63 mm (depth)
with white LEDs
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory AS 520-O BF LEDW
white AS 520-O BF WW LEDW

191
186-193_3870_GB_26_LED.qxd:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:24 Uhr Seite 192

LED technology A and LS ranges

IP Protection level IP 44 ensured


P Colour printing possible
L Laser labelling possible

Ref.-no.
SCHUKO socket 16 A / 250 V ~
with child protection (shutter)
with integrated illuminated inscription module (moisture-proof) 50 x 10 mm
Screwless terminals for wires up to 2.5 mm2
(inscription module ref.-no.: LS 61 INA BT)
The LED insert is replaceable.
Connection via 2 stranded wires (brown/blue), approx. 220 mm long.
It can be connected directly to AC 230 V ~ or via switch.
Installation into flush box min. 63 mm (depth)
with white LEDs
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory L LS 520-O INA LDW
white L LS 520-O INA WW LDW
light grey L LS 520-O INA LG LDW
green LS 520-O INA GN LDW
orange LS 520-O INA O LDW
black L LS 520-O INA SW LDW

Inscription module 50 x 10 mm
(Spare part)
for SCHUKO sockets ref.-no.: LS 520 .. INA ..
LS 61 INA BT

LED insert
(Spare part)
for SCHUKO sockets ref.-no.: LS 520-O INA .. LDW
with white LEDs
520-O LEDW-2

1-gang switch insert 10 AX / 250 V ~


Screwless terminals for wires up to 2.5 mm2
with integrated LED insert
Only in combination with frame ref.-no. AS 581-1 BF INA.. and inscription module
ref.-no. AS 61 INA BT (application: illuminated inscription field) or lens and frame holder
ref.-no. AS 61 LL (application: floor pilot light)
The LED insert is replaceable.
Connection via 2 stranded wires (brown/blue), approx. 220 mm long.
It can be connected directly to AC 230 V ~ or via switch.
Installation into flush box min. 63 mm (depth)
with white LEDs
1-pole, 2-way 506 U-LEDW

1-gang push-button insert 10 AX / 250 V ~


Screwless terminals for wires up to 2.5 mm2
with integrated LED insert
Only in combination with frame ref.-no. AS 581-1 BF INA.. and inscription module
ref.-no. AS 61 INA BT (application: illuminated inscription field) or lens and frame holder
ref.-no. AS 61 LL (application: floor pilot light)
The LED insert is replaceable.
Connection via 2 stranded wires (brown/blue), approx. 220 mm long.
It can be connected directly to AC 230 V ~ or via switch.
Installation into flush box min. 63 mm (depth)
with white LEDs
1-pole, 2-way with terminal for N conductor 533 U-LEDW

192
186-193_3870_GB_26_LED.qxd:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:24 Uhr Seite 193

A range LED technology

Ref.-no.
Lens and frame holder
for 506 U-LEDW and 533 U-LEDW for application as floor pilot light
Only in combination with frame ref.-no. AS 581-1 BF INA...
AS 61 LL

SCHUKO socket 16 A / 250 V ~


with LED floor pilot light
with child protection (shutter)
Screwless terminals for wires up to 2.5 mm2
Only in combination with frame ref.-no. AS 581-1 BF INA.. and inscription module
ref.-no. AS 61 INA BT (application: illuminated inscription field)
The LED insert is replaceable.
Connection via 2 stranded wires (brown/blue), approx. 220 mm long.
It can be connected directly to AC 230 V ~ or via switch.
Installation into flush box min. 63 mm (depth)
with white LEDs
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory A 520-O BF LEDW
white A 520-O BF WW LEDW

Inscription module 53.5 x 10 mm


Only in combination with frame ref.-no. AS 581-1 BF INA...
(application: moisture-proof inscription field)
AS 61 INA BT

Frame
with window (moisture-proof) 55.6 x 9.18 mm and 54.2 x 10.85 mm
Only in combination with switch insert ref.-no.: 506 U-LEDW, push button insert ref.-no.: 533 U-LEDW or
SCHUKO socket ref.-no.: A 520-O BF .. LEDW and inscription module ref.-no.: AS 61 INA BT (application:
illuminated inscription field) or lens and frame holder ref.-no. AS 61 LL (application: floor pilot light).
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory 1-gang 80.5 x 80.5 mm AS 581-1 BF INA
white 1-gang 80.5 x 80.5 mm AS 581-1 BF INA WW

LED insert
(Spare part)
for SCHUKO sockets ref.-no.: LS 520-O INA .. LDW
for SCHUKO sockets ref.-no.: AS 520-O BF .. LEDW and A 520-O BF .. LEDW
for switch insert ref.-no.: 506 U-LEDW
for push-button insert ref.-no.: 533 U-LEDW
with white LEDs
520-O LEDW-2

193
The system provides connections for analogue, digital,
and mobile devices

Cinch audio Composite Video


For the connection of analog For the connection of analogue
audio equipment, such as hi-fi video equipment such as DVD
systems. players/recorders, video recorders
or receivers.

DVI USB
Interface for the simultaneous For the 2.0 high-speed connection
transmission of analogue and of mobile devices such as computer
digital video data, e.g. from a accessories or digital cameras.
DVD player to a TV set.

HDMI VGA
Analogue image transmission
For the connection of digital standard to connect PCs and
devices to transfer high-resolution laptops with display devices
audio and video data, e.g. from such as monitors and beamers.
SAT to a LCD screen.

S-Video
Mini-jack 3.5 mm For the connection of analog
To connect mobile devices such video equipment such as DVD
as MP3 players or mobile phones. players/recorders, video recorders
or receivers.

Zwiti_Multimedia_2015_GB.indd 20 27.02.15 14:20


Multimedia terminals
terminals / USB
Multimedia

Multimedia components are now part of almost every piece of equipment, whether it is a full HD
screen, a games console in the lounge or the projector and LCD monitor in the office. The JUNG
multimedia terminal system is available for linking this entertainment electronics harmoniously with
the electrical installation in the house. With design frames in the A, CD and LS ranges, it offers
numerous possibilities for combining the various terminals.

Zwiti_Multimedia_2015_GB.indd 21 27.02.15 14:21


194-209_3870_GB_26_MultiM:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:32 Uhr Seite 196

Multimedia terminals AS, A, CD and LS ranges

Ref.-no.
Cinch Audio (RCA) / Stereo Jack (TRS 3.5 mm)
with supporting frame, screw fixing only

for AS and A ranges


Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory MA A 1011
white MA A 1011 WW
black MA A 1011 SW
Thermoplastic (breakproof) lacquered
aluminium MA A 1011 AL
matt anthracite MA A 1011 ANM

for CD range
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
white MA CD 1011 WW

for LS range
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory MA LS 1011
white MA LS 1011 WW
light grey MA LS 1011 LG
black MA LS 1011 SW
metal versions
aluminium MA AL 1011
stainless steel MA ES 1011
anthracite (aluminium lacquered) MA AL 1011 AN
chrome MA GCR 1011
gold-coloured MA GO 1011

Cinch Audio (RCA)


with supporting frame, screw fixing only

for AS and A ranges


Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory MA A 1021
white MA A 1021 WW
black MA A 1021 SW
Thermoplastic (breakproof) lacquered
aluminium MA A 1021 AL
matt anthracite MA A 1021 ANM

for CD range
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
white MA CD 1021 WW

196
194-209_3870_GB_26_MultiM:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:32 Uhr Seite 197

AS, A, CD and LS ranges Multimedia terminals

Ref.-no.
Cinch Audio (RCA)
with supporting frame, screw fixing only

for LS range
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory MA LS 1021
white MA LS 1021 WW
light grey MA LS 1021 LG
black MA LS 1021 SW
metal versions
aluminium MA AL 1021
stainless steel MA ES 1021
anthracite (aluminium lacquered) MA AL 1021 AN
chrome MA GCR 1021
gold-coloured MA GO 1021

Cinch Audio (RCA) / Composite Video


with supporting frame, screw fixing only

for AS and A ranges


Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory MA A 1031
white MA A 1031 WW
black MA A 1031 SW
Thermoplastic (breakproof) lacquered
aluminium MA A 1031 AL
matt anthracite MA A 1031 ANM

for CD range
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
white MA CD 1031 WW

for LS range
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory MA LS 1031
white MA LS 1031 WW
light grey MA LS 1031 LG
black MA LS 1031 SW
metal versions
aluminium MA AL 1031
stainless steel MA ES 1031
anthracite (aluminium lacquered) MA AL 1031 AN
chrome MA GCR 1031
gold-coloured MA GO 1031

197
194-209_3870_GB_26_MultiM:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:32 Uhr Seite 198

Multimedia terminals AS, A, CD and LS ranges

Ref.-no.
Composite Video / S-Video
with supporting frame, screw fixing only

for AS and A ranges


Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory MA A 1041
white MA A 1041 WW
black MA A 1041 SW
Thermoplastic (breakproof) lacquered
aluminium MA A 1041 AL
matt anthracite MA A 1041 ANM

for CD range
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
white MA CD 1041 WW

for LS range
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory MA LS 1041
white MA LS 1041 WW
light grey MA LS 1041 LG
black MA LS 1041 SW
metal versions
aluminium MA AL 1041
stainless steel MA ES 1041
anthracite (aluminium lacquered) MA AL 1041 AN
chrome MA GCR 1041
gold-coloured MA GO 1041

Cinch Audio (RCA) / Composite Video / S-Video


with supporting frame, screw fixing only

for AS and A ranges


Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory MA A 1051
white MA A 1051 WW
black MA A 1051 SW
Thermoplastic (breakproof) lacquered
aluminium MA A 1051 AL
matt anthracite MA A 1051 ANM

for CD range
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
white MA CD 1051 WW

198
194-209_3870_GB_26_MultiM:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:32 Uhr Seite 199

AS, A, CD and LS ranges Multimedia terminals

Ref.-no.
Cinch Audio (RCA) / Composite Video / S-Video
with supporting frame, screw fixing only

for LS range
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory MA LS 1051
white MA LS 1051 WW
light grey MA LS 1051 LG
black MA LS 1051 SW
metal versions
aluminium MA AL 1051
stainless steel MA ES 1051
anthracite (aluminium lacquered) MA AL 1051 AN
chrome MA GCR 1051
gold-coloured MA GO 1051

Cinch Audio (RCA) / Composite Video / S-Video / Stereo Jack (TRS 3.5 mm)
with supporting frame, screw fixing only

for AS and A ranges


Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory MA A 1061
white MA A 1061 WW
black MA A 1061 SW
Thermoplastic (breakproof) lacquered
aluminium MA A 1061 AL
matt anthracite MA A 1061 ANM

for CD range
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
white MA CD 1061 WW

for LS range
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory MA LS 1061
white MA LS 1061 WW
light grey MA LS 1061 LG
black MA LS 1061 SW
metal versions
aluminium MA AL 1061
stainless steel MA ES 1061
anthracite (aluminium lacquered) MA AL 1061 AN
chrome MA GCR 1061
gold-coloured MA GO 1061

199
194-209_3870_GB_26_MultiM:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:32 Uhr Seite 200

Multimedia terminals AS, A, CD and LS ranges

Ref.-no.
VGA
with supporting frame, screw fixing only

for AS and A ranges


Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory MA A 1102
white MA A 1102 WW
black MA A 1102 SW
Thermoplastic (breakproof) lacquered
aluminium MA A 1102 AL
matt anthracite MA A 1102 ANM

for CD range
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
white MA CD 1102 WW

for LS range
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory MA LS 1102
white MA LS 1102 WW
light grey MA LS 1102 LG
black MA LS 1102 SW
metal versions
aluminium MA AL 1102
stainless steel MA ES 1102
anthracite (aluminium lacquered) MA AL 1102 AN
chrome MA GCR 1102
gold-coloured MA GO 1102

HDMI
with supporting frame, screw fixing only

for AS and A ranges


Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory MA A 1112
white MA A 1112 WW
black MA A 1112 SW
Thermoplastic (breakproof) lacquered
aluminium MA A 1112 AL
matt anthracite MA A 1112 ANM

for CD range
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
white MA CD 1112 WW

200
194-209_3870_GB_26_MultiM:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:32 Uhr Seite 201

AS, A, CD and LS ranges Multimedia terminals

Ref.-no.
HDMI
with supporting frame, screw fixing only

for LS range
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory MA LS 1112
white MA LS 1112 WW
light grey MA LS 1112 LG
black MA LS 1112 SW
metal versions
aluminium MA AL 1112
stainless steel MA ES 1112
anthracite (aluminium lacquered) MA AL 1112 AN
chrome MA GCR 1112
gold-coloured MA GO 1112

USB
with supporting frame, screw fixing only

for AS and A ranges


Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory MA A 1122
white MA A 1122 WW
black MA A 1122 SW
Thermoplastic (breakproof) lacquered
aluminium MA A 1122 AL
matt anthracite MA A 1122 ANM

for CD range
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
white MA CD 1122 WW

for LS range
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory MA LS 1122
white MA LS 1122 WW
light grey MA LS 1122 LG
black MA LS 1122 SW
metal versions
aluminium MA AL 1122
stainless steel MA ES 1122
anthracite (aluminium lacquered) MA AL 1122 AN
chrome MA GCR 1122
gold-coloured MA GO 1122

201
194-209_3870_GB_26_MultiM:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:32 Uhr Seite 202

Multimedia terminals AS, A, CD and LS ranges

Ref.-no.
Cinch Audio (RCA) / Stereo Jack (TRS 3.5 mm) / VGA
with supporting frame, screw fixing only

for AS and A ranges


Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory MA A 1072
white MA A 1072 WW
black MA A 1072 SW
Thermoplastic (breakproof) lacquered
aluminium MA A 1072 AL
matt anthracite MA A 1072 ANM

for CD range
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
white MA CD 1072 WW

for LS range
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory MA LS 1072
white MA LS 1072 WW
light grey MA LS 1072 LG
black MA LS 1072 SW
metal versions
aluminium MA AL 1072
stainless steel MA ES 1072
anthracite (aluminium lacquered) MA AL 1072 AN
chrome MA GCR 1072
gold-coloured MA GO 1072

Cinch Audio (RCA) / Stereo Jack (TRS 3.5 mm) / HDMI


with supporting frame, screw fixing only

for AS and A ranges


Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory MA A 1082
white MA A 1082 WW
black MA A 1082 SW
Thermoplastic (breakproof) lacquered
aluminium MA A 1082 AL
matt anthracite MA A 1082 ANM

for CD range
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
white MA CD 1082 WW

202
194-209_3870_GB_26_MultiM:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:32 Uhr Seite 203

AS, A, CD and LS ranges Multimedia terminals

Ref.-no.
Cinch Audio (RCA) / Stereo Jack (TRS 3.5 mm) / HDMI
with supporting frame, screw fixing only

for LS range
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory MA LS 1082
white MA LS 1082 WW
light grey MA LS 1082 LG
black MA LS 1082 SW
metal versions
aluminium MA AL 1082
stainless steel MA ES 1082
anthracite (aluminium lacquered) MA AL 1082 AN
chrome MA GCR 1082
gold-coloured MA GO 1082

Cinch Audio (RCA) / Stereo Jack (TRS 3.5 mm) / USB


with supporting frame, screw fixing only

for AS and A ranges


Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory MA A 1092
white MA A 1092 WW
black MA A 1092 SW
Thermoplastic (breakproof) lacquered
aluminium MA A 1092 AL
matt anthracite MA A 1092 ANM

for CD range
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
white MA CD 1092 WW

for LS range
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory MA LS 1092
white MA LS 1092 WW
light grey MA LS 1092 LG
black MA LS 1092 SW
metal versions
aluminium MA AL 1092
stainless steel MA ES 1092
anthracite (aluminium lacquered) MA AL 1092 AN
chrome MA GCR 1092
gold-coloured MA GO 1092

203
194-209_3870_GB_26_MultiM:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:32 Uhr Seite 204

Multimedia terminals AS, A, CD and LS ranges

Ref.-no.
2 x HDMI
with supporting frame, screw fixing only

for AS and A ranges


Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory MA A 1133
white MA A 1133 WW
black MA A 1133 SW
Thermoplastic (breakproof) lacquered
aluminium MA A 1133 AL
matt anthracite MA A 1133 ANM

for CD range
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
white MA CD 1133 WW

for LS range
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory MA LS 1133
white MA LS 1133 WW
light grey MA LS 1133 LG
black MA LS 1133 SW
metal versions
aluminium MA AL 1133
stainless steel MA ES 1133
anthracite (aluminium lacquered) MA AL 1133 AN
chrome MA GCR 1133
gold-coloured MA GO 1133

2 x VGA
with supporting frame, screw fixing only

for AS and A ranges


Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory MA A 1143
white MA A 1143 WW
black MA A 1143 SW
Thermoplastic (breakproof) lacquered
aluminium MA A 1143 AL
matt anthracite MA A 1143 ANM

for CD range
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
white MA CD 1143 WW

204
194-209_3870_GB_26_MultiM:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:32 Uhr Seite 205

AS, A, CD and LS ranges Multimedia terminals

Ref.-no.
2 x VGA
with supporting frame, screw fixing only

for LS range
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory MA LS 1143
white MA LS 1143 WW
light grey MA LS 1143 LG
black MA LS 1143 SW
metal versions
aluminium MA AL 1143
stainless steel MA ES 1143
anthracite (aluminium lacquered) MA AL 1143 AN
chrome MA GCR 1143
gold-coloured MA GO 1143

2 x USB
with supporting frame, screw fixing only

for AS and A ranges


Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory MA A 1153
white MA A 1153 WW
black MA A 1153 SW
Thermoplastic (breakproof) lacquered
aluminium MA A 1153 AL
matt anthracite MA A 1153 ANM

for CD range
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
white MA CD 1153 WW

for LS range
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory MA LS 1153
white MA LS 1153 WW
light grey MA LS 1153 LG
black MA LS 1153 SW
metal versions
aluminium MA AL 1153
stainless steel MA ES 1153
anthracite (aluminium lacquered) MA AL 1153 AN
chrome MA GCR 1153
gold-coloured MA GO 1153

205
194-209_3870_GB_26_MultiM:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:32 Uhr Seite 206

Multimedia terminals AS, A, CD and LS ranges

Ref.-no.
HDMI / USB
with supporting frame, screw fixing only

for AS and A ranges


Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory MA A 1163
white MA A 1163 WW
black MA A 1163 SW
Thermoplastic (breakproof) lacquered
aluminium MA A 1163 AL
matt anthracite MA A 1163 ANM

for CD range
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
white MA CD 1163 WW

for LS range
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory MA LS 1163
white MA LS 1163 WW
light grey MA LS 1163 LG
black MA LS 1163 SW
metal versions
aluminium MA AL 1163
stainless steel MA ES 1163
anthracite (aluminium lacquered) MA AL 1163 AN
chrome MA GCR 1163
gold-coloured MA GO 1163

HDMI / VGA
with supporting frame, screw fixing only

for AS and A ranges


Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory MA A 1173
white MA A 1173 WW
black MA A 1173 SW
Thermoplastic (breakproof) lacquered
aluminium MA A 1173 AL
matt anthracite MA A 1173 ANM

for CD range
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
white MA CD 1173 WW

206
194-209_3870_GB_26_MultiM:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:32 Uhr Seite 207

AS, A, CD and LS ranges Multimedia terminals

Ref.-no.
HDMI / VGA
with supporting frame, screw fixing only

for LS range
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory MA LS 1173
white MA LS 1173 WW
light grey MA LS 1173 LG
black MA LS 1173 SW
metal versions
aluminium MA AL 1173
stainless steel MA ES 1173
anthracite (aluminium lacquered) MA AL 1173 AN
chrome MA GCR 1173
gold-coloured MA GO 1173

USB / VGA
with supporting frame, screw fixing only

for AS and A ranges


Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory MA A 1183
white MA A 1183 WW
black MA A 1183 SW
Thermoplastic (breakproof) lacquered
aluminium MA A 1183 AL
matt anthracite MA A 1183 ANM

for CD range
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
white MA CD 1183 WW

for LS range
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory MA LS 1183
white MA LS 1183 WW
light grey MA LS 1183 LG
black MA LS 1183 SW
metal versions
aluminium MA AL 1183
stainless steel MA ES 1183
anthracite (aluminium lacquered) MA AL 1183 AN
chrome MA GCR 1183
gold-coloured MA GO 1183

207
194-209_3870_GB_26_MultiM:JungDeutsch.qxd 28.02.2015 15:32 Uhr Seite 208

Multimedia terminals AS, A, CD and LS ranges

Ref.-no.
DVI
with supporting frame, screw fixing only

for AS and A ranges


Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss
ivory MA A 1193
white MA A 1193 WW
black MA A 1193 SW
Thermoplastic (breakproof) lacquered
aluminium MA A 1193 AL
matt anthracite MA A 1193 ANM

for CD range
Thermoplastic (breakproof) high-gloss